JP2015208410A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine which can further enhance interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game control unit obtains a random number value regarding a special pattern at a moment when a first start port switch or a second start port switch detects the passage of a game ball, and determines, on the basis of the obtained random number value, whether to carry out a special game (jackpot game etc.) advantageous for a player. When it is determined in this determination to carry out the jackpot game etc., the operation pattern and the round number of a big winning port as well as a high probability state, a middle probability state, or a low probability state as a game state after the end of the jackpot game are set. After the determinations are carried out a predetermined times in the high probability state, the game state may be changed to the middle probability state. After the determinations are carried out a predetermined times in the middle probability state, the game state may be changed to the low probability state.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a game machine having a gaming device capable of generating a special gaming state, and a control unit that performs a transition control to a game in the special gaming state based on the occurrence of the special gaming state by the gaming device. The means makes it possible to control the probability of occurrence of a special gaming state in the gaming device into a low probability state disadvantageous for the player and a high probability state advantageous for the player, and a predetermined condition during the game has been achieved. And a probability variation control means for controlling the occurrence probability of the special gaming state from the low probability state to the high probability state, and a notification means for notifying the player of the high probability state of the probability variation control means. A gaming machine characterized by the above is disclosed.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 08-318030

By the way, depending on the state of the game, the way of enjoying the game changes, and it also becomes a material for determining whether or not to continue the game. Therefore, by setting a gaming state that has not existed in the past, it becomes possible to achieve a gameability that is different from the conventional one, and it is possible to make the player feel various expectations for the game.
An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can further enhance the interest of a game.

The present invention that achieves the above object has a normal winning probability and a probability variation state that is higher than the normal state, and when a game ball entering the start port (a121, a122) is detected. A gaming machine that makes a jackpot determination with a predetermined jackpot winning probability,
First determination means (a234) for performing the jackpot determination with the predetermined jackpot winning probability and determining whether or not the jackpot or not,
As a state after the jackpot game performed when the determination by the first determination means (a234) is a jackpot, the probability variation state is a high probability state in which the jackpot winning probability is higher than the normal state and the jackpot winning probability is the above-mentioned A second determination means (a234) for determining which of the medium probability states lower than the high probability state to shift to;
When the jackpot winning probability is the high probability state, after the jackpot determination is performed a predetermined number of times, the jackpot winning probability is shifted from the high probability state to the medium probability state with a predetermined probability, and the jackpot winning probability is the medium probability A game control means (a200) for making a transition from the medium probability state to the normal state after the jackpot determination is made a predetermined number of times when in a state;
A gaming machine, comprising:
More specifically, the game control means (a200), when the jackpot winning probability is the high probability state, after the jackpot determination is performed a predetermined number of times, with a predetermined probability, from the high probability state to the normal probability It is good also as a structure controlled so that it may transfer to this state.

  In addition, the said code | symbol in this column is attached | subjected illustratively in the description of this invention, and this invention is not reduced by this code | symbol.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

It is a schematic front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment in the first embodiment. (A) is an enlarged view showing an example of a display device arranged at the lower right of the game board, (b) is a partial plan view of the pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the control unit of the pachinko game machine of this Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the function structure of the game control part of this Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main operation | movement of the game control part of this Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a start port switch process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the gate switch process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the special symbol process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the process during a stop. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a customer waiting | standby setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of normal symbol processing. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the big prize opening process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the game state setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of an electric tulip process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the jackpot random number used by this Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a jackpot symbol random number. (A) is a figure which shows the structural example of a reach random number, (b) is a figure which shows the structural example of a hit random number. It is a flowchart which shows operation | movement of an effect control part, (a) is a figure which shows a main process, (b) is a figure which shows an interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of command reception processing. It is a figure which shows the example of a setting of a mode flag. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the production | presentation selection process of FIGS. 1-19. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the process during completion | finish of the fluctuation production of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the win production | presentation selection process of FIGS. 1-19. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the ending effect selection process of FIGS. 1-19. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the customer waiting command reception process of FIGS. 1-19. It is a flowchart which shows the content of effect button processing. It is a block diagram explaining the structural example of RAM of a game control part. It is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of a RAM of an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the random number used by a prior determination process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the random number used by a prior determination process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the random number used by a prior determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the prior determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a part of operation | movement of an effect control part. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a prior determination command reception process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of an effect execution command reception process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the lighting number increase production command process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the effect control process in an effect control part. It is a figure explaining the specific 1st aspect of lighting number increase production. It is a figure explaining the 2nd concrete mode of lighting number increase production. It is a figure explaining the 3rd concrete mode of lighting number increase production. It is a figure explaining the concrete 4th aspect of lighting number increase production. It is a figure for demonstrating the production button in a 2nd form example. It is a flowchart which shows the content of the reception process of the alerting | reporting command by an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the example of the reservation ball display displayed on an image display part. It is a figure for demonstrating the prefetch alerting | reporting effect. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the operation instruction display and alerting | reporting regarding an effective period. It is a figure explaining the special production in the example of the 3rd form. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special effect. It is a flowchart which shows the operation example of an effect control part. It is a flowchart which shows the operation example of an image / sound control part. It is a figure explaining opening control of the big prize opening at the time of the big hit game in the 4th form example. It is a figure explaining the relationship between jackpot game control and jackpot game effect control according to the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of an image displayed on an image display part by an end display effect. It is a figure explaining the content of the end display effect which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of the special effect in a 5th form example. It is a figure which shows a mode that it transfers to a special effect through a warning effect. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the effect image displayed on an image display part. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the control procedure of a special effect and a precursor effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a pseudo continuous notice scenario determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the design effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the time chart of pseudo | simulation continuous notice effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen 1 of a pseudo | simulation continuous notice effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen 2 of a pseudo continuous notice effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen 3 of a pseudo | simulation continuous notice effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen 4 of a pseudo | simulation continuous notice effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen 5 of a pseudo continuous notice effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the characteristic production performed on the screen of the liquid crystal display of the pachinko game machine which concerns on this embodiment in a 7th form example. It is a figure which shows the other example of the characteristic production performed on the screen of the liquid crystal display of the pachinko game machine concerning this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the identification display displayed in the specific production performed in the pachinko game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the flow of the specific production using identification display "RUSH". It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect performed with the fluctuation | variation of a normal symbol as a trigger. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect performed with the fluctuation | variation of a special symbol. It is a figure which shows an example of execution control of the specific effect in case the execution conditions of the special figure specific effect triggered by the change of the special symbol and the execution condition of the common figure specific effect triggered by the change of the normal symbol are established simultaneously . It is a figure which shows an example of execution control of the specific effect in case the execution conditions of the special figure specific effect triggered by the change of the special symbol and the execution condition of the common figure specific effect triggered by the change of the normal symbol are established simultaneously . It is a figure which shows the kind of jackpot of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the symbol stopped by the special symbol display, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol when the symbol stops, and the special symbol specific effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure specific production triggered by the change of the special symbol. It is a figure which shows an example in the case where the production | presentation which suggests the result of a special symbol determination is performed in the common figure specific production triggered by the fluctuation | variation of the normal symbol. It is a figure which shows an example of the common figure specific effect in the case of stopping, after a normal symbol fluctuates during the fluctuation period of a special symbol. It is a figure which shows an example of the common figure specific effect in case a normal symbol fluctuates across the time of the change start of a special symbol, and / or a change stop. It is a figure which shows the other example of a common figure specific effect in case a normal symbol fluctuates across the time of the fluctuation | variation start of a special symbol, and / or a fluctuation stop. It is a figure which shows an example of the production pattern of a specific production. It is a figure which shows an example of effect control. It is a figure which shows with the relationship between the kind of jackpot, and the effect performed during a symbol change and jackpot game when it is determined that it is a jackpot in the normal gaming state in the eighth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flow of the production | presentation performed during a jackpot game from the time of symbol change for every kind of jackpot. It is a screen figure which shows the specific example of the production | presentation regarding the jackpot using a 1st big winning opening. It is a figure which shows an example of a moving image selection screen. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a moving image selection screen in a state where the number of consecutive channels is larger than the state illustrated in FIG. It is a figure which shows the flow of the production including the case where it becomes RUB. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed on a liquid crystal display device at the time of the 1st game production. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed after the image shown to FIGS. 8-12 when the first game production is performed. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed on a liquid crystal display device at the time of the 2nd game production. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed on a liquid crystal display device, after a promotion effect is performed. It is a detailed flowchart of a 1st game effect process. It is a detailed flowchart of a 2nd game effect process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the production image displayed on the liquid crystal display device in a 9th form example, and a production | presentation actor. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of the production performed when a white fireworks icon is moved to the said area | region. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect performed when a white fireworks icon is moved to the said area | region. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of the production performed when a haze icon is moved to the said area | region. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production | presentation of the failure pattern performed when a haze icon is moved to the said area | region. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production | presentation of the success pattern performed when a haze icon is moved to the said area | region. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of the production performed when a ninja icon is moved to the said area | region. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production | presentation of the failure pattern performed when a ninja icon is moved to the said area | region. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production | presentation of the 1st successful pattern performed when a ninja icon is moved to the said area | region. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production of the 2nd successful pattern performed when a ninja icon is moved to the said area | region. It is a detailed flowchart of a notice effect pattern setting process. It is a detailed flowchart of a notice effect pattern setting process. It is a screen figure of the liquid crystal display device for demonstrating an example of the said 1st said image production at the time of the reach production in a 10th form example. It is a screen figure of the liquid crystal display device for demonstrating an example of the 1st said image production at the time of jackpot production being performed after reach production is performed. It is a screen figure of the liquid crystal display device for demonstrating an example of the said 2nd said image production at the time of reach production. It is a screen figure of the liquid crystal display device for demonstrating an example of the said 2nd said image production at the time of jackpot production being performed after reach production is performed. It is a block diagram which shows an example of a structure of sub-RAM, and various information stored in sub-RAM. It is a detailed flowchart which shows an example of a command reception process. It is a detailed flowchart which shows an example of a command reception process. It is a detailed flowchart which shows an example of a command reception process. It is a detailed flowchart which shows an example of the change production pattern setting process in step j125 of FIGS. 10-22.

Next, embodiments for carrying out the invention will be described in detail. In addition, the form demonstrated in this column is an illustration to the last, and is not limited to this. In addition, it is possible to apply all or part of the configuration, control, and the like in each of the exemplary embodiments described later to other exemplary embodiments or combine them with other exemplary embodiments without reference to this document. In addition, although various modified examples will be described for each embodiment, it is possible to apply the modified example to other embodiments even when there is no mention in this document.
Specifically, the forms to be described below are the first form example, the second form example, the third form example, the fourth form example, the fifth form example, the sixth form example, and the seventh form example. They are a form example, an eighth form example, a ninth form example, and a tenth form example. In addition, about the structure, control, etc. which overlap with another form example, the description and illustration may be abbreviate | omitted and drawing of another form example may be utilized. In addition, descriptions and illustrations may be given without omitting configurations and controls that overlap with other embodiments.

[First embodiment]
First, the first embodiment will be described.
Here, if the game by the game ball is continued for a long time, it becomes difficult to maintain the player's concentration and the like. Therefore, it is conceivable to use such pre-reading effects in order to maintain the player's concentration and the like. However, it has been difficult to sufficiently maintain the player's concentration and the like in the pre-reading effect on the gaming machine proposed heretofore.
Therefore, the first embodiment adopts the following configuration in order to further enhance the interest of the game when the player plays.

That is, in the gaming machine according to the first embodiment, when the first detection means b211 detects the winning at the first start opening b121, the first lottery means b231 performs the big hit lottery and the second start opening b122. When the second detection means b212 detects the winning in the game, the second lottery means b231 performs the big win lottery, and the symbol display showing the result of the big hit lottery and the display in which the symbols change before the symbol display is performed. The holding ball generation information about the generation of the holding ball for which the big hit lottery of the first lottery means b231 performed in response to the winning detected by the first detection means b211 is held is obtained. The winning means lot 231 by the first lottery means b231 for the winning means relating to the holding ball generation information acquired by the acquiring means b231 and the acquisition means b231 Preliminary determination means b231 for determining the result of the big hit lottery before being performed, and the final effect mode in a specific effect performed over a plurality of variation displays that continue to the variation when the determination by the prior determination means b231 is predetermined And determining means b301 for determining the specific effect, and executing means for executing the specific effect so that the effect mode changes at the time of a plurality of variation displays, and shifts to the final effect mode determined by the determination unit b301. b301, and the execution means b301 suspends execution of the specific effect when triggered by a variation display based on a winning detected by the second detection means b212 during the execution of the specific effect, and the variation Then, it is shifted to the final effect form in the specific effect.
Hereinafter, a specific description will be given with reference to the drawings having the drawing numbers including “FIG. 1” (hereinafter also referred to as FIG. 1).

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings.
[Basic configuration of gaming machine]
FIG. 1-1 is a schematic front view of a pachinko gaming machine a100 according to the present embodiment.
A pachinko gaming machine a100 as an example of the gaming machine shown in the figure is configured to pay out a prize ball when a gaming ball launched by a player's instruction operation wins a prize. The pachinko gaming machine a100 includes a game board a110 on which a game ball is launched, and a frame member a150 surrounding the game board a110. The game board a110 is detachably attached to the frame member a150.

The game board a110 has, on the front, a game area a111 for playing a game with a game ball, a rail member a112 that forms a passage where a game ball launched from below moves upward and toward the upper position of the game area a111, and a game A guide member a113 for guiding the game ball is provided on the right side of the area a111.
In the present embodiment, an image display unit a114 that displays various images for effects is provided at a position of the game area a111 that is easily visible by the player. The image display unit a114 includes a display screen such as a liquid crystal display, and displays, for example, a decorative symbol for notifying the player of a symbol lottery result (symbol variation result) as the game progresses by the player. An effect image by the appearance of a character or the appearance of an item is displayed.
In addition, a movable accessory a115 and a board lamp a116 used for various effects are provided on the front surface of the game board a110. The movable accessory a115 performs various effects by operating on the game board a110, and the board lamp a116 performs various effects by emitting light.

  In the game area a111, a game nail and a windmill (not shown) for changing the direction in which the game ball falls are arranged. Further, in the game area a111, various bonuses relating to winning and lottery are arranged at predetermined positions. In addition, the game area a111 is provided with a discharge port a117 that discharges, out of the game area a111, game balls that have been launched in the game area a111 and that have not been won in the winning area.

  In the present embodiment, as various functions related to winning and lottery, a special symbol lottery (a jackpot lottery) is started when a game ball is won, and when the game ball passes, it is normal. A start gate (hereinafter simply referred to as a gate) a124 at which the symbol lottery (open / close lottery) starts is disposed on the game board a110. In FIG. 1-1, the gates a124 are provided on the left and right sides of the game area a111, the left gate a124 is described as a124L, and the right gate a124 is described as a124R. In addition, the first start port a121 and the second start port a122 referred to here are prize winning ports that act as a trigger for one predetermined special symbol display. Specifically, the first start port a121 and the second start port a122 are provided with switches (a first start port switch a211 and a second start port switch a212, which will be described later) that detect the passage of a game ball when winning a prize. It has been. And when a game ball wins in the 1st starting port a121 or the 2nd starting port a122, it will be a trigger for operating this special symbol display that this switch detects passage of a game ball.

  The second starting port a122 includes an electric tulip (opening / closing member) a123 as a normal electric accessory which is turned on and off by a pair of blades in the shape of tulip flowers opened and closed by an electric solenoid. In the electric tulip a123, when the blade is closed, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second start port a122. It is configured to be easy to enter. When the electric tulip a123 wins the normal symbol lottery, the blade opens for a specified time (for example, 0.15 to 1.8 seconds) and for a specified number of times (for example, 1 to 3 times) while lighting or blinking.

  The pachinko gaming machine a100 has a low probability state with the lowest winning probability, a medium probability state with a higher probability of winning than the low probability state, and a winning probability higher than the medium probability state as the gaming state based on the winning probability of the jackpot lottery. It has a high high probability state. It should be noted that the control is performed to any one of a low probability state, a medium probability state, and a high probability state under a predetermined condition. Further, the pachinko gaming machine a100 has a short time state where there are few chances to win the second starting port a122, and a short state where there are more chances to win the second starting port a122 than in the short time state. Note that, in a predetermined condition, the state is controlled to be either a timeless state or a timeless state. Here, the short-time state is, for example, any one or more of increasing the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery, reducing the normal symbol variation time, or extending the opening time of the electric tulip a123. A gaming state controlled by a combination. In the short time state, the special symbol variation time of the special symbol may be shortened.

Further, in the present embodiment, as other prizes related to winning and lottery, the first big prize opening a125A and the second big prize opening a125B (hereinafter referred to as the special electric prize opening that is opened according to the result of the special symbol lottery) Both are collectively referred to as a grand prize winning opening a125) and a normal winning opening a126 in which a lottery is not performed even if a game ball wins is arranged on the gaming board a110. Note that the second big prize opening a125B is an attacker dedicated to a rank-up bonus (RUB).
In the present embodiment, a display device a130 for displaying a lottery result and the number of holds is arranged at the lower right position of the game board a110.

  Also, on the back side of the game board a110, there are a game control board for determining whether a special symbol is won, an effect control board for overall control of effects, an image control board for controlling effects by images and sounds, various lamps, Various substrates (not shown) such as a lamp control substrate for controlling the effect by the movable accessory a115 are attached. In addition, a switching power supply (not shown) that converts the supplied 24V AC power supply into a DC power supply and outputs it to various boards and the like is disposed on the back surface of the game board a110.

When the player touches the handle a151 and performs an operation of rotating the lever a152 in the clockwise direction, the frame member a150 moves the game balls at a predetermined time interval (for example, 100 per minute) with a hitting force according to the operation angle. And a launching device (not shown) for electrically firing. In addition, the frame member a150 includes a supply device (not shown) that sequentially supplies game balls to the launching device one by one at a timing in conjunction with the operation of the player's lever a152, and a game ball that the supply device supplies to the launching device. And a dish a153 for temporarily storing. For example, a payout ball by a payout unit is paid out to the plate a153.
In the present embodiment, the plate a153 is configured as an integrated upper and lower plate, but a configuration example in which the upper plate and the lower plate are separated is also conceivable. A configuration example in which the handle a151 of the launching device emits light under a predetermined condition is also conceivable.

In addition, the frame member a150 includes a stop button a154 for temporarily stopping the launch of the game ball even when the player touches the handle a151 of the launcher, and a game ball accumulated in the tray a153. A take-out button a155 for dropping into a box (not shown) and taking it out.
In addition, the frame member a150 includes a speaker a156 and a frame lamp a157 for notifying the gaming state and situation of the pachinko gaming machine a100 and performing various effects. The speaker a156 performs various effects using music, voice, and sound effects. The frame lamp a157 is composed of a light emitting body such as an LED, and performs various effects by light depending on a pattern or light emission color depending on lighting or blinking. In addition, about the frame lamp a157, the structural example which enables performing the effect which changes the irradiation direction of light can be considered.
In addition, the frame member a150 includes a transparent plate (not shown) for separating the game board a110 from the player.

FIG. 1-2 is a diagram for explaining a pachinko gaming machine a100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 1-2 (a) is an enlarged view showing an example of a display a130 arranged at the lower right of the gaming board a110. , (B) is a partial plan view of the pachinko gaming machine a100.
As shown in FIG. 1-2A, the display a130 of the pachinko gaming machine a100 includes a first special symbol display a221 that operates in response to winning of the first start opening a121, and a second start opening a122. The second special symbol display a222 that operates in response to the winning of the prize, and the normal symbol display a223 that operates in response to the passage of the gate a124. The first special symbol display device a221 displays the lottery result after the special symbol is variably displayed based on the winning of the first starting port a121. The second special symbol display device a222 displays the lottery result after stopping displaying the special symbol based on the winning of the second starting port a122. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate a124, the normal symbol display a223 displays the lottery result by stopping the normal symbol after variably displaying it. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol display device a221 and the second special symbol display device a222 are each configured by a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is displayed according to the lighting mode. Similarly, the normal symbol display a223 is also composed of a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery is displayed according to the lighting state.

  The indicator a130 operates in response to the hold in the first special symbol display a221 and the first special symbol hold indicator a218 that operates corresponding to the hold in the first special symbol display a221 and the second special symbol display a222. 2 a special symbol hold indicator a219 and a normal symbol hold indicator a220 that operates in response to the hold in the normal symbol indicator a223. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol hold indicator a218, the second special symbol hold indicator a219, and the normal symbol hold indicator a220 are each configured by a display device in which LEDs are arranged, and the number of holds depends on the lighting mode. Is displayed.

  Here, the hold will be described. If a game ball wins in the first start port a121 or the second start port a122 during the special symbol change display operation (while the change display for one win is being performed), the special symbol is changing. In addition, the special symbol variation display operation based on the subsequent winning cannot be started. Therefore, the number of subsequent winnings is memorized up to a specified number (for example, 4), and the right to start a special symbol for the winning game ball is until the variable display operation for the previously winning game ball ends. Deferred. For normal symbols, the same processing as for special symbols is performed. The fact that such a hold is made and the number of the hold (unchanged number) are displayed on the first special symbol hold indicator a218, the second special symbol hold indicator a219, and the normal symbol hold indicator a220.

  Furthermore, the display device a130 includes a state display device a224 that displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine a100. In the present embodiment, the status indicator a 224 is configured by a display device in which three LEDs are arranged. One of the three LEDs notifies whether or not the state of the pachinko gaming machine a100 is in a high probability state in which the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is high. The other LED notifies whether the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is in a medium probability state with a medium probability by lighting. The remaining one is to notify by lighting whether or not the state of the pachinko gaming machine a100 is in a short time state in which it is easy to win the second starting port a122. In addition, the status indicator a224 is further provided with an LED, and it is also notified by lighting whether or not the player is in an advantageous state for the player by hitting right (by changing the hitting force of the game ball). Good.

  The frame member a150 of the pachinko gaming machine a100 includes an input device for a player to input an effect. As shown in FIG. 1-2B, in this embodiment, as an example of the input device, an effect button a161, and an effect key including a plurality of keys adjacent to the effect button a161 and arranged in a substantially cross shape. a162 and the frame member a150. In the illustrated example, the player can instruct one of a plurality of images displayed on the image display unit a114 by operating an effect key a162 including four keys arranged in a cross, for example. The designated image can be selected by operating the effect button a161. In addition to the effect buttons a161 and the effect keys a162 shown in the figure, various input forms such as levers and dials can be employed depending on the contents of the effects.

[Configuration of control unit]
Next, a control unit that performs operation control and signal processing in the pachinko gaming machine a100 will be described.
FIG. 1C is a block diagram illustrating an internal configuration of the control unit. As shown in the figure, the control unit is provided with a game control unit a200 for determining whether a special symbol is won or the like as main control means. In addition, as sub-control means, an effect control unit a300 that controls the effect overall, an image / sound control unit a310 that controls an effect using images and sound, and an effect using various lamps and a movable accessory a115 A lamp control unit a320 that controls the payout ball, and a payout control unit a400 that performs payout control of the payout ball.

  As described above, the game control unit a200, the effect control unit a300, the image / sound control unit a310, the lamp control unit a320, and the payout control unit a400 are each a game as a main board disposed on the rear surface of the game board a110. The control board, the effect control board as the sub board, the image control board, the lamp control board, and the payout control board are individually configured.

[Configuration and function of game control unit]
The game control unit a200 is used as a CPUa201 that performs arithmetic processing when determining whether or not a special symbol is won, a ROMa202 that stores programs executed by the CPUa201, various data, and the like, and a work memory for the CPUa201. RAMa203.
The game control unit a200 performs a special symbol lottery when a game ball wins the first start port a121 or the second start port a122, and sends the lottery result to the effect control unit a300. Moreover, the change information between the high probability state, the medium probability state, and the low probability state is sent to the effect control unit a300.
Further, the game control unit a200 performs control to increase the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery, shorten the normal symbol variation time, or extend the opening time of the electric tulip a123. In addition, the game control unit a200 holds the game ball up to the limit number (for example, 4) that is not changed when the game ball continuously wins the first start port a121 or the second start port a122, or the game ball continues. Thus, the suspension is set up to the limit number (for example, 4) of the unchangeable amount when passing through the gate a124.
Furthermore, the game control unit a200 opens until the large winning opening a125, which is a special electric accessory, satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, 29.5 seconds have passed or 10 game balls have been won) according to the result of the special symbol lottery. Control is performed so that the round in which the state is maintained is repeated a predetermined number of times. Furthermore, the opening / closing operation interval when the special winning opening a125 is opened is controlled.

Further, when the game ball is won in the first start port a121, the second start port a122, the big winning port a125, and the normal winning port a126, the game control unit a200 may play one game ball according to the place where the game ball has won. The payout control unit a400 is instructed to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls. For example, when a game ball is won at the first start port a121, three prize balls are awarded, when a game ball is won at the second start port a122, four prize balls are awarded. When a game ball wins the ball, the normal winning port a126, an instruction command (command) is sent to the payout control unit a400 so that 10 winning balls are paid out. Even if it is detected that the game ball has passed through the gate a124, the payout control unit a400 is not instructed to pay out the prize ball in conjunction therewith.
When the payout control unit a400 pays out a prize ball in accordance with an instruction from the game control unit a200, the game control unit a200 acquires information on the number of prize balls paid out from the payout control unit a400. As a result, the number of prize balls paid out is managed.

As shown in FIG. 1-3, the game control unit a200 has a first start port detection unit (first start port switch (SW)) that detects a winning of a game ball to the first start port a121, as shown in FIG. a211; a second start port detection unit (second start port switch (SW)) a212 that detects a winning of a game ball to the second start port a122; an electric tulip opening / closing unit a213 that opens and closes the electric tulip a123; and a gate A gate detection unit (gate switch (SW)) a214 for detecting the passage of the game ball to a124 is connected.
Further, the game control unit a200 includes a first grand prize port detection unit (first grand prize port switch (SW)) a215 for detecting the winning of a game ball to the first grand prize port a125A, and a first grand prize port. a first grand prize opening opening / closing part a216 that sets a125A to a closed state and an open state that protrudes and tilts; and a second big prize opening detection part that detects the winning of a game ball to the second big prize opening a125B (second large (Award opening switch (SW)) a 225, a second large winning opening / closing portion a 226 for setting the second large winning opening a 125B to a closed state and a projecting inclined open state, and a winning of a game ball to the normal winning opening a 126 A normal winning opening detecting unit (normal winning opening switch (SW)) a217 to be detected is connected.

In addition, the game control unit a200 includes a first special symbol hold indicator a218 that displays the number of unchanged reserves won in the first start port a121 during the change of the special symbol within the limit number (for example, four). , A second special symbol hold indicator a219 that displays within the limit the number of unchanged reserves won to the second starting port a122 during the change of the special symbol, and the non-passed gate a124 during the change of the normal symbol A normal symbol hold indicator a220 for displaying the number of changes in the hold amount within the limit number is connected.
Further, the game control unit a200 includes a first special symbol display a221 for displaying a special symbol change display and a special symbol lottery result performed by winning a game ball in the first starting port a121, and a second starting port. The second special symbol display a222 for displaying the result of the special symbol variation display and the special symbol lottery performed by winning the game ball to a122, and the normal symbol display for displaying the normal symbol variation display and the normal symbol lottery result A device a223 and a state indicator a224 for displaying the state of the pachinko gaming machine a100 are connected.

  Then, detection signals detected by the first start port switch a211, the second start port switch a212, the gate switch a214, the big winning port switch a215 and the normal winning port switch a217 are sent to the game control unit a200. In addition, the control signal from the game control unit a200 includes an electric tulip opening / closing part a213, a first grand prize opening / closing part a216, a second big prize opening / closing part a226, a first special symbol hold indicator a218, and a second special symbol hold. It is sent to the display a219, the normal symbol hold display a220, the first special symbol display a221, the second special symbol display a222, the normal symbol display a223, and the status display a224. Thereby, the game control unit a200 performs various controls related to the above-mentioned payout prize ball number.

  Further, a board external information terminal board a250 for transmitting various information to a host computer (not shown) installed in the hall is connected to the game control unit a200. Then, the game control unit a200 transmits information on the number of paid-out prize balls, information indicating the state of the game control unit a200, and the like acquired from the payout control unit a400 to the host computer via the board external information terminal board a250. To do.

[Configuration and function of production control unit]
The effect control unit a300 includes a CPU a301 that performs calculation processing when controlling the effect, a ROM a 302 that stores programs executed by the CPU a 301, various data, and the like, a RAM a 303 that is used as a work memory for the CPU a 301, and the date and time A real-time clock (RTC) a304 for measuring
The production control unit a300 sets the production content based on, for example, the determination result whether or not the winning in the special symbol lottery sent from the game control unit a200 and the variation pattern. At that time, in response to an operation input from the user using the effect button a161 or the effect key a162, the effect content according to the operation input may be set. In this case, for example, a signal (operation signal) corresponding to an operation is received from a controller (not shown) such as the effect button a161, and the operation content identified by the operation signal is reflected in the setting of the effect.
In addition, when the game is interrupted for a predetermined period, the production control unit a300 instructs setting of a screen display for waiting for a customer as one of the productions.
Furthermore, the production control unit a300 sets the production content based on the change information between the high probability state, the medium probability state, and the low probability state received from the game control unit a200, and the change information of the short time state and the short time state. To do.
In addition, the effect control unit a300 sends a command for instructing execution of the set effect contents to the image / sound control unit a310 and the lamp control unit a320.

[Configuration / Function of Image / Sound Control Unit]
The image / sound control unit a <b> 310 is a CPU a 311 that performs calculation processing when controlling the image and sound that expresses the content of the effect, a ROM a 312 that stores a program executed by the CPU a <b> 311, various data, and the like. RAMa313 used as a memory or the like.
Then, the image / sound control unit a310 controls the image displayed on the image display unit a114 and the sound output from the speaker a156 based on the command sent from the effect control unit a300.
Specifically, in the ROMa 312 of the image / sound control unit a310, a symbol image or background image displayed during the game in the image display unit a114, a decorative symbol for notifying the player of the lottery result, and a notice effect for the player Image data such as a character or item for displaying is stored.
The ROMa 312 further stores various types of acoustic data such as music and sound output from the speaker a156 in synchronization with the image data or independently of the image data, and sound effects such as jingles. The CPU a 311 selects and reads out the data corresponding to the command sent from the effect control unit a300 from the image data and the sound data stored in the ROM a 312. Furthermore, image processing for background image display, symbol image display, symbol image variation, character / item display, etc., and voice processing using the read acoustic data are performed using the read image data.
Then, the image / sound control unit a310 controls screen display on the image display unit a114 based on the image data subjected to the image processing. Further, the sound output from the speaker a156 is controlled by the sound data subjected to the sound processing.

[Configuration and function of lamp control unit]
The lamp control unit a320 stores a CPU a321 that performs calculation processing when controlling the light emission of the panel lamp a116 and the frame lamp a157 and the operation of the movable accessory a115, and the program executed by the CPU a321, various data, and the like. A ROM a 322 and a RAM a 323 used as a working memory for the CPU a 321 are provided.
Then, the lamp control unit a320 controls lighting / flashing of the panel lamp a116 and the frame lamp a157, the emission color, and the like based on the command sent from the effect control unit a300. Further, the operation of the movable accessory a115 is controlled.
Specifically, the ROM a 322 of the lamp control unit a320 stores lighting / flashing pattern data and emission color pattern data (light emission pattern data) of the panel lamp a116 and the frame lamp a157 according to the contents of the effect set by the effect control unit a300. Data) is stored. The CPU a 321 selects and reads out the light emission pattern data stored in the ROM a 322, which corresponds to the command sent from the effect control unit a300. The lamp controller a320 controls light emission of the panel lamp a116 and the frame lamp a157 based on the read light emission pattern data.
In addition, the ROM a 322 of the lamp control unit a320 stores operation pattern data of the movable accessory a115 corresponding to the production content set by the production control unit a300. The CPU a321 controls the operation of the movable accessory a115 based on the read operation pattern data.

[Configuration and function of payout control unit]
The payout control unit a400 includes a CPU a401 that performs arithmetic processing when controlling the payout of the payout ball, a ROMa402 that stores programs executed by the CPUa401, various data, and the like, and a RAMa403 that is used as a working memory of the CPUa401. And.
Then, the payout control unit a400 controls the payout of the payout ball based on the command sent from the game control unit a200.
Specifically, the payout control unit a400 acquires from the game control unit a200 a command for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the place where the game ball has won (the first start port a121, etc.). Then, the payout drive unit a411 is controlled so as to pay out the number of prize balls specified by the command. Here, the payout drive unit a411 includes a drive motor that sends out the game ball from the game ball storage unit.

Further, the payout control unit a400 includes a payout ball detection unit a412 that detects the number of prize balls actually paid out from the game ball storage unit by the payout drive unit a411, and a game ball in the storage unit (not shown). Sphere detection unit a413 for detecting the presence or absence of storage of the game, and detecting whether or not the plate a153 for holding the game ball used when the player plays and the awarded ball is full The full tank detection unit a414 is connected. Then, the payout control unit a400 receives detection signals detected by the payout ball detection unit a412, the ball presence detection unit a413, and the full tank detection unit a414, and performs predetermined processing according to these detection signals.
Further, a frame external information terminal board a450 that transmits various types of information to the host computer installed in the hall is connected to the payout control unit a400. The payout control unit a400, for example, information related to the number of prize balls instructed to pay out to the payout driving part a411, information related to the number of prize balls actually paid out detected by the payout ball detection unit a412, and the like. Is transmitted to the host computer via the frame external information terminal board a450. The same information is also transmitted to the game control unit a200.

[Functional configuration of game control unit]
Next, the functional configuration of the game control unit a200 will be described.
1-4 is a block diagram illustrating a functional configuration of the game control unit a200. As shown in the figure, the game control unit a200 includes a random number acquisition unit a231, a normal symbol determination unit a232, a special symbol variation control unit a233, and a special symbol determination unit a234 as functional units that execute various lottery processes. And a normal symbol fluctuation control unit a237.
Moreover, the game control part a200 is provided with the fluctuation | variation pattern selection part a235 as a function part which performs the process accompanying a special symbol fluctuation | variation.
In addition, the game control unit a200 is a functional unit that executes operation control of various types of objects and data processing related to a prize ball, etc. As a function unit, a winning prize opening operation control unit a238, an electric tulip operation control unit a239, and a prize ball processing unit a240. And an output control unit a241 and a random number control unit a242.

The random number acquisition unit a231 acquires a random number related to a special symbol when a game ball wins the first start port a121 or the second start port a122. Specifically, one numerical value (random number value) is selected (obtained) from a predetermined range of numerical values and used for determination by the special symbol determination unit a234.
The random number acquisition unit a231 acquires a random number related to a normal symbol when a game ball passes through the gate a124. Specifically, one numerical value (random value) is selected (obtained) from a predetermined range of numerical values, and is used for the determination by the normal symbol determination unit a232.
When a special symbol lottery is performed, the special symbol variation control unit a233 controls the variation of the special symbol according to the lottery result.

  The special symbol determination unit a234 uses a random number table as shown in FIG. 1-17-1 and FIG. 1-17-2 at the start of the variation of the special symbol, and the lottery result is “whether it is a big hit”, “ "A type of jackpot when winning a win" and "Are hitting or losing if a jackpot is not won?" That is, the random number acquisition unit a231 acquires a random value related to the special symbol when the passage of the game ball is detected by the first starting port switch a211 or the second starting port switch a212 that is the detection means, and the special symbol determination The part a234 determines whether or not to play a special game (such as a big hit game) advantageous to the player based on the acquired random number value. The special symbol lottery (big hit lottery) described above refers to processing in the random number acquisition unit a231 and the special symbol determination unit a234.

  Here, the “big hit” is divided into a plurality of types according to the number of rounds (number of rounds) in which the big winning opening a125 is opened in the big hit game and the game state that occurs after the big hit game ends. Although details will be described later, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the number of rounds of the grand prize winning opening a125 is a big hit of 16R (round), a long time to be in an open state, a long hit of 4R, and a time to be in an open state The short 4R jackpot is set. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the gaming state that occurs after the end of the jackpot game is one of a short-time state and a short-time state, and a high-probability state, a medium-probability state, and a low-probability state. A jackpot that is a combination of is set. In other words, the type of jackpot based on the gaming state that occurs after the end of the jackpot game is a jackpot that becomes a high probability short-time gaming state having both a short-time state and a high-probability state after the jackpot game ends (hereinafter, high probability A jackpot that becomes a medium-probability short-game state with both a short-time state and a medium-probability state (hereinafter, a medium-probability short-game state jackpot), a short-time state, and a low-probability state. A jackpot that becomes a low probability short-time gaming state (hereinafter, a low-probability short gaming state jackpot), a high-probability time-short gaming state that has both a short-time none state and a high-probability state (hereinafter, a high-probability short-time none) A jackpot that becomes a medium probability short-time non-game state with both a short-time non-state and a medium-probability state (hereinafter, medium-probability) Time reduction jackpot no gaming state), the jackpot as a low probability time reduction No gaming state having a time reduction of both the stateless and low probability state state (hereinafter, a low probability time reduction of non-gaming state jackpot) is likely. Each of these jackpots is associated with an individual special symbol, and the type of jackpot is determined according to the type of special symbol won in the special symbol lottery.

  In addition, the “bonanza” may be divided into a jackpot that can be expected to pay out a large amount of gaming balls for a long time, and a jackpot that can hardly be expected to pay out gaming balls because the jackpot game time is short. The former is called “long hit” and the latter is called “short hit”. In the pachinko gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment, for example, a 16R (round) jackpot and a long time of being in an open state (long open) 4R jackpot corresponds to “long hit” and a short time of being in an open state (Short open) 4R jackpot corresponds to "short win". In “long win”, the number of rounds that are maintained until the open state of the big prize opening a125 satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, 29.5 seconds have passed or 10 game balls have been won) is 16 times (in the above example, 16 times or 4) Repeated. In the “short win”, a round in which the special winning opening a125 is opened for a certain time (for example, 0.1 second) is repeated a predetermined number of times (in the above example, 4 times). In the following description, in order to distinguish the types of jackpots, the number of rounds and the open time (long open or short open) are shown and may be referred to as 16R long, 4R long, 4R short, etc.

In addition, the “small winning” in the case where the big winning is not won is, for example, a small winning game in which the first big winning opening a125A is opened for a predetermined number of times (for example, four times) for 0.1 seconds. . At the time of winning the small hit, the game state before the small win is continued even after the small hit game is completed. That is, when the game state at the time of winning the small hit is the high probability short game state, the high probability short time gaming state is continued even after the small hit game ends, and the gaming state does not shift. Similarly, when the game state at the time of winning the small hit is the low probability short-time non-game state, the low-probability short short no-game state is continued even after the small hit game ends, and the game state does not shift.
Further, “small hit” is a kind of “out of game”, and none of the above gaming states that are advantageous to the player is set.

The variation pattern selection unit a235 selects a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device a221 or the second special symbol display device a222. Here, the variation pattern selection unit a235 determines the variation pattern based on the determination result of whether or not the jackpot game is performed, the determination result of whether or not the reach is performed, and the like. Then, based on the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection unit a235, the special symbol variation control unit a233 controls the variation of the special symbol. Details of operations of the fluctuation pattern selection unit a235 and the special symbol fluctuation control unit a233 will be described later.
Here, “reach” is an effect for causing a player to expect a big hit in a decorative pattern to be described later.

When the normal symbol lottery is performed, the normal symbol determination unit a232 determines whether the lottery result of the normal symbol is “winning or not”.
The normal symbol fluctuation control unit a237 controls the fluctuation of the normal symbol in accordance with the normal symbol lottery result.
When the electric tulip operation control unit a239 determines “winning” by the normal symbol lottery, the electric tulip a123 is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, and a game ball can be easily won at the second starting port a122. Generate a state. Further, when it is determined as “displacement”, such an open state of the electric tulip a123 is not generated.

The special prize opening operation control unit a238 controls the opening operation of the first big prize opening a125A and the second big prize opening a125B.
The prize ball processing unit a240 sets a command for controlling the number of prizes received for various types of winning-related items and a lottery, and for controlling the payout of prize balls according to the prizes.
The output control unit a241 controls the output of control commands from the game control unit a200 to the effect control unit a300 and the payout control unit a400.
The random number control unit a242 controls updating of various random number values used in processing by the main control unit.

[Basic operation of gaming machine]
Next, the basic operation of the pachinko gaming machine a100 configured as described above will be described.
Basic operations of the pachinko gaming machine a100 are performed by a game control unit a200 which is a main control means. Under the control of the game control unit a200, the effect control unit a300, which is a sub-control means, controls the game effect, and the payout control unit a400 controls the payout of the prize ball.

FIG. 1-5 is a flowchart showing main operations of the game control unit a200.
The game control unit a200 repeatedly executes each process shown in FIG. 1-5 at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) during a normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off. Referring to FIG. 1-5, random number update processing, switch processing, symbol processing, electric accessory processing, prize ball processing, and output processing are sequentially executed (steps a501 to a506).

  In the random number update process (step a501), the random number control unit a242 of the game control unit a200 updates various random number values used in the process by the main control unit. Details of the setting of the random number and the update of the random value will be described later.

As the switch process (step a502), a start port switch process and a gate switch process are performed.
In the start port switch process, the random number acquisition unit a231 of the game control unit a200 monitors the state of the first start port switch a211 and the second start port switch a212 in FIG. Processing for special symbol lottery is executed.
In the gate switch process, the normal symbol determination unit a232 of the game control unit a200 monitors the state of the gate switch a214 in FIG. 1-3, and executes processing for the normal symbol lottery when the switch is turned on. .
The detailed contents of these switch processes will be described later.

As the symbol processing (step a503), special symbol processing and normal symbol processing are performed.
In the special symbol processing, special symbol variation and processing associated with this symbol variation are performed by the special symbol variation control unit a233, the special symbol determination unit a234, and the variation pattern selection unit a235 of the game control unit a200.
In the normal symbol process, the normal symbol variation control unit a237 of the game control unit a200 performs the normal symbol variation and the process associated with this symbol variation.
The detailed contents of these symbol processes will be described later.

As the electric accessory process (step a504), a big prize opening process and an electric tulip process are performed.
In the big prize opening process, the big prize opening operation control unit a238 of the game control unit a200 controls the opening operation of the first big prize opening a125A and the second big prize opening a125B based on a predetermined condition.
In the electric tulip process, the electric tulip operation control unit a239 of the game control unit a200 controls the opening operation of the electric tulip a123 based on a predetermined condition.
The detailed contents of these electric accessory processing will be described later.

In the winning ball process (step a505), the winning ball processing unit a240 of the game control unit a200 sets a command for controlling the number of winnings and a control for paying out winning balls according to the winnings.
In the output process (step a506), the output control unit a241 of the game control unit a200 outputs a control command to the effect control unit a300 and the payout control unit a400. The control command is generated in each process up to step a505, set in the RAM a 203, and output in this output process.

[Start-up switch processing in game control unit]
FIG. 1-6 is a flowchart showing the contents of the start port switch process in the switch process shown in step a502 of FIG. 1-5.
In the start port switch process, a process for winning in the first start port a121 and a process for winning in the second start port a122 are sequentially performed. Referring to FIG. 1-6, the game control unit a200 first determines whether or not a game ball has won the first starting port a121 and the first starting port switch a211 is turned on (step a601). If the first start port switch a211 is turned ON, the game control unit a200 next determines whether or not the number of unreserved hold numbers U1 in the winning of the first start port a121 is less than the upper limit value (step a602). ). In the example shown in FIGS. 1-6, the upper limit value is four. If the number of holds U1 has reached the upper limit value (No in step a602), it is not possible to hold any more unchanging winnings, so the process for winning at the first start port a121 is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the hold number U1 is less than the upper limit value (Yes in step a602), the game control unit a200 next adds 1 to the value of the hold number U1 (step a603). And the random number acquisition part a231 of the game control part a200 acquires the random value for the lottery by this winning, and stores it in RAMa203 (step a604). Here, since the first starting port a121 is won, a random value for the special symbol lottery is acquired. The random value acquired at this time is the value updated by the random number update process in step a501. Then, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined in the later special symbol processing by this random number value. Random values here include jackpot random numbers that determine jackpot, jackpot or loss, jackpot type (short or short state after the end of jackpot game, short or short state, high probability state or medium probability state or low probability state, Design random number value (big hit design random value) to determine long hit or short hit, fluctuation pattern random value to identify the fluctuation pattern in symbol fluctuation, reach to determine whether or not there is a reach with a loss Random number, etc. are included.

Next, the game control unit a200 performs a pre-determination process for giving a notice effect of the lottery result to the winning ball (holding ball) for which the special symbol variation display operation is held (that is, not drawn). (Step a605). In this pre-determination process, the lottery result is determined not at the start of symbol variation but at the start opening prize (that is, at step a605). In addition, in the gaming machine that does not perform the notice effect based on the advance determination, the advance determination process may be omitted.
Thereafter, the game control unit a200 sets a hold number increase command for notifying the effect control unit a300 of the increase in the hold number U1 in step a603 in the RAMa 203 (step a606), and a process for winning at the first start port a121. Exit. When the preliminary determination process in step a605 is performed, the information on the determination result of the preliminary determination obtained in step a605 is included in the pending number increase command.

  Next, a process for winning a prize at the second start opening a122 is performed. Referring to FIGS. 1-6, next, the game control unit a200 determines whether or not the game ball has won the second start port a122 and the second start port switch a212 is turned on (step a607). If the second start port switch a212 is turned on, the game control unit a200 next determines whether or not the number of unreserved hold numbers U2 in the winning of the second start port a122 is less than the upper limit value (step a608). ). In the example shown in FIGS. 1-6, the upper limit value is four. If the number of holds U2 has reached the upper limit (No in step a608), it is not possible to hold any more unchanging winnings, so the process for winning at the second start opening a122 is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the holding number U2 is less than the upper limit value (Yes in step a608), the game control unit a200 next adds 1 to the value of the holding number U2 (step a609). And the random number acquisition part a231 of the game control part a200 acquires the random value for the lottery by this time winning, and stores it in RAMa203 (step a610). Here, since the winning of the second starting port a122 is won, random numbers for the special symbol lottery (big hit random number value, big hit symbol random number value, reach random number value, fluctuation pattern random number value, etc.) are acquired as in step a604 above. Is done. The random value acquired at this time is the value updated by the random number update process in step a501. Then, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined in the later special symbol processing by this random number value.

Next, the game control unit a200 performs a pre-determination process for giving a notice effect of the lottery result to the winning ball (holding ball) for which the special symbol variation display operation is held (that is, not drawn). (Step a611). The details of this pre-determination process are the same as in step a605 above. This prior determination process may also be omitted in a gaming machine that does not perform a notice effect based on prior determination.
Thereafter, the game control unit a200 sets a hold number increase command for notifying the effect control unit a300 of the increase in the hold number U2 in step a609 in the RAMa 203 (step a612), and a process for winning at the second start port a122 Exit. When the advance determination process of step a611 is performed, the information on the determination result of the advance determination obtained in step a611 is included in the pending number increase command.

[Gate switch processing in game control unit]
FIG. 1-7 is a flowchart showing the contents of the gate switch process when a game ball passes through the gate a124.
In this gate switch process, the game control unit a200 first determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate a124 and the gate switch a214 is turned on (step a701). If the gate switch a214 is turned ON, the game control unit a200 next determines whether or not the unchanged holding number G is less than the upper limit value (step a702). In the example shown in FIGS. 1-7, the upper limit value is four. If the number of reserves G has reached the upper limit (No in step a702), no more unchanging winnings can be reserved, and the gate switch process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the number of holdings G is less than the upper limit (Yes in step a702), the game control unit a200 next adds 1 to the value of the holding number G (step a703). Then, the random number acquisition unit a231 of the game control unit a200 acquires a random number value for the lottery by the current winning and stores it in the RAMa 203 (step a704). Here, since the gate a124 is won, a random value (such as a winning random number) for normal symbol lottery is acquired.

  After the random number value is acquired in step a704, the game control unit a200 sets a hold number G increase command for notifying the effect control unit a300 of the increase in the hold number G in step a703 in the RAM a203 (step a705). The process for winning in the gate a124 is terminated.

[Special symbol processing in game control unit]
FIG. 1-8 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol processing of the symbol processing shown in step a503 of FIG. 1-5.
In this special symbol processing, the special symbol variation control unit a233 of the game control unit a200 first checks whether or not the winning game flag is ON in the setting of a flag set in the RAMa 203 (hereinafter, flag setting) ( Step a801). Here, the winning game flag is a flag that is set to identify that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit. Either the long winning game flag or the short winning game flag is set according to the type of winning. In the present embodiment, these are collectively called a winning game flag.

  When the winning game flag is ON, since the pachinko gaming machine a100 is already in a big hit, the special symbol process is terminated without starting the special symbol variation (Yes in step a801). On the other hand, if the winning game flag is OFF (No in step a801), the special symbol variation control unit a233 next determines whether or not the current state of the pachinko gaming machine a100 is in the special symbol variation (step a802). . If the special symbol is not changing (No in step a802), then the special symbol fluctuation control unit a233 performs processing relating to the number U1 and U2 (see FIG. 1-6) of the special symbols that have not been changed (step a803). a806). In the present embodiment, since the number of holds U1 related to the winning of the first starting port a121 and the number of held U2 related to the winning of the second starting port a122 are distinguished, this processing is also performed individually for each corresponding starting port. .

  Specifically, the special symbol variation control unit a233 first determines whether or not the number of holds U2 related to winning in the second starting port a122 is 1 or more (step a803). When the number of reservations U2 is 1 or more (Yes in step a803), the special symbol variation control unit a233 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of reservations U2 (step a804). On the other hand, when the number of holdings U2 = 0 (No in step a803), the special symbol fluctuation control unit a233 next determines whether the number of holdings U1 related to winning in the first starting port a121 is 1 or more (step a805). . When the number of reservations U1 is 1 or more (Yes in step a805), the special symbol variation control unit a233 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of reservations U1 (step a806). On the other hand, if the number of holdings U1 = 0 (No in step a805), it means that there is no winning for starting the special symbol lottery, so the special symbol change is not started, and the waiting for a different routine is set. The process is executed and the process is terminated (step a816).

  After subtracting the holding number U1 or the holding number U2 in step a804 or step a806, the special symbol variation control unit a233 turns OFF the customer waiting flag set in the flag setting of the RAMa203 (step a807). The customer waiting flag is a flag for identifying that the pachinko gaming machine a100 is in the customer waiting state, and is set in the customer waiting setting process (step a816, see FIG. 1-12).

  Next, the special symbol variation control unit a233 executes jackpot determination processing and variation pattern selection processing by separate routines (steps a808 and a809). As will be described in detail later, by this jackpot determination process and variation pattern selection process, setting information for variation of the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display a221 (a jackpot symbol, gaming state, variation pattern, etc.) is determined. Is done. These pieces of information are included in the change start command sent to the effect control unit a300.

  Thereafter, the special symbol fluctuation control unit a233 performs the first special symbol display a221 and the second special symbol display a222 shown in FIG. 1-2 based on the setting contents determined in the jackpot determination process and the fluctuation pattern selection process. The change of the displayed special symbol is started (step a810). Then, a change start command including setting information (a jackpot symbol, a gaming state, a change pattern, etc.) indicating the setting contents is generated and set in the RAM a 203 (step a811). The variation start command set in step a811 is transmitted to the effect control unit a300 by the output process shown in step a506 in FIG.

  When it is determined in step a802 that the special symbol is changing (Yes in step a802), or after the change start command is set in step a811, the special symbol fluctuation control unit a233 determines whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed. (Step a812). That is, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol at step a810 has reached the variation time set in the variation pattern selection process at step a809. If the variation time has not elapsed (No in step a812), the special symbol variation is continued, and the special symbol processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation time has elapsed (Yes in step a812), the special symbol fluctuation control unit a233 first determines the special symbol fluctuation in the first special symbol display a221 and the second special symbol display a222 as a big hit in step a808. Stop at the symbol determined in the determination process (step a813). A change stop command for stopping a decorative design to be described later is set in the RAMa 203 (step a814). Then, the stop process of another routine is executed (step a815). The contents of the stop process will be described later. The change stop command set in step a814 is transmitted to the effect control unit a300 in the output process shown in step a506 in FIG.

[Big hit judgment processing by game control unit]
FIG. 1-9 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot determination process (step a808 in FIG. 1-8).
In the jackpot determination process, the special symbol determination unit a234 of the game control unit a200 first determines a jackpot random number value in the current special symbol lottery (step a901), and determines whether or not the jackpot or small hit is made ( Steps a902, 905). Whether or not the jackpot or the jackpot is determined based on whether the value of the jackpot random number acquired in step a604 or step a610 in FIG. 1-6 is a value set as a jackpot winning value or a value set as a jackpot winning value It is determined by judging whether or not they match (see FIG. 1-17-1).

  If the result of random number determination at step a901 is a big hit (Yes at step a902), then the special symbol determination unit a234 determines a big hit symbol random number value (step a903). Depending on the result of this determination, the type of jackpot (high probability state / medium probability state / low probability state, time-short state / timeless state, long / short hit) is determined. Which jackpot is determined is determined by whether the value of the jackpot symbol random number acquired in step a604 or step a610 in FIG. 1-6 matches a preset value for each jackpot type. (See FIG. 1-17-2).

  After the above determination, the special symbol determination unit a234 sets the symbol representing the type of jackpot determined by the determination of the jackpot symbol random number (the jackpot symbol) as setting information in the RAM a203 (step a904).

  When the result of the random number determination at step a901 is a small hit (No at step a902, Yes at step a905), the special symbol determination unit a234 next displays a symbol indicating that it is a small hit (hereinafter referred to as a small hit symbol). The setting information is set in the RAM a 203 (step a906).

  If the result of the random number determination at step a901 is neither big win nor small win (No at step a902 and step a905), then the special symbol determination unit a234 sets a symbol indicating that the lottery is lost (hereinafter referred to as a lost symbol). Information is set in the RAMa 203 (step a907).

[Change pattern selection process by game control unit]
FIG. 1-10 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern selection process (step a809 in FIG. 1-8).
In this variation pattern selection process, the variation pattern selection unit a235 of the game control unit a200 first determines whether or not the special symbol lottery of this time is a big hit using the determination result of step a902 of the big hit determination process (FIG. 1-9). Is determined (step a1001). If it is a big hit (Yes in step a1001), the fluctuation pattern selecting unit a235 reads the big hit fluctuation pattern table from the ROMa 202 and sets it in the RAMa 203 (step a1002).

On the other hand, if the jackpot has not been won (No in step a1001), the variation pattern selection unit a235 then determines a random number value to determine whether or not to perform a so-called reach effect for causing the player to expect a jackpot. (Step a1003) Whether or not the reach effect is performed is determined by determining whether or not the reach random number value acquired in step a604 or step a610 in FIG. 1-6 matches a preset value (FIG. 1). 17-3 (a)).
As a result of the determination using the random number value, when the reach effect is performed (Yes in step a1004), the variation pattern selection unit a235 reads the variation pattern table for reach from the ROMa 202 and sets it in the RAM a 203 (step a1005). When the reach effect is not performed (No in step a1004), the variation pattern selection unit a235 reads the variation pattern table for loss from the ROMa 202 and sets it in the RAM a 203 (step a1006).
Here, the variation pattern table is a table in which a plurality of variation patterns (variation times 10 seconds, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, etc.) prepared in advance are associated with values of variation pattern random numbers.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern selection unit a235 uses the fluctuation pattern random value acquired in Step a604 or Step a610 of FIG. 1-6 and the fluctuation pattern table set in Steps a1002, a1005, and a1006 to calculate the fluctuation pattern random value. A determination is made (step a1007). That is, the variation pattern selection unit a235 refers to the variation pattern table set in the RAM a 203 and selects a variation pattern according to the random value of the variation pattern random number. Therefore, even if the same random number value is acquired, the variation referred to depending on the state difference such as whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit or not and whether or not a reach effect is performed if it is not a big hit Since the pattern table is different, the determined variation pattern is different.

  Thereafter, the variation pattern selection unit a235 sets the variation pattern selected in Step a1007 as setting information in the RAM a203 (Step a1008). The variation pattern setting information set in step a1008 is included in the variation start command set in step a811 of FIG. 1-8, and is transmitted to the effect control unit a300 by the output process shown in step a506 of FIG. 1-5. Is done.

[Processing during stop by game control unit]
FIG. 1-11 is a flowchart showing the contents of the suspension process (step a815 in FIG. 1-8).
In this stop process, the game control unit a200 first checks whether or not a flag indicating that the time is short (hereinafter referred to as a time flag) is ON in the flag setting of the RAMa 203 (step a1101). When the time reduction flag is ON (Yes in step a1101), the game control unit a200 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of lotteries (number of changes) J in the time reduction state (step a1102), and whether the number of lotteries J has become 0. Whether or not is checked (step a1103). If the number of lotteries J = 0 (Yes in step a1103), the time reduction flag is turned OFF (step a1104). Note that the operation for turning on the hourly flag and the setting of the initial value of the lottery count J are performed in a game state setting process (FIG. 1-15) in a special prize opening process (FIG. 1-14) described later.

  If the time reduction flag is OFF (No in step a1101), or after the time reduction flag is turned OFF in step a1104, or if the value of the lottery count J is not 0 (No in step a1103), the game control unit a200 next In the flag setting of the RAMa 203, it is checked whether or not a flag indicating a high probability state or a medium probability state (hereinafter, probability variation flag) is ON (step a1105). If both the probability variation flag and the previous time-short flag are ON, it is a high-probability short-time gaming state or a medium-probability short-time gaming state. No game state or medium probability short no game state.

  When the probability variation flag is ON (Yes in step a1105), the game control unit a200 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of lotteries (number of variations) X in the high probability state or the medium probability state (step a1106), and the lottery number X It is checked whether or not becomes 0 (step a1107). If the number of lotteries X = 0 (Yes in step a1107), the probability variation flag is turned OFF (step a1108). Note that the operation for turning on the probability change flag and the setting of the initial value of the lottery count X are performed in a game state setting process (FIG. 1-15) in a big prize opening process (FIG. 1-14) described later.

  If the probability change flag is OFF (No in step a1105), or after the probability change flag is turned OFF in step a1108, or if the value of the lottery count X is not 0 (No in step a1107), the game control unit a200 next Then, it is determined whether or not a big win has been won in this special symbol lottery (step a1109). If it is a big hit (Yes in step a1109), the game control unit a200 next determines whether or not the type of the big win is a long win (step a1110).

  Here, it is possible to determine whether or not the jackpot is based on the determination result of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 1-9). For example, if any of the symbols shown in FIG. 1-17-2, which will be described later, is set, Yes is made in step a1109. If a lost symbol or a small bonus symbol is set in the RAMa 203 by the big hit determination process, No in step a1109.

  If the type of jackpot is a long win (Yes in step a1110), the game control unit a200 turns on the long win game flag (step a1111). Thereby, the setting of the gaming state of the RAMa 203 becomes a jackpot gaming state (long winning gaming state) in which the jackpot type is long winning. In addition, here, in the long hit, it is not distinguished whether it is a high probability state or a low probability state. Whether the state is in a high probability state or a low probability state is specified by turning on the corresponding flag in the gaming state setting process (FIG. 1-15) in the special prize opening process (FIG. 1-14) described later. .

  When the big hit type is not long hit (No in step a1110), the game control unit a200 turns on the short hit game flag (step a1112). Thereby, the setting of the gaming state of the RAMa 203 becomes a jackpot gaming state (short winning gaming state) in which the type of jackpot is a short hit. Similar to the case of long hit, the case of short hit does not distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state.

  After turning on the winning game flag in step a1111 or step a1112, the game control unit a200 initializes the values of the lottery times J and X (step a1113). Further, the game control unit a200 turns off the time reduction flag when the time reduction flag is ON in step a1101 and the lottery count J is not 0 in step a1103 (step a1114). Similarly, if the probability variation flag is ON in step a1105 and the number of lotteries X is not 0 in step a1107, the probability variation flag is turned OFF (step a1114).

On the other hand, when the result of the special symbol lottery this time is not a big hit (No in Step a1109), the game control unit a200 determines whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery this time is a big hit (Step a1115). ). If it is not a small hit (No in step a1115), the stop process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is a small hit (Yes in step a1115), the game control unit a200 starts a small hit game (step a1116). Thereby, the setting of the gaming state of the RAMa 203 becomes the small hit gaming state. In the small hit game, as described above, the first grand prize opening a125A is opened and closed a predetermined number of times, and is ended after a predetermined time has elapsed.

After initializing the values of the lottery times J and X in step a1113, the game control unit a200 starts an opening operation (step a1117). Here, the contents of the opening operation differ depending on which of steps a1111 and a1112 the winning game flag is turned on. That is, according to the state of the winning game flag, one of the opening operations set in each gaming state of the long winning game and the short winning game is performed.
Thereafter, the game control unit a200 sets an opening command for performing an effect in the opening operation corresponding to the winning game flag in the effect control unit a300 in the RAMa 203 (step a1118), and ends the stop process. This opening command is transmitted to the effect control unit a300 in the output process shown in step a506 of FIG. 1-5.

[Customer waiting setting process by game control unit]
FIG. 1-12 is a flowchart showing the contents of the customer waiting setting process (step a816 in FIG. 1-8).
In this customer waiting setting process, the game control unit a200 first checks whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAMa 203 (step a1201). Here, the customer waiting flag is a flag that is set to identify that the pachinko gaming machine a100 is in a customer waiting state.

  When the customer waiting flag is ON, the pachinko gaming machine a100 is in a customer waiting state, and thus the processing is terminated as it is (Yes in step a1201). On the other hand, when the customer waiting flag is OFF, the game control unit a200 generates a customer waiting command and sets it in the RAM a 203 (step a1202), and turns on the customer waiting flag (step a1203). The customer waiting command set in step a1202 is transmitted to the effect control unit a300 in the output process shown in step a506 of FIG. 1-5. The customer waiting flag is set in a state where there is no suspension with the special symbol change stopped.

[Normal symbol processing by game control unit]
FIG. 1-13 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol processing in the symbol processing shown in step a503 of FIG. 1-5.
In this normal symbol process, the normal symbol variation control unit a237 of the game control unit a200 first checks whether or not the auxiliary game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAMa 203 (step a1301). Here, the auxiliary game flag is a flag that is set when a normal symbol lottery is won. The state in which the auxiliary game flag is set is a state in which the electric tulip a123 is opened in accordance with the electric tulip process (FIG. 1-16) described later and it is easy to win the second starting port a122 (auxiliary gaming state).

  When the auxiliary game flag is ON, since the auxiliary game state has already been reached and the normal symbol is stopped, the normal symbol process is terminated without starting the normal symbol variation (Yes in step a1301). On the other hand, if the auxiliary game flag is OFF (No in step a1301), the normal symbol variation control unit a237 next determines whether or not the current state of the pachinko gaming machine a100 is in the normal symbol variation (step a1302). . If the normal symbol is not changing (No in step a1302), then the normal symbol variation control unit a237 determines whether the number G of the normal symbol remaining unchanged (see FIG. 1-7) is 1 or more (step a1303). . If the number of holds G = 0 (No in step a1303), it means that there is no winning for starting the normal symbol lottery, and therefore the processing is terminated without starting the normal symbol variation.

  On the other hand, when the reserved number G is 1 or more (Yes in step a1303), the normal symbol fluctuation control unit a237 subtracts 1 from the value of the reserved number G (step a1304), and the random number in the current normal symbol lottery It is determined whether or not the normal symbol lottery is won (step a1305). Whether the winning value is determined by whether the value of the winning random number acquired in step a704 in FIG. 1-7 matches the value set as the winning value in the table shown in FIG. It is determined by judging whether or not.

  Next, the normal symbol variation control unit a237 sets the normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery (step a1306). That is, when a normal symbol lottery is won, a symbol representing the winning (hereinafter referred to as a winning symbol) is set in the RAMa 203 as setting information. On the other hand, when the normal symbol lottery is not won, a symbol indicating that the lottery has been lost (hereinafter referred to as a lost symbol) is set in the RAM a 203 as setting information.

  Next, the normal symbol variation control unit a237 sets the variation time of the normal symbol (step a1307). This variation time is set based on the time reduction flag set in the processing of steps a1104 and a1114 in FIG. 1-11, steps a1504 and a1507 in FIG. That is, when the time reduction flag is ON at the time of setting in step a1307, it is set to a short time (for example, 1.5 seconds), and when the time reduction flag is OFF, it is set to a long time (for example, 4.0 seconds). Is set. After this setting, the normal symbol fluctuation control unit a237 starts normal symbol fluctuations in the normal symbol display device a223 shown in FIGS. 1-2 (a) and 1-3 based on the setting content of step a1307 (step S1307). a1308).

  After starting normal symbol variation in step a1308 or when it is determined in step a1302 that normal symbol variation is in progress (Yes in step a1302), the normal symbol variation control unit a237 determines whether or not the variation time has elapsed. (Step a1309). That is, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time from the start of the normal symbol fluctuation in step a1308 has reached the fluctuation time set in step a1307. If the variation time has not elapsed (No in step a1309), the normal symbol variation is continued, so that the normal symbol processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation time has ended (Yes in step a1309), the normal symbol fluctuation control unit a237 stops the fluctuation of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display device a223 (step a1310). Then, the normal symbol fluctuation control unit a237 determines whether or not the normal symbol lottery is won based on the stopped normal symbol (step a1311). If a win is made (Yes in step a1311), the auxiliary game flag is turned ON (step a1312). On the other hand, if the lottery is off (No in step a1311), the normal symbol processing is terminated without turning on the auxiliary game flag.

[Large winning mouth processing by game control unit]
FIG. 1-14 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special prize opening process in the electric accessory process shown in Step a504 of FIG. 1-5.
In this special winning opening process, the special winning opening operation control unit a238 of the game control unit a200 first checks whether or not the winning game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAMa 203 (step a1401). When the winning game flag is OFF, there is no winning in the first big winning opening a125A (or the second big winning opening a125B), so the big winning opening process is ended (No in step a1401). On the other hand, if the winning game flag is ON (Yes in step a1401), the winning prize opening operation control unit a238 then performs the operation for the big winning that is started in the pachinko gaming machine a100 being stopped (FIG. 1-11). It is determined whether or not the opening operation in the control is in progress (step a1402).

  When the pachinko gaming machine a100 is opening (Yes in step a1402), the special winning opening operation control unit a238 next determines whether or not a predetermined time for opening operation (opening time) has elapsed. Judgment is made (step a1403). If the opening time has not elapsed, the opening operation at the special winning opening a125 is continued, and the special winning opening process is terminated (No in step a1403). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in step a1403), the special winning opening operation control unit a238 then sets the operation of the special winning opening a125 (step a1404) and initializes the winning number C (C = 0) (step a1405), the value of the operation round number R of the big prize opening a125 is incremented by 1 from the current value (step a1406), and the big prize opening a125 is started (opened) (step a1407).

  In the operation setting of step a1404, the operation pattern of the special winning opening a125 and the number of rounds (operation round number) operated by the operation pattern are set. The case where the big prize opening a125 is operated may be a big win or a small win in a special symbol lottery. The operation pattern and the number of rounds are variously set according to the hit type. As an example, per long (per 16R length or per 4R length), for example, 16 rounds (16R) or 4 rounds (4R) are activated depending on the type of jackpot, and 29.5 seconds are opened in one round. Perform once. In the case of a short hit (4R short hit), for example, four rounds (4R) are operated, and one round is performed once for 0.1 seconds. In the case of a small hit, for example, one round (1R) is operated, and 0.1 second is released four times in this round. Here, when the operation with short hits and the operation with small hits are compared in the above example, the opening for 0.1 second is performed four times. In other words, the action of the big winning opening a125 that can be seen by the player is the same in the case of the short win and the case of the small winning, and the short win and the small win are distinguished only from the action of the big winning opening a125 on the game board a110. I can't do it.

  As another example, 15 rounds (15R) are activated per long, 29.5 seconds are released once per round, 2 rounds (2R) are activated per short, and 0 are rounded per round. .9 seconds are opened twice, and with a small hit, one round (1R) is operated, and 0.9 seconds is opened twice in this round. In this case as well, when the operation with short hits and the operation with small hits are compared, both 0.9 seconds are released twice, and the operation of the first big prize opening a125A visible to the player is short hits. It is the same for the case of and the case of small hits.

  It is stipulated by law that the cumulative opening time of the first big prize opening a125A must be set within 1.8 seconds when winning a small amount. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit (long win or short win), the first big winning opening a125A must be continuously opened a plurality of times. Therefore, when trying to make it difficult to visually distinguish the operation with a small hit and the operation with a short hit as described above, within the range that satisfies the cumulative open time within 1.8 seconds in one operation, An operation mode in which the first big winning opening a125A is opened twice or more is set, and in the short win, the same number of rounds as the number of small hits is set.

  Next, the special winning opening operation control unit a238 determines whether or not the opening time in the operation pattern set in step a1404 has elapsed (step a1408). If the open state at the big prize opening a125 has not passed the opening time (No at step a1408), the big prize opening operation control unit a238 next determines the number C of winning prizes to the big prize opening a125 (for example, It is determined whether or not (9) or more (step a1409). If the opening time has not elapsed and the number C of winning prizes is less than the prescribed number, the operating state (open state) of the big winning opening a125 is continued, and thus the big winning opening process is terminated (in step a1409). No). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in step a1408) or the winning number C reaches the specified number (Yes in step a1409), the special winning opening operation control unit a238 ends the operation of the special winning opening a125 ( (Step a1410).

  Next, the special winning opening operation control unit a238 determines whether or not the round number R of the operation of the special winning opening a125 has reached the maximum value set in step a1404 (step a1411). If the maximum value has not been reached, the remaining operations are performed, and the special winning opening process is terminated (No in step a1411).

If the number of rounds R of the operation of the big prize opening a125 reaches the maximum value (Yes in step a1411), the big prize opening operation control unit a238 then starts the ending operation (step a1412). Here, the content of the ending operation corresponds to the state of the winning game flag among the ending operations set in each gaming state of the long winning game and the short winning game.
Thereafter, the special winning opening operation control unit a238 sets an ending command for performing an effect in the ending operation according to the winning game flag in the effect control unit 300 in the RAMa 203 (step a1413). This opening command is transmitted to the effect control unit a300 in the output process shown in step a506 of FIG. 1-5.

  Next, the special winning opening operation controller a238 resets the round number R of the operation of the special winning opening a125 to 0 (step a1414), and then performs an ending operation in which the elapsed time from the start of the ending operation is set in advance. It is determined whether or not a time (ending time) to be passed has elapsed (step a1417). If the ending time has not elapsed, the ending operation is continued, and thus the big prize opening process is terminated (No in step a1417). On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (Yes in step a1417), the special winning opening operation control unit a238 then sets the winning game flag to OFF after the game state setting process by the game control unit a200 (step a1418). Then, the special winning opening process is terminated (step a1419). The contents of the game state setting process will be described later.

  When it is determined in step a1402 that the pachinko gaming machine a100 is not opening (No in step a1402), the special winning opening operation control unit a238 next determines whether or not it is ending (step a1415). If the ending is in progress (Yes in step a1415), the operations after step a1417 are executed.

On the other hand, if the pachinko gaming machine a100 is not in the ending state (No in step a1415), the special winning opening operation control unit a238 next determines whether or not the special winning opening a125 is operating (opening) (step a1416). . If it is not in operation (No in step a1416), the operation after step a1405 is executed. If it is in operation (Yes in step a1416), the operation after step a1408 is executed.
The effect performed in the small hit game described above is the same as the effect performed in the short hit game, and it is not possible to distinguish short hit and small hit from the effect.

[Game state setting process]
FIG. 1-15 shows the contents of the game state setting process (step a1418) executed by the game control unit a200 when the ending time has elapsed (Yes in step a1417).
When the game state setting process is performed, the winning game flag is set to ON in step a1401 of FIG. 1-14. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 1-15, the game control unit a200 first determines the type of the hit (steps a1501, a1502, a1503, a1506). These determinations can be made, for example, based on the type of symbol set as setting information in the RAMa 203 in the jackpot determination process (FIGS. 1-9). Since these determinations are substantially the same as steps a902, a903, and a905 in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 1-9), the determination results of steps a902, a903, and a905 may be used.
Also, in the example shown in FIG. 1-15, the high probability state and the medium probability state are assumed to have a certain change (the probability variation flag is turned on), and the low probability state is assumed to be no certain change (the probability variation flag is not turned on).

If it is a small hit (Yes in step a1501), the gaming state (internal state of the pachinko gaming machine a100) is not changed, so the gaming state setting process is terminated.
In addition, when the win type is a small win, it is conceivable to perform control to change the gaming state. For example, a control example in which the low probability state becomes a medium probability state due to small hits (probability change flag ON in step a1509 described later). In addition, a control example in which the medium probability state becomes a high probability state due to small hits can be given.

  If the winning type is a big hit in the low probability short-time gaming state (No in step a1501, Yes in steps a1502 and a1503), the game control unit a200 turns on the short-time flag (step a1504). Thereby, the setting of the gaming state of the RAMa 203 becomes the short gaming state when the probability is low. In addition, the game control unit a200 sets an initial value of the lottery count J (step a1505), and ends the game state setting process. The initial value of the lottery number J is 100 in the illustrated example. Therefore, if the lottery in the low probability short game state is performed 100 times, the low probability short game state is ended and the low probability short short game state is entered.

  On the other hand, if the hit type is a big hit in the low probability short-time non-game state (No in step a1501, Yes in a1502, No in step a1503), the game control unit a200 performs processing without turning on both the short-time flag and the probability change flag. Exit. Therefore, the setting of the game state of the RAMa 203 for the game after the jackpot becomes a low probability short time no game state.

  When the winning type is a big hit with a high probability short-time gaming state or a big hit with a medium-probability short gaming state (No in steps a1501 and a1502, Yes in step a1506), the game control unit a200 turns on the short-time flag (step a1507). ), An initial value of the number of times of lottery J is set (step a1508). In this case, the initial value of the number of lotteries J is 80 in the illustrated example. In addition, the game control unit a200 turns on the probability variation flag (step a1509) and sets the initial value of the number of lotteries X (step a1510). The initial value of the lottery number X is 80 in the illustrated example. Thereby, depending on the winning type, the setting of the gaming state of the RAMa 203 becomes a short game state with a high probability or a short gaming state with a medium probability. If the lottery in the high probability short game state or the medium probability short game state is performed 80 times, the high probability short game state or the medium probability short game state ends, and the low probability time short no game state is entered.

On the other hand, when the hit type is a big hit in the high probability short-time no-game state or a big hit in the medium-probability short-time no-game state (No in steps a1501, a1502, and a1506), the game control unit a200 turns on only the probability change flag. (Step a1509), an initial value (80 times) of the lottery number X is set (Step a1510). Thereby, depending on the winning type, the setting of the gaming state of the RAMa 203 becomes a high probability short-time non-gaming state or a medium probability short-time gaming state. If the lottery in the high probability short-time non-game state is performed 80 times, the high-probability short-time non-game state or the medium-probability short-time game state ends, and the low-probability short-time non-game state is entered.
In addition, depending on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 100, there is one that is set so as to be surely shifted to a high probability state or a medium probability state when a big win is won in a special symbol lottery. In such a case, the determination in step a1502 in FIG. 1-15 is always No, and the processing in steps a1503 to a1505 is not performed.

[Electric tulip processing by game control unit]
FIG. 1-16 is a flowchart showing the contents of the electric tulip process in the electric accessory process shown in step a504 of FIG. 1-5.
In the electric tulip process, the electric tulip operation control unit a239 of the game control unit a200 first checks whether or not the auxiliary game flag is ON in the flag setting of the RAMa 203 (step a1601). When the auxiliary game flag is OFF, since the electric tulip a123 is not released, the electric tulip process is ended (No in step a1601). On the other hand, when the auxiliary game flag is ON (Yes in step a1601), the electric tulip operation control unit a239 next determines whether or not the electric tulip a123 is operating (step a1602).

  When the electric tulip a123 is not in operation (No in step a1602), the electric tulip operation control unit a239 sets an operation pattern of the electric tulip a123 (step a1603), and operates the electric tulip a123 with the set operation pattern ( Step a1604). Here, the operation pattern is set based on the time reduction flag set in the processes of steps a1104 and a1114 in FIG. 1-11, steps a1504 and a1507 in FIG. 1-15, and the like. For example, when the time reduction flag is OFF at the time of setting in step a1603, an operation pattern that opens once with an opening time of 0.15 seconds is set, and when the time reduction flag is ON, 1.80 seconds are set. An operation pattern that opens three times in the opening time is set. Thus, normally, when the time reduction flag is ON (when it is in the time reduction state), the electric tulip a123 is opened a plurality of times for a long time, and a winning support that makes it easy to win the second starting port a122 (electricity chewing support). Is done.

  When it is determined in step a1602 that the electric tulip a123 is in operation (Yes in step a1602), or after the electric tulip a123 is operated in step a1604, the electric tulip operation control unit a239 opens in the set operation pattern. It is determined whether time has passed (step a1605). If the opening time has not elapsed, the operation state (open state) of the electric tulip a123 is continued, and thus the electric tulip process is ended (No in step a1605). On the other hand, if the opening time has elapsed (Yes in step a1605), the electric tulip operation control unit a239 turns off the auxiliary game flag and ends the electric tulip process (step a1606).

[Random number judgment method]
Here, a determination method using random numbers performed in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 1-9), the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 1-10), the normal symbol process (FIG. 1-13), and the like will be described in detail.
FIG. 1-17 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a random number (determination table) used in the present embodiment.
1-17-1 is a configuration example of a jackpot random number, FIG. 1-17-2 is a configuration example of a jackpot symbol random number, FIG. 1-17-3 (a) is a configuration example of a reach random number, FIG. -3 (b) shows a configuration example of the hit random numbers.

  Referring to FIG. 1-17-1, as the determination value of the jackpot random number, the game state of the pachinko gaming machine a100 is set to the jackpot of the low probability state, the jackpot of the medium probability state, and the jackpot of the high probability state . The range of values of random numbers (big hit random numbers) is 400 from 0 to 399. In the case of the special symbol lottery in the low probability state (big hit lottery), only one winning value (value “0”) is set, and the winning probability is 1/400. In the case of the special symbol lottery in the medium probability state, four winning values (values “0” to “3”) are set, and the winning probability is 1/100 (= 4/400). In the case of a special symbol lottery in a high probability state, 10 winning values (values “0” to “9”) are set, and the winning probability is 10/400 (= 1/40). That is, in the illustrated example, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the medium probability state, the winning probability is quadrupled compared to the case where the special symbol lottery is performed in the low probability state, and the special symbol lottery is performed in the high probability state. And the winning probability is 10 times. In the example shown in the drawing, the special symbol lottery does not show the determination of whether or not the small hit is made at the time of the shift, but the random number setting as shown in FIG. Thus, a lottery to win a small hit with a predetermined probability is performed.

  Referring to FIG. 1-17-2, the jackpot symbol is 1 per 16R length, 2 per 16R length, 2R per 4R length as a type of jackpot based on a special symbol triggered by winning the first starting port a121. Nine types are set: 1, 2 per 4R length, 3 per 4R length, 1 per 4R short, 2 per 4R short, 3 per 4R short, 4 per 4R short. In addition, as a type of jackpot based on a special symbol triggered by winning the second starting port a122, 5 per 1 5R length, 2 per 16R length, 1 per 4R length, 2 per 4R length, 4 per 3R length Type is set. In other words, there is no short win in the big win that is won when winning the second start opening a122.

  Here, 1 per 16R length is a big hit in the short game state with high probability. 2 per 16R length is a big hit in the high probability short-time gaming state, and is a big hit in which a round game is controlled in a rank-up bonus (RUB) mode in the big hit game. The rank up bonus will be described later. 1 per 4R length is a big hit in the short game state with high probability. 2 per 4R length is a big hit that initially becomes a short game state with a high probability and becomes a short game state with a medium probability from the middle. 3 per 4R length is a big hit with medium probability short gaming state. 1 per 4R short is a big hit in the high probability short game state. 2 per 4R short is a big hit in the high probability short time no-game state. 3 per 4R short is a big hit that initially becomes a high probability short-time non-game state and becomes a medium probability short-time non-game state from the middle. 4 per 4R short is a big hit in the medium probability short no-game state.

  In the example shown in the drawing, the range of random number values (big hit symbol random number values) is 100 from 0 to 99 regardless of whether the first starting port a121 or the second starting port a122 is won. When winning at the first start port a121, three winning values per 16R length (values “0” to “2”) are set, and the winning probability is 3/100. One winning value of 2 per 16R length (value “3”) is set, and the winning probability is 1/100. 30 winning values (values “4” to “33”) are set for each 4R length, and the winning probability is 30/100. 30 winning values (values “34” to “63”) are set for 2 per 4R length, and the winning probability is 30/100. 30 winning values of 3 per 4R length (values “64” to “93”) are set, and the winning probability is 30/100. One winning value per 4R short is set (value “94”), and the winning probability is 1/100. One winning value of 2 per 4R short (value “95”) is set, and the winning probability is 1/100. Two winning values of 3 per 4R short (values “96” to “97”) are set, and the winning probability is 2/100. Two winning values of 4 per 4R short (values “98” to “99”) are set, and the winning probability is 2/100. On the other hand, when winning at the second starting port a122, 47 winning values (values “0” to “46”) per 16R length are set, and the winning probability is 47/100. Three winning values of 2 per 16R length (values “47” to “49”) are set, and the winning probability is 3/100. 20 winning values (values “50” to “69”) are set for each 4R length, and the winning probability is 20/100. Ten winning values of 2 per 4R length (values “70” to “79”) are set, and the winning probability is 10/100. 20 winning values (values “80” to “99”) are set for 3 per 4R length, and the winning probability is 20/100.

  In the case of 2 per 16R length, a round game is controlled by a rank-up bonus (RUB) mode in the jackpot game. With this rank-up bonus, 16 rounds of long open games are played, but the number of rounds is not notified at the start of the jackpot game in the production. Then, for example, by performing the remaining round game after performing the illusion of 4R length and the operation control of the big prize opening a125, it seems that the number of rounds has increased during the big win game.

  Round games with short opening are performed for 1 per 4R short, 2 per 4R short, 4 per 4R short, and 4 per 4R short. Among these, 1 per 4R short is a big hit that shifts to a high-probability short-time gaming state with a short-time state after a big-hit game (so-called surprise). On the other hand, 2 per 4R short, 3 per 4R short, and 4 per 4R short are big hits that shift to a high probability short no game state or a medium probability short short no game state without a short time state after a big hit game. (So-called latency). When 2 wins per 4R short and 3 per 4R short wins, a latent effect that is not clearly notified that the gaming state shifts to a high probability state or a medium probability state is performed as a big hit game or a subsequent effect.

In addition, in the various jackpots shown in FIG. 1-17-2, the gaming state after the jackpot game ends is shifted to a high probability state or a medium probability state (probability change). Therefore, in the example shown in the figure, the probability variation rush rate when winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery is 100%. The high probability state or medium probability state after the big hit game continues until the special symbol lottery is performed 80 times. However, at 2 per 4R length and 3 per 4R short, the special symbol lottery is determined in the high probability state (the table of the high probability state shown in FIG. 1-17-1) until the first special symbol lottery 40 times after the big hit game. The special symbol lottery 40 times in the latter half is in a medium probability state (special symbol lottery determination is performed in the medium probability state table shown in FIG. 1-17-1) (in this way, high The pachinko gaming machine 100 in which the duration of the probability state and the medium probability state is limited is also referred to as an ST (special time) machine).
In addition, in the jackpot (1 per 16R length, 2 per 16R length, 1 per 4R length, 2 per 4R length, 3 per 4R length and 1 per 4R short), the above high probability state or medium Along with the probability state, the short-time state continues until the special symbol lottery is performed 80 times, and the winning support (electricity chew support) to the second starting port a122 by opening the electric tulip a123 is performed.

  In the jackpot determination process, when the jackpot is won in the determination based on the jackpot random number shown in FIG. 1-17-1, the jackpot symbol random number value obtained when winning the first starting port a121 or the second starting port a122 (FIG. 1-6), a special symbol corresponding to one of the jackpots shown in FIG. 1-17-2 is specified (see FIG. 1-9). Then, based on the specified special symbol, the contents of the jackpot game and the subsequent game state are determined.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 1-17-2, the jackpot when winning the first starting port a121 has a high probability of winning per 4R length (1 per 4R length, 3 per 4R length). In the case of winning a prize in the mouth a122, there is a high probability that the jackpot will be won per 16R length (1 per 16R length, 2 per 16R length). In this way, by making the winning probability of the jackpot type different when winning at the first starting port a121 and when winning at the second starting port a122, various games can be provided. Further, the arrangement of the first start port a121 and the second start port a122 in the game board a110 is devised so that it is easy to aim at either the first start port a121 or the second start port a122 in a specific state (mode). By configuring the above, it is possible to encourage the player to participate in more aggressive games.

Next, the determination of reach random numbers will be described.
Referring to FIG. 1-17-3 (a), the range of random number values is 250 from 0 to 249, and 22 random numbers are assigned to the lottery results (with reach) for performing the reach effect. 228 random numbers are assigned to the lottery result (no reach) that is not performed. In other words, in the illustrated example, when a special symbol lottery is not won, a reach effect is performed with a probability of 22/250 (= 11/125).

It should be noted that the effect with reach and the effect without reach determined by the reach random number indicate the mode of effect performed in the image display unit a114. That is, during the variation display of special symbols, for example, three columns of symbols consisting of a number sequence in which numbers 1 to 9 are continuously written in the vertical direction are displayed, and the variation display of special symbols is started. At the same time, these symbols start to scroll.
Then, in the effect with reach, when the scrolling is stopped and the symbols are stopped and displayed after elapse of a predetermined time after the start of the scrolling, any two symbols (sequences) are stopped first. At this time, the same number is stopped and displayed on a straight line extending horizontally or diagonally, and the last one row gradually decreases the scrolling speed, and there is a sense of expectation that three identical numbers will be aligned on the straight line. Give to the player. Such an effect with reach includes a so-called super reach effect in which various characters appear or a story develops before the last line of scrolling stops. On the other hand, unlike the effect with reach, the effect without reach does not produce an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation, and the symbols stop and display in a state where the same numbers are not aligned on a straight line extending horizontally or diagonally. Is.
As described above, the reach random number is used to determine whether to perform an effect with reach or an effect without reach in the image display unit a114 when the result of the determination of the jackpot random number is lost. A reachable effect appears with a probability, so that the player is appropriately expected.
In addition, when a big win is won, a reachable effect is always performed, and finally the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a state where the same numbers are aligned on a straight line extending horizontally or diagonally. On the other hand, in the case of winning with a small win or loss, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a state where the same numbers are not aligned on the straight line.

Next, the determination of the winning random number used for the normal symbol lottery will be described.
Referring to FIG. 1-17-3 (b), the range of random number values is 10 from 0 to 9, and one value is assigned as the winning value when the time-short flag is OFF, and when the time-short flag is ON. Nine values are assigned as winning values. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate a124 and the normal symbol lottery (open / close lottery) is performed in the timeless state, the player wins with a probability of 1/10. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the gate a124 and the normal symbol lottery (open / close lottery) is performed in the short-time state, the player wins with a probability of 9/10.

A random value as determination information used for various types of lottery starts from a predetermined initial value and is incremented by one each time the random number update process (step a501) shown in FIG. 1-5 is performed. Then, the values at the time each lottery is performed are acquired by the start opening switch process (FIG. 1-6) and the gate switch process (FIG. 1-7), and the special symbol process (FIG. 1-8) and the normal symbol process ( Used in FIGS. 1-13). Note that this random value counter is an infinite loop counter, and returns to 0 again after reaching the maximum value of the set random number (for example, 1009 for the big hit random number). In addition, since the random number update process is performed at regular intervals, if the initial value of each random number is specified, the winning value may be estimated based on such information. Therefore, in general, a mechanism for randomly changing the initial value of each random number at an appropriate timing has been introduced.
Note that the random number ranges, winning value ratios, and winning values shown in the configuration examples of the random numbers in FIGS. 1-17-1 to 1-17-3 are merely examples, and are limited to the illustrated values. It is not something.

[Operation of production control unit]
Next, the operation of the effect control unit a300 will be described.
FIG. 1-18 is a flowchart showing the operation of the effect control unit a300.
The operation of the effect control unit a300 includes a main process shown in FIG. 1-18 (a) and an interrupt process shown in FIG. 1-18 (b). Referring to FIG. 1-18 (a), the production control unit a300 first performs an initial setting at startup (step a1801), and after setting a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) cycle (step a1802), is set. The interrupt process is accepted while updating the random number used in the effect control according to the cycle (step a1803).

  The interrupt process is periodically performed according to the cycle set in step a1802. Referring to FIG. 1-18 (b), in this interrupt process, the effect control unit a300 receives a command from the game control unit a200 and performs a command reception process (step a1811). In this command reception process, an effect pattern is selected. In addition, the effect control unit a300 performs effect button processing for receiving an operation of the effect button a161 and the like by the player (step a1812). Thereafter, the effect control unit a300 performs command transmission processing for transmitting a command including information on the selected effect pattern to the image / sound control unit a310 and the lamp control unit a320 (step a1813). Thereby, effects such as image display and sound output on the image display unit a114, operation of the movable accessory a115, light emission of the panel lamp a116 and the frame lamp a157 are performed.

[Command reception processing by the production control unit]
FIG. 1-19 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command reception process (step a1811 in FIG. 1-18 (b)).
In this command reception process, the effect control unit a300 first determines whether or not the received command is a command for increasing the number of holds (hold number increase command) (step a1901). This pending number increase command is set in the start port switch process shown in FIG. 1-6 in the game control unit a200 (steps a606 and a612), and the production control is performed in the output process (step a506) shown in FIG. 1-5. To the part a300. If the command is an increase command for the number of holdings (Yes in step a1901), the effect control unit a300 adds 1 to the value of the number of holdings held in the RAMa 303 (step a1902), and shows the holding value after the addition. A number command is set in the RAMa 303 (step a1903).

When the received command is not a pending number increase command (No in step a1901), or when a command is received after setting the pending number increase command in step a1903, the effect control unit a300 determines whether or not the received command is a change start command. Is determined (step a1904). This variation start command is set in the special symbol process shown in FIG. 1-8 in the game control unit a200 (step a811), and transmitted to the effect control unit a300 in the output process (step a506) shown in FIG. 1-5. Is done.
When the received command is a change start command (Yes in step a1904), the effect control unit a300 executes an effect selection process (step a1905). Details of the effect selection process will be described later.

When the received command is not a change start command (No in Step a1901 and Step a1904), or when a command is received after execution of the effect selection process in Step a1905, the effect control unit a300 determines whether or not the received command is a change stop command. (Step a1906). This variation stop command is set in the special symbol process shown in FIG. 1-8 in the game control unit a200 (step a814), and transmitted to the effect control unit a300 in the output process (step a506) shown in FIG. 1-5. Is done.
When the received command is a change stop command (Yes in step a1906), the effect control unit a300 executes a process during end of change effect (step a1907). Details of the process during the end of the variation effect will be described later.

When the received command is not the change start command and the change stop command (No in step a1901, step a1904, and step a1906), or when the command is received after the execution of the variable effect end process in step a1907, the effect control unit a300 It is determined whether or not the received command is an opening command for starting the opening in the jackpot effect (step a1908). This opening command is set in the stop process shown in FIG. 1-11 (step a1118), and transmitted to the effect control unit a300 in the output process (step a506) shown in FIG. 1-5.
When the received command is an opening command (Yes in step a1908), the effect control unit a300 executes a hit effect selection process (step a1909). Details of the winning effect selection process will be described later.

If the received command is not a change start command, change stop command, or opening command (No in step a1901, step a1904, step a1906, and step a1908), or if a command is received after the execution of the hit effect selection process in step a1909, The control unit a300 determines whether or not the received command is an ending command for starting the ending in the jackpot effect (step a1910). This ending command is set in the big prize opening process shown in FIG. 1-14 (step a1413), and is transmitted to the effect control unit a300 in the output process (step a506) shown in FIG. 1-5.
When the received command is an ending command (Yes in step a1910), the effect control unit a300 executes an ending effect selection process (step a1911). Details of the ending effect selection process will be described later.

  If the received command is not a variation start command, variation stop command, opening command, or ending command (No in step a1901, step a1904, step a1906, step a1908, and step a1910), or after the end of the ending effect selection process in step a1911 Next, the effect control unit a300 executes a customer waiting command reception process for shifting the received command to the customer waiting state (step a1912). Details of the customer waiting command reception process will be described later.

FIG. 1-20 is a diagram illustrating a setting example of the mode flag.
When an effect is performed by the effect control unit a300, various effect patterns are selected and executed based on the set effect mode. This effect mode is determined by a mode flag set in the RAMa 303. Here, the mode flag is set to any value from 0 to 4, and five types of effect modes from A mode to E mode are assigned to each mode flag. The mode flag is set according to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery or the number of lotteries of the special symbol lottery.
The mode flag 1 is used for the long transition to the high probability state or the medium probability state (1 per 16R length, 2 per 16R length, 1 per 4R length, 2 per 4R length). 2 is assigned a mode flag 3 for short hits that are not latent (1 per 4R short), and a mode flag 4 is assigned for short hits and small hits of latent. Here, the types of these jackpots (symbols) are the same as those shown in FIG. 1-17-2. In addition, as described with reference to FIG. 1-17-2, the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment is not provided with a jackpot that becomes a low probability state after the jackpot game. Therefore, there is no jackpot corresponding to the mode flag 2. In FIG. 1-20, the mode flag 0 is not assigned to any of them. In mode flags 1 to 4, mode flag 0 is set by executing special symbol lottery a predetermined number of times.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 1-20, the parameter M (M value) used in the process during the end of the changing effect is set individually for each mode except the A mode.

FIG. 1-21 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect selection process (step a1905) of FIG. 1-19.
In this effect selection process, the effect control unit a300 first analyzes the received change start command (step a2101). Further, the effect control unit a300 refers to the current mode flag of the pachinko gaming machine a100 from the setting of the RAMa 303 (step a2102), and subtracts 1 from the value of the number of reservations held in the RAMa303 (step a2103). Then, the effect control unit a300 is based on the effect mode determined by various setting information (information about jackpot type, game state after jackpot game, change pattern, etc.) obtained from the analysis result of the change start command and the mode flag. Then, an effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of the pattern variation by the image displayed on the image display unit a114 in the effect mode is selected (step a2104). Finally, the effect control unit a300 reads out image data and sound data used for the effect by the selected effect pattern from the ROMa 302, and sets a change effect start command for instructing execution start of the selected effect in the RAMa 303 together with these data. Then, the effect selection process ends (step a2105).
Although not described in detail, in the symbol variation effect pattern selection process in step a2104, the effect mode, the variation pattern, and the effect random number (one of the random numbers updated in step a1801 in FIG. The production pattern is determined based on the fact that the production random number value is sometimes obtained). Based on the effect pattern determined here, the decorative symbol variation display, the background effect, and the notice effect are determined. The variation display of the decorative symbol is an effect display performed on the image display unit a114 along with the variation display of the special symbol performed on the first special symbol display device a221 or the second special symbol display device a222. In this variable display of decorative symbols, a reach effect or the like is executed.

FIG. 1-22 is a flowchart showing the contents of the changing effect end process (step a1907) of FIG. 1-19.
In the process during the end of the change effect, the effect control unit a300 first analyzes the received change stop command (step a2201). Further, the effect control unit a300 refers to the current mode flag of the pachinko gaming machine a100 from the setting of the RAMa303 (step a2202). Then, the production control unit a300 determines whether the lottery result of the special symbol lottery wins (big hit or small hit) based on the information indicating the type of the symbol when the special symbol fluctuation is obtained from the analysis result of the fluctuation stop command. It is determined whether or not (step a2203). If it is any hit (Yes in step a2203), the mode flag set in the RAMa 303 is changed based on the setting example shown in FIG. 1-20 according to the type of hit (step a2204).

  On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is not a win (No in Step a2203), the effect control unit a300 next checks whether or not the value of the mode flag is 0 (Step a2205). If the mode flag is not 0 (No in step a2205), the effect control unit a300 subtracts 1 from the parameter M (step a2206), and checks whether the value of M has become 0 (step a2207). If the value of M becomes 0 (Yes in step a2207), the effect control unit a300 sets the mode flag to 0 (step a2208).

  If the mode flag is 0 in step a2205 (Yes in step a2205), the value of parameter M is not 0 in step a2207 (No in step a2207), or the mode flag is set to 0 in step a2208 After or after changing the mode flag in step a2204, the effect control unit a300 sets a change effect end command for instructing the end of the effect of symbol change in the RAMa 303, and ends the process during the end of the change effect ( Step a2209). Here, referring to FIG. 1-20, when the mode flag is changed in step a2204, the effect mode after the end of the change effect is an effect mode according to the winning type. When the mode flag is 0 in step a2205 and when the mode flag is set to 0 in step a2208, the effect mode after the end of the change effect is the A mode. If the value of the parameter M has not become 0 in step a2207, the previous production mode is continued.

FIG. 1-23 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit effect selection process (step a1909) in FIG. 1-19.
In the winning effect selection process, the effect control unit a300 first analyzes the received opening command (step a2301), and selects an effect pattern (winning effect pattern) according to the contents of the effect mode based on the mode flag (step a2301). a2302). Then, the effect control unit a300 reads image data and sound data used for the effect by the selected effect pattern from the ROMa 302, and sets a hit effect start command for instructing the selected effect in the RAMa 303 together with these data. The effect selection process is terminated (step a2303). As a result, the performance during the big hit is determined.

FIG. 1-24 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending effect selection process (step a1911) of FIG. 1-19.
In this ending effect selection process, the effect control unit a300 first analyzes the received ending command (step a2401), and selects an effect pattern (ending effect pattern) according to the contents of the effect mode based on the mode flag (step a2401). a2402). Then, the effect control unit a300 reads image data and sound data used for the effect by the selected effect pattern from the ROMa 302, and sets an ending effect start command for instructing the selected effect in the RAMa 303 together with the data, The effect selection process is terminated (step a2403).

FIG. 1-25 is a flowchart showing the contents of the customer waiting command reception process (step a1912) of FIG. 1-19.
The effect control unit a300 determines whether or not a customer waiting command for shifting to the customer waiting state has been received (step a2501). When the customer waiting command is received (Yes in step a2501), the effect control unit a300 starts measuring the elapsed time (step a2502), and turns on the measurement flag in the RAMa303 (step a2503). On the other hand, if the received command is not a customer waiting command (No in step a2501), the effect control unit a300 determines whether or not the measurement flag held in the RAMa 303 is ON (step a2504). If the measurement flag is OFF (No in step a2504), the customer waiting command reception process is terminated.

  When the measurement flag is ON (Yes in Step a2504 or ON in Step a2503), the effect control unit a300 next determines whether or not the measurement time has reached a predetermined time-up time ( Step a2505). If the time is not up (No in step a2505), the customer waiting command reception process is terminated. On the other hand, when the time is up (Yes in step a2505), the effect control unit a300 turns off the measurement flag held in the RAMa303 (step a2506), and sets a customer waiting effect command for performing the customer waiting effect in the RAMa303. The customer waiting command reception process is then terminated (step a2507).

  When the command reception process is completed as described above, the RAMa 303 is set with any one of a variation effect start command, a variation effect end command, a hit effect start command, an ending effect start command, and a customer waiting effect command.

FIG. 1-26 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect button process (step a1812 in FIG. 1-18 (b)).
In this effect button process, the effect control unit a300 first determines whether or not an operation means such as the effect button a161 by the player has been operated (step a2601). Here, the operation of the operation means includes turning on the effect button a161 and turning it on when the center key or the peripheral key of the effect key a162 is pressed. In addition, when an operation device other than the effect button a161 and the effect key a162 is provided in the pachinko gaming machine a100, such as a touch panel, this includes detecting the operation of the device. The effect control unit a300 receives an operation signal from the controller of these devices and detects that an operation has been performed.

  If the operation means such as the effect button a161 is operated (Yes in step a2601), the effect control unit a300 sets an effect button command including information indicating the operation content of the operation means in the RAMa303 and ends the effect button process. (Step a2602).

  Thereafter, the effect control unit a300 performs the command transmission process (step a1813) of FIG. 1-18 (b), and the command set in the RAMa 303 by the command reception process and the effect button process described above is displayed in the image / sound control unit. a310 and the lamp controller a320. The image / sound control unit a310 and the lamp control unit a320, based on the received command, display an image on the image display unit a114, output sound, operation of the movable accessory a115, light emission of the panel lamp a116 and the frame lamp a157, etc. Is controlled to execute the set effect.

[Advance notice based on prior judgment]
Next, a notice effect based on prior determination according to the present embodiment will be described.
In the present embodiment of the first example, as described with reference to FIG. 1-6, the game ball wins the first starting port a121 (see FIG. 1-1 or FIG. 1-3) and the first When the start port switch a211 (see FIG. 1-3) is turned ON and when the game ball wins the second start port a122 (see FIG. 1-1 or FIG. 1-3), the second start port switch a212 ( When the symbol change (see Fig. 1-3) is ON, prior determination (prefetching) of the lottery result of the special symbol lottery prior to the determination by lottery at the time of symbol variation (see steps a808 and a809 in Fig. 1-8) (Refer to steps a605 and a611 in FIG. 1-6).

  Further, in the present embodiment, based on the result of the above-described prior determination, a notice effect that informs or suggests the determination result to the player is performed. This notice effect is executed at the time of a symbol change for another winning ball that is performed prior to a symbol change for the winning ball (holding ball) for which a prior determination has been made. In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of holding balls is four per one start port (first start port a121 or second start port a122) (see FIGS. 1-6). Further, priority is given to the digestion of the reserved balls in the second start port a122. In this case, for example, when a preliminary determination is made with respect to a holding ball with the second start opening a122, a maximum of four winning balls including the one that is changing before the symbol change for the holding ball is performed. Will be changed. In the notice effect related to the reserved ball that has been determined in advance, if multiple symbol changes are made before the symbol change for the reserved ball, even if the notice effect that spans the multiple symbol changes is performed good.

[Configuration of the RAM of the Game Control Unit and the RAM of the Production Control Unit for Performing the Advance Effect]
In order to execute such a notice effect based on prior determination, the RAMa 203 of the game control unit a200 and the RAMa303 of the effect control unit a300 in the present embodiment have the following configurations.
FIG. 1-27 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the RAMa 203 (see FIG. 1-3) of the game control unit a200 according to the present embodiment. (A) of the same figure is a block diagram which shows the structure of the storage area a204, (b) is a block diagram which shows each structure of the memory | storage part shown to (a).

  As shown to (a) of the figure, RAMa203 is provided with the memory area a204 as a special symbol holding | maintenance memory area which memorize | stores the jackpot random number acquired by the jackpot random number lottery. This storage area a204 has eight storage units corresponding to the maximum values of the number of holdings of the first starting port a121 and the number of holdings of the second starting port a122 (when the upper limit value of each holding number is 4). . Specifically, the storage area a204 includes a first storage unit a204a, a second storage unit a204b, a third storage unit a204c, a fourth storage unit a204d, a fifth storage unit a204e, a sixth storage unit a204f, and a seventh storage. Part a204g and an eighth storage part a204h.

  Further, as shown in (b) of the figure, each of these storage units a204a to a204h includes an area for storing the number of fluctuations N when winning the jackpot and a winning start port (first start port a121). Or an area in which information representing the second start port a122) is stored. Each of the storage units a204a to a204h includes an area for storing the acquired jackpot random number, an area for storing a design random number, and an area for storing a reach random number. That is, the jackpot random number, the design random number, and the reach random number are stored in each of the storage units a204a to a204h. In addition, each of the storage units a204a to a204h has an area for storing prior determination information. The pre-determination information is information obtained by the pre-determination process (see steps a605 and a611 in FIG. 1-6) based on the above random numbers. The content of the prior determination information is the same as the information obtained as various determination results in the special symbol processing (see FIG. 1-8). If there is, the type of jackpot and the content of the production are information for indicating whether the production is a reachable production or a non-reach production.

  Here, each random number is stored in order from the first storage unit a204a. More specifically, for example, when no random number is stored in any of the first storage unit a204a to the eighth storage unit a204h, the acquired random number is stored in the first storage unit a204a. Further, for example, when random numbers are already stored in the first storage unit a204a to the fourth storage unit a204d, the acquired random number is stored in the fifth storage unit a204e.

FIG. 1-28 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the RAMa 303 of the effect control unit a300 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 1-28 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the reserved storage areas a305 and a306 and the lighting number storage area a307, and (b) is a block showing the configuration of each storage unit shown in (a). FIG.
As shown to (a) of FIG. 1-28, RAMa303 is provided with the 1st holding | maintenance storage area a305 and the 2nd holding | maintenance storage area a306 as a holding | maintenance status storage area which memorize | stores the situation where the holding ball is held. . The first reserved storage area a305 and the second reserved storage area a306 correspond to holding for winning in the first starting port a121 and holding for winning in the second starting port a122, respectively. Have. Specifically, the first reserved storage area a305 includes a first storage unit a305a, a second storage unit a305b, a third storage unit a305c, and a fourth storage unit a305d. The second reserved storage area a306 includes a first storage unit a306a, a second storage unit a306b, a third storage unit a306c, and a fourth storage unit a306d.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5B, each of these storage units a305a to a305d and a306a to a306d includes a hold flag storage area for turning on / off the hold flag, and a notification flag for turning on / off the notice flag. And a storage area. The hold flag is a flag for identifying the presence or absence of a hold ball for each of the storage units a305a to a305d and a306a to a306d. That is, for example, when the number of holds due to winning at the first start port a121 is 3, the hold flag is turned ON in the three hold flag storage areas of the first to third storage units a305a, a305b, and a305c. The notification flag is a flag for identifying the presence / absence of a notification command of a pre-read result to be described later for each reserved ball. That is, for example, a pre-determination process (see steps a605 and a611 in FIG. 1-6 and FIG. 1-29 described later) is performed on the above-described three reserved balls, and a notification command is set for the third reserved ball. In this case, the notification flag is turned ON in the notification flag storage area of the third storage unit a305c.

  That is, the RAMa 203 and the RAMa 303 function as a reserved ball information storage unit that stores information (preserved ball information) including a result of a prior determination regarding the held ball in the game control unit a200 and the effect control unit a300. In addition, the game control unit a200 is a lottery unit that performs a lottery lottery, and is a preliminary determination unit that performs a preliminary determination process. The effect control unit a300 is an effect control unit that performs a prefetch notification effect.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 1-28 (a), the RAMa 303 includes four drum lamps a11, a12, a13, a14 (see, for example, FIG. 1-36) disposed on the game board a110. A lighting number storage area a307 for storing the number of lighting (0 to 4) indicating how many of them are lit is provided.
The drum lamp portions a11 to a14 have a drum motif, and are used for production as a panel lamp a116. Lighting / extinguishing of the drum lamp units a11 to a14 and control of the emission color are performed by the lamp control unit a320 in accordance with a command from the effect control unit a300.

[Preliminary judgment processing]
Here, the pre-determination process (see steps a605 and a611 in FIG. 1-6) in the case of hold prefetching will be described in detail.
First, a determination method using random numbers in the prior determination process will be described.
FIGS. 1-29-1 to 1-29-3 are diagrams illustrating a configuration example of random numbers used in the prior determination processing according to the present embodiment.
Fig. 1-29-1 shows a configuration example of jackpot random numbers in the pre-determination process, Fig. 1-29-2 shows a configuration example of symbol random numbers in the pre-determination processing, and Fig. 1-29-3 shows a pre-determination process. Each example of the reach random number configuration is shown.

Referring to FIG. 1-29-1, the jackpot random number in the prior determination process has the same configuration as the jackpot random number in the jackpot determination process shown in FIG. 1-17-1. That is, three types of gaming states of the pachinko gaming machine a100 are set: a jackpot with a low probability state, a jackpot with a medium probability state, and a jackpot with a high probability state. The range of the random number values is 400 from 0 to 399 in all cases. The winning probability in the prior determination is 1/400 (winning value “0”) in the low probability state, and 4/400 (= 1/100) (winning value “0” to “3”) in the medium probability state. The high probability state is 10/400 (= 1/40) (winning values “0” to “9”).
In the example shown in the drawing, the special symbol lottery does not show the determination of whether or not the small hit is made at the time of deviation, but the small hit is also based on a random number as shown in FIG. 1-29-1. A lottery to win a small hit with a predetermined probability is performed based on the prior determination.

  Referring to FIG. 1-29-2, the jackpot symbol random number in the pre-determination process has the same configuration as the jackpot symbol random number in the jackpot determination process shown in FIG. 1-17-2. That is, as a type of jackpot based on a special symbol triggered by winning the first starting port a121, 1 per 16R length, 2 per 16R length, 1 per 4R length, 2 per 4R length, 3R per 4R length, 4R Nine types are set: 1 per short, 2 per 4R short, 3 per 4R short, 4 per 4R short. In addition, as a type of jackpot based on a special symbol triggered by winning the second starting port a122, 5 per 1 5R length, 2 per 16R length, 1 per 4R length, 2 per 4R length, 4 per 3R length Type is set.

  The range of the random number value is 100 in the range of 0 to 99 regardless of which of the first starting port a121 and the second starting port a122 is won. The winning probability in the pre-judgment is 3/100 (winning value “0” to “2”) for 1 per 16R length and 1/100 (winning value) for 2 per 16R length when winning at the first starting port a121. “3”), 30/100 for 1 per 4R length (winning value “4” to “33”), 30/100 for 2 per 4R length (winning value “34” to “63”) 3 per 4R length is 30/100 (winning value “64” to “93”), 1 per 4R short is 1/100 (winning value “94”), and 2 per 4R short is 1/100 ( Winning value “95”), 2/100 for 3 per 4R short (winning value “96” to “97”), and 2/100 for 4 per 4R short (winning value “98” to “99”) It is. On the other hand, when winning the second starting port a122, 47/100 (winning value “0” to “46”) for 1 per 16R length and 3/100 (winning value “47” to “46” for 2 per 16R length). 49 ”), 1 per 4R length is 20/100 (winning value“ 50 ”to“ 69 ”), 2 per 4R length is 10/100 (winning value“ 70 ”to“ 79 ”), 3 per 4R length is 20/100 (winning value “80” to “99”).

  Referring to FIG. 1-29-3, the reach random number in the prior determination process has the same configuration as the reach random number in the variation pattern selection process shown in FIG. 1-17-3 (a). That is, the range of random number values is 250 from 0 to 249, 22 random numbers are assigned to the lottery result (with reach) for performing the reach effect, and 228 to the lottery result (without reach) for the reach effect. Random number values are assigned. Therefore, when the special symbol lottery is not a big hit, it is determined by the prior determination that the reach effect is performed with a probability of 8.8 / 100 (= 22/250).

[Preliminary judgment processing by game control unit]
FIG. 1-30 is a flowchart showing the contents of the preliminary determination processing (steps a605 and a611 in FIG. 1-6) according to the present embodiment.
In the flowchart shown in FIG. 1-30, the CPU a201 of the game control unit a200 determines whether the internal state is a high probability state or a medium probability state (hereinafter, described as a high (medium) probability state) (step a3001). If it is determined that the state is a high (medium) probability state (Yes in step a3001), the jackpot lottery right acquired in the start-up switch process (see FIG. 1-6) shifts to the current high (medium) probability state. After that, it is judged how many times the jackpot lottery right corresponds.
That is, the jackpot that the gaming state after that becomes a high (medium) probability state (in the example shown in FIG. 1-29-2, 1 per 16R length, 2 per 16R length, 1 per 4R length, 2 per 4R length, 4R short When winning of 1 type, 2 per 4R short, and 3 per 4R short) is determined, the number of fluctuations N when winning the big win is set as the reference number M. For example, when winning the 1st per 16R length (per length that will result in a short game state with high probability) by the 200th jackpot lottery (special symbol variation display) after turning on the power, “200” is stored in the RAMa 203. Is stored, and the internal state becomes a high probability short-time gaming state. Therefore, the jackpot lottery performed at the 201st time after turning on the power corresponds to the first jackpot lottery after shifting to the high probability short-time gaming state, and similarly, the jackpot lottery performed at the 210th time The lottery corresponds to the tenth jackpot lottery after shifting to the high probability short-time gaming state. In this way, it is calculated how many jackpot lotteries the right of the jackpot lottery acquired by the start port switch process (see FIG. 1-6) corresponds to the high probability short-time gaming state. Specifically, the CPU a 201 obtains the calculated value Z by subtracting the reference number M from the variation number N (step a3002). The same processing is also performed when winning a jackpot that shifts to the medium probability short game state (hereinafter, the high probability medium short game state and the medium probability short game state are combined and described as the high (medium) probability short game state).

Then, the CPUa 201 determines whether or not the calculated value Z is equal to or less than the predetermined number X (step a3003). The predetermined number of times X here is the upper limit number of times that the big hit random number is determined based on the hit determination table for the high (medium) probability state (see FIG. 1-29-1).
Here, in the present embodiment, if the subsequent game state wins a big win that becomes a short (high) probability game state, then the jackpot random number is determined for the high (medium) probability state up to 80 times. This is performed based on the hit determination table. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the predetermined number X is set to 80, and it is determined whether or not the calculation value Z is 80 or less.
That is, whether the jackpot random number acquired by the start switch processing (see FIG. 1-6) is determined based on the hit determination table for the high (medium) probability state, or the high (medium) probability short-time gaming state Whether or not is determined based on the hit determination table for the low probability state (see FIG. 1-29-1).
For example, it is assumed that 1 is won per 16R length (per length that becomes short game state at high probability) by the 200th jackpot lottery (variation number N = 200) after the power is turned on. After that, 78 jackpot lotteries were performed after entering the high-probability short-time gaming state, and in a situation where the jackpot has not yet been won, the change number N = 279 hold A, the change number N = 280 hold B, It is assumed that the hold C having the number of fluctuations N = 281 is stored in the RAMa 203. At this time, since the reference number M = 200 is set, the hold A is the calculated value Z = 79, the hold B is the calculated value Z = 80, and the hold C is the calculated value Z = 81. Therefore, hold A and hold B are determined as “YES” in step a3003, and hold C is determined as “NO” in step a3003.
As described above, the processing of step a3002 and step a3003 makes it possible to determine the jackpot based not on the current internal state but on the internal state at the time of special symbol processing. Therefore, even when the gaming state changes from a high (medium) probability state to a low probability state, an accurate determination result can be derived.

When the CPUa 201 determines that the calculated value Z is less than or equal to the predetermined number of times X (Yes in step a3003), the prior determination information related to the “big hit” for changing the subsequent internal state to the low probability state is the start port switch process (FIG. It is determined whether it is stored before the start (see 1-6) (step a3004). However, in the pachinko gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment, since there is no jackpot that becomes a low probability state after the jackpot game, it is not determined Yes in step a3004. Therefore, the CPU a201 determines No in step a3004, and selects a hit determination table for a high (medium) probability state (step a3006).
In the present embodiment, each of the various jackpots is set to a predetermined number X = 80 (see FIG. 1-17-2). Therefore, as long as No in step a3004, until the jackpot lottery is performed 80 times, one of the hit determination table for the high probability state or the hit determination table for the medium probability state is selected according to the type of jackpot. The However, if a high probability state is obtained by winning 2 per 4R length and 3 per 4R short, it will be in a high probability state until the big hit lottery is performed 40 times, and the hit determination for the high probability state A table is selected. Then, since the state shifts to the medium probability state, the hit determination table for the medium probability state is selected.

On the other hand, if the current gaming state is a low probability state (No in step a3001) or the current gaming state is a high (medium) probability state, it is determined that the calculated value Z exceeds the predetermined number X. In the case (No in step a3003), the following processing is performed. In other words, the CPUa 201 stores in the storage area a204 (see FIG. 1-27) of the RAMa 203 the advance determination information relating to the jackpot for changing the subsequent gaming state to the high (medium) probability state, and the start port switch process (FIG. 1-6). It is determined whether or not it is stored before starting (see step a3005). For example, when random numbers are stored in the sixth storage unit a204f (see FIG. 1-27) of the storage area a204 in step a605 of the start port switch process (see FIG. 1-6), the first storage unit a204a to the second storage unit a204f. It is determined whether or not prior determination information related to one of the jackpots that are in a high (medium) probability state is stored in the 5 storage unit a204e (see FIG. 1-27). That is, it is determined whether there is a reserve ball that is digested prior to the reserve ball retained in the start port switch process (see FIG. 1-6) to change the internal state to a high (medium) probability state. This is because if such a reserved ball is retained first, the internal state becomes a high (medium) probability state when digesting the retained ball retained in the start-up switch processing. .
Therefore, when it is determined No in step a3005, the hit determination table for the low probability state is selected (step a3007), and when it is determined Yes, the hit determination table for the high (medium) probability state is selected. Is selected (step a3006).

  As described above, the processing of step a3004 and step a3005 makes it possible to determine the jackpot based on the internal state during the special symbol processing. Therefore, even when the internal state changes from the high probability state to the low probability state, or when the internal state changes from the low probability state to the high probability state, an accurate prior determination result can be derived.

  Then, each random number is determined based on a table selected from the low-probability random number determination table and the high-probability random number determination table (step a3008), and the determination result is stored in the storage area a204 (FIG. 1) as prior determination information. (See -27)) (step a3009). Then, it is determined whether or not the determination result is a big hit or a small win (step a3010), and if it is a big hit or a small win (Yes in step a3010), a predictive command is set (step a3011). If it is lost (No in step a3010), a normal command is set (step a3012). Thereby, the preliminary determination process is completed. The set prior determination command is transmitted to the effect control unit a300 in the output process (see step a506 in FIG. 1-5).

  It is also conceivable to employ control not shown in FIG. 1-30 in the prior determination process. For example, if it is a loss (No in step a3010), it is determined whether or not a reach effect is performed during the change, and a reach command is set when it is determined that a reach effect is performed. In addition, when it is determined in advance that it is a jackpot (Yes in step a3010), the type of jackpot is determined in advance.

  Here, these advance determination commands are used to transmit information indicating that the number of the first hold U1 or the second hold U2 has been changed to the effect control unit a300 and have been determined in advance. Information on whether the result is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss is included. The prior determination command also includes information for notifying whether or not to perform staged effects using the drum lamp sections a11, a12, a13, and a14 (see, for example, FIG. 1-36).

[Operation of production control unit]
Next, an operation performed by the effect control unit a300 in response to each command transmitted from the game control unit a200 will be described. Specifically, in the present embodiment, effect control unit a300 performs an advance determination command reception process, an effect execution command reception process, and an effect control process. In these processes, the CPU a301 of the effect control unit a300 reads out the program stored in the ROMa 302 and is executed by the program.
FIG. 1-31 is a flowchart illustrating a part of the operation of the effect control unit a300. Note that various commands transmitted from the game control unit a200 by the output process (see step a506 in FIG. 1-5) are temporarily stored in a command storage unit (not shown) provided in the RAM a303 of the effect control unit a300. And CPUa301 of the production | generation control part a300 goes to see the command memorize | stored in the command storage device not shown at a predetermined space | interval, and controls production based on each memorize | stored command.
The production control unit a300 repeatedly executes each process shown in FIG. 1-31 at regular intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) in a normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off. Referring to the drawing, the prior determination command reception process, the effect execution command reception process, and the effect control process are sequentially executed (steps a3101 to a3103).
As shown in FIG. 1-31, when the effect control unit a300 receives a predetermination command from the game control unit a200, it performs a predetermination command reception process (step a3101), and when it receives an effect execution command from the game control unit a200, Execution command reception processing is performed (step a3102). Then, the effect control unit a300 performs effect control processing thereafter (step a3103).
The detailed contents of the prior determination command reception process, the effect execution command reception process, and the effect control process will be described later.

[Pre-judgment command reception processing by the production control unit]
FIG. 1-32 is a flowchart showing the contents of the advance determination command reception process in the effect control unit a300.
In the flowchart shown in the figure, the CPU a 301 determines whether or not a prior determination command is stored in a command storage unit (not shown) (step a3201). If it is determined that the pre-determination command is stored (Yes in step a3201), the CPU a301 uses the first hold storage area a305 in the RAM a303 to the hold flag storage area in the second hold storage area a306 (see FIG. 1-28). The hold flag is turned on (step a3202).
Note that if the advance determination command is not stored (No in step a3201), the advance determination command reception process ends.

Next, the CPU a301 determines whether or not the predictor flag is turned on in any of the storage units a305a to a305d and a306a to a306d (see FIG. 1-28) of the first reserved storage area a305 to the second reserved storage area a306 of the RAM a303. Is determined (step a3203). As a result, if the CPU a 301 determines that the predictor flag is turned on in any of the storage units a305a to a305d and a306a to a306d (see FIG. 1-28) (Yes in step a3203), the hold number predictor display A command is set (step a3204).
On the other hand, if it is determined that any of the storage units a305a to a305d, a306a to a306d (see FIG. 1-28) has not been turned on (No in step a3203), a hold number normal display command is issued. Set (step a3205).
Note that these commands are for informing the player of the number of holds in the effect control process, and have information related to the first hold U1 and the second hold U2. The hold number predictor command also includes information indicating in which storage unit the predictor flag is turned on.
When the command is set in this way, the prior determination command reception process is terminated.

[Production execution command reception processing by the production control unit]
FIG. 1-33 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect execution command reception process in the effect control unit a300.
In the flowchart shown in the figure, the CPU a301 of the effect control unit a300 determines whether or not an effect execution command is stored in the RAMa 303 (step a3301). The effect execution command mentioned here refers to a command generated by special symbol processing (see step a503 in FIG. 1-5), and information related to determination results of at least “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing” big hits. , Information concerning the variation time of the special symbol and the aspect of the effect (the effect with reach or the effect without reach). More specifically, the effect execution command has information on the contents of the special symbol from which the variable display will be started, that is, whether the special symbol variable display related to the big hit, the small hit, or the loss is started. . In addition, the effect execution command includes information on whether the effect performed in the special symbol variation display is the effect with reach or the effect without reach, and further the time of the reach effect.

When determining that the pre-determination command is stored (Yes in step a3301), the CPU a301 selects one effect table from the plurality of effect tables stored in the ROMa 302 based on the effect execution command (step a3302). ).
The ROMa 302 of the effect control unit a300 stores a long hit effect table, a short hit and small hit effect table, an effect table with lose reach, and an effect table without lose reach.

  Thereafter, the CPU a 301 randomly extracts and acquires one random number from 0 to 250 (step a3303), and determines the random number based on the selected effect table. In this effect table, a random number and an effect pattern are associated with each other, and one effect pattern is determined from a number of effect patterns according to the random number. Thereby, CPUa301 determines the production content (step a3304). More specifically, the decorative design pattern in the image display unit a114, the operation pattern of the movable accessory a115, the irradiation pattern of the panel lamp a116 and the frame lamp a157, and the sound pattern output from the speaker a156 are determined.

Further, in the random number determination, the CPU a301 determines whether or not to perform the lighting number increase effect, which is an effect using the drum lamp portions a11 to a14 (see FIG. 1-36) as the panel lamp a116. The lighting number increase effect is not only when the random number determination is a big hit but under a big hit under a predetermined condition (for example, when the symbol fluctuation time is shortened to 2 seconds or 4 seconds (short fluctuation)). (So-called gassing) is also conceivable. In addition, when the lighting number increase effect is already being executed, the determination regarding the execution of the lighting number increase effect is not performed.
For example, it is conceivable to store a flag indicating that the lighting number increase effect is being executed in the RAMa 303 and control according to the flag.

  In this way, after the effect pattern performed during the variation display of the special symbol is determined, the CPU a 301 sets an effect confirmation command related to the determined effect pattern (step a3305). Then, the CPU a301 performs a shift process for the reserved storage areas a305 and a306 in the RAM a303 (step a3306). For example, when the received effect execution command relates to the first hold U1, the flag stored in the fourth storage unit a305d is shifted to the third storage unit a305c and stored. Then, the flag stored in the third storage unit a305c is shifted and stored in the second storage unit a305b, and the flag stored in the second storage unit a305b is shifted and stored in the first storage unit a305a. In this case, the flag stored in the first storage unit a305a is deleted.

  The CPU a301 determines whether or not the predictor flag is turned on in any of the storage units a305a to a305d and a306a to a306d in the reserved storage areas a305 and a306 (step a3307). If it is determined that any of the storage units a305a to a305d and a306a to a306d is turned on (Yes in step a3307), the CPU a301 sets a pending number predictor display command (step a3308). If it is determined that this is not the case (No in step a3307), a hold number normal display command is set (step a3309). These commands are for informing the player of the number of holds in the effect control process, and have information relating to the number of holds of the first hold U1 and the number of holds of the second hold U2. The hold number predictor command also has information indicating which of the storage units a305a to a305d and a306a to a306d stores the predictor flag.

Although not specifically illustrated, when the CPU a301 of the effect control unit a300 executes a routine process, a prior determination command and an effect execution command may be received simultaneously. In this case, the hold number predictor display command or the hold number normal display command is already set in step a3204 or step a3205 of the prior determination command reception process shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the effect execution command reception process shown in FIG. 1-33, on the basis of the information after the shift process in step a3306, separately from the prior determination command reception process, the hold number indication display command or the hold number normal Set the display command. Therefore, the command set in step a3204 or step a3205 is different from the command set in step a3308 or step a3309.
As described above, when the advance determination command and the effect execution command are received simultaneously, the command set in the advance determination command reception process is deleted, and then a new command is set in the effect execution command reception process. It becomes.

If it is determined that the sign flag is ON (Yes in step a3307), the CPUa301 performs a lighting number increase effect command process (step a3310). The lighting number increase effect command process is a process for setting the lighting number increase effect, and details thereof will be described later.
When the command is set in this way, the effect execution command reception process is terminated.

[Lighting increase effect command processing]
FIG. 1-34 is a flowchart showing the contents of the lighting number increase effect command processing (step a3310 in FIG. 1-33) according to the present embodiment. When it is determined to execute the lighting number increase effect (step a3304 described above) (See explanation of the above).
In the flowchart shown in FIG. 1-34, the CPU a301 of the effect control unit a300 first determines the content of the lighting number increase effect by the drum lamp units a11-a14 (see, for example, FIG. 1-36) (step a3401). More specifically, the CPU a301 confirms the immediately preceding lighting number (0 to 4) stored in the lighting number storage area a307 (see (a) of FIG. 1-28) of the RAMa303. If the upper limit of the number of lighting is not four, the CPU a 301 adds one immediately before the number of lighting and stores it in the lighting number storage area a307. When the upper limit of the number of lighting is four, the lighting number increase effect is ended, so that the lighting number is reset to 0 and stored in the lighting number storage area a307.
Thus, the current number of lights (0 to 4) in the lighting number increase effect is stored and updated in the lighting number storage area a307 (see (a) of FIG. 1-28) of the RAMa 303.
In the present embodiment, since the maximum number of first start opening prizes held is 4, the upper limit of the number of lighting is set to 4, but other numbers may be considered. For example, in the case where not only the number of first start opening winnings held but also the number of second starting opening winnings is used, the number of lighting is set to an upper limit of eight. It is also conceivable that the upper limit of the number of lighting is a number other than 4 or 8.

The lighting number increase effect determined in this way is due to the light with which the number of drum lamps a11 to a14 (see, for example, FIG. 1-36) is increased every time the reserved ball relating to the winning to the first start port a121 is digested. This is an effect, and ultimately, all the drum lamp portions a11 to a14 are lit. In other words, the number of lighting increases from 1 to 4 in order for each variation display of the special symbol toward the all lighting which is the final effect form. When all the lights are turned on, the state shifts to a dedicated effect that increases the possibility of a big win for the player, for example, a big hit. In other words, the degree of expectation increases as the number of lights increases by the lighting number increase effect.
Therefore, since the number of lighting of the drum lamp portions a11 to a14 increases every time the reserved ball is digested, the player has a sense of expectation that it may be a big hit when the lighting number increase effect is started. You can enjoy the game with it, and you can enhance the fun of the game.
In addition, the lighting increase effect is one of the sign effects that suggest the result of pre-determining by pre-reading for the undrawn part of the special symbol lottery, and the reserved pre-reading effect is a continuous effect that spans multiple variations It becomes possible to have a story. It should be noted that the lighting number increase effect may be accompanied by an effect of displaying a predetermined image on the image display part a114 in connection with the lighting of the drum lamp parts a11 to a14.
The lighting number increase effect here is an example of a specific effect.

  In addition, when the upper limit of the number of lighting is set to four, in addition to the effect of always increasing the number of lighting to the upper limit, the CPUa 301 of the effect control unit a300 determines in advance a number smaller than the upper limit as the number of lighting (the eventual end A control example in which the number of lightings is sequentially increased up to the determined number of lightings is also conceivable.

Here, it is conceivable to set a mode for shifting to a dedicated effect and a mode (so-called gusset) that does not shift to a dedicated effect when all lighting is performed with a lighting number increase effect.
In addition, when the lighting number increase effect is started, there is an effect control in which the lighting is always turned on, and there is also an effect control in which the lighting number increase effect ends in the middle of the full lighting. For example, in the case where the number of lighting is two, it is a control example in which the lighting number increase effect ends without being changed to three states in the next variation display.
In the case of such a control example, the player can enjoy the excitement by having a sense of expectation and anxiety that it may be a big hit when the lighting increase effect is started. It can further enhance interest.

In addition, in the lighting number increase effect, in addition to the example of effect control for increasing the number of lighting of the drum lamp parts a11 to a14 for each variable display, the number of lighting of the drum lamp parts a11 to a14 is temporarily changed even when the next variable display is performed. It is possible to consider a modification in which the number of lighting is maintained as it is without increasing and the number of lighting is increased again by any of the subsequent fluctuation displays. That is, in this modified example, the number of lighting of the drum lamp portions a11 to a14 does not change temporarily, and the lighting number increase effect does not proceed, and a stepping state is entered. In other words, it can be said that this effect is an effect in which the drum lamp portions a11 to a14 are frozen (freeze effect) or an effect in which the progress is interrupted.
Moreover, in this Embodiment, although the effect (what is called a one-way effect) which increases the number of lighting of the drum lamp parts a11-a14 sequentially toward all lighting states is performed, the modification (temporarily decreasing the number of lighting) A lighting number increase / decrease effect) is also conceivable. For example, when the number of lighting is 2 at a certain variation display, after the number of lighting is decreased to 1 in the next variation display, the lighting number is further increased to 3 in the next variation display. An effect that incorporates a lighting number reduction effect into a lighting number increase effect can be referred to as a lighting number change effect.
Further, an effect in which the above-described freeze effect and the above-mentioned lighting number decrease effect are incorporated in the lighting number increase effect can be considered.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, a lighting number increase effect is executed by the drum lamp units a11 to a14 (see FIG. 1-36), but a modification that displays an image instead of the drum lamp units a11 to a14 on the image display unit a114. Examples are also possible. In that case, it is necessary to make an image that does not cause the player to misidentify that the image that replaces the drum lamp portions a11 to a14 is on-hold display.

Thus, when the content of the lighting number increase effect is determined, the CPU a301 determines whether or not there is a holding ball related to winning in the second start opening a122 (step a3402). That is, the CPU a 301 determines whether or not the hold flag ON is present in the second hold storage area a 306 (see FIG. 1-28) of the RAM a 303.
If there is a hold flag ON in the second hold storage area a306 (see FIG. 1-28) (Yes in step a3402), the CPUa301 sets the interrupt flag to ON (step a3403) and executes the lighting number increase effect. The production interruption command, which is an instruction to interrupt the operation, is set (step a3404). The significance of setting the production interruption command will be described later. The set interruption flag is stored in the RAMa 303.

  Here, such a set of production interruption commands is made when the condition that there is a holding ball related to winning in the second starting port a122 is satisfied, but other conditions are added or other conditions are set. It is possible to replace it.

  On the other hand, if there is no hold flag ON in the second hold storage area a306 (see FIG. 1-28) (No in step a3402), the CPU a301 next determines whether or not the interrupt flag is ON (step a3405). That is, it is determined by the interruption flag whether the lighting number increase effect is in a suspended state. More specifically, the interruption flag is ON if the lighting increase effect is interrupted, and the interruption flag is OFF if it is not interrupted.

  More specifically, the timing of resuming the interrupted lighting number increase effect is the time when the reserved ball related to the reservation prefetch that triggers the lighting number increase effect is digested. Therefore, when the interruption flag is ON (Yes in step a3405), the CPU a301 determines whether or not the change is concerned (step a3406). In the case of the change (Yes in step a3406), the CPU a301 sets the interruption flag to OFF (step a3407), and then sets an effect execution command for instructing execution of the lighting number increase effect (step a3408).

If the interruption flag is not ON (No in step a3405), the lighting number increase effect is not interrupted, so the CPU a301 sets an effect execution command (see step a3408 described above).
On the other hand, if it is not the change (No in step a3406), the CPU a301 determines that the timing for resuming the lighting increase effect has not yet arrived, sets the interruption flag ON (see step a3403 above), and sets the production interruption command (described above). Step a3404).
When the command is set in this way, the lighting number increase effect command process is terminated.

[Production control processing by production control unit]
FIG. 1-35 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect control process in the effect control unit a300.
In the flowchart shown in the figure, when the hold number sign display command is set in the above-described prior determination command reception process or effect execution command reception process, the CPUa 311 of the image / sound control unit a310 reads out the program from the ROMa 312. Then, the effect display device control as the hold number sign display control is started for the image display unit a114 (step a3501). That is, the predetermined image is displayed while the decorative design of the image display unit a114 is changing. When the hold number display is displayed on the image display unit a114, the hold number display is changed.
When the effect execution command is set in the lighting number increase effect command processing described above, the CPU a321 of the lamp control unit a320 reads the program from the ROMa322 and performs the effect as lighting control for the drum lamp units a11 to a14. The lighting device control is started (step a3503), and the CPUa311 of the image / sound control unit a310 reads the program from the ROMa312, and starts the effect display device control as the display control associated with the lighting of the image display unit a114 (step). a3501).
On the other hand, when the production interruption command is set in the above-described lighting number increase production command processing, the CPU a321 starts the production lighting device control as the all-off control with respect to the drum lamp units a11 to a14 (step S1). a3503).

Here, in addition to the control example in which the color of the light at the time of lighting the drum lamp units a11 to a14 is made constant, a control example in which the color of the light to be turned on is changed when a predetermined condition is satisfied can be considered. In addition to the control example in which the brightness of the light to be turned on is made constant, a control example in which the brightness of the light is changed when a predetermined condition is satisfied can be considered. In addition to the lighting state in which the lighting state is maintained, a control example in which the lighting state is repeatedly turned on and off can be considered.
In the case of adopting such a control example, the “predetermined condition” described above may be, for example, that the gaming state is a predetermined one. More specifically, the color and / or brightness of the light is different between the low probability game state, the medium probability game state, and the high probability game state, The case (non-probability change) and the other game state (probability change) may be different from each other. That is, it is a control example in which the light emission mode in the drum lamp units a11 to a14 is changed according to the gaming state.

  In addition to the production examples that accurately reflect the gaming state when performing such light emission mode change control, there are other examples of presentations that do not accurately reflect the gaming state and examples that are completely different from the gaming state. It is done.

Further, the CPU a321 of the lamp control unit a320 reads out the program from the ROMa322, and starts the effect agent device control as the holding number predictor display control for the movable accessory a115 (step a3502). Similarly, the CPU a321 of the lamp control unit a320 starts the effect lighting device control as the reserved number sign display control for the panel lamp a116 and the frame lamp a157 (step a3503). In addition, the CPU a 311 of the image / sound control unit a310 starts sound output device control as the hold number sign display control for the speaker a156 (step a3504).
When the hold number normal display command is set, the display display device control (step a3501) as the hold number normal display control of the image display unit a114 by the CPU a 311 and the hold number normal of the movable accessory a 115 by the CPU a 321 Performing effect device control (step a3502) is performed as display control. Further, the lighting device control for presentation as the display number normal display control of the panel lamp a116 and the frame lamp a157 by the CPU a321 (step a3503), and the sound output device control as the display number normal display control of the speaker a156 by the CPUa311 (step a3504). I do.

[Concrete modes of lighting increase production]
Next, a specific aspect of the lighting number increase effect according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1-36, 1-37, and 1-38. In addition, as described above, the lighting number increase effect is performed using the drum lamp portions a11 to a14, but an image related to lighting of the drum lamp portions a11 to a14 may be further displayed on the image display portion a114. Conceivable.
Here, of the drum lamp parts a11 to a14, the drum lamp part a11 is the first lighting lamp. The drum lamp part a12 is a second lighting lamp, the drum lamp part a13 is a third lighting lamp, and the drum lamp part a14 is a fourth lighting lamp.

[First aspect in lighting increase effect]
FIG. 1-36 is a diagram for explaining a specific first aspect of the lighting number increase effect, and shows a case where the lighting number increase effect is shifted to the final effect mode without being interrupted. Each of (a-1), (b-1), (c-1), (d-1), and (e-1) in FIG. 1-36 is a diagram for mainly explaining the hold state. Each of (a-2), (b-2), (c-2), (d-2) and (e-2) in the figure explains the effect of increasing the number of lighting of the drum lamp parts a11 to a14. It is a figure for doing.
Moreover, (a-1) of FIG. 1-36 explains the relationship between the holding ball and the lighting of the drum lamp parts a11 to a14 when the changing suggestion image a10A is displayed together with (a-2). That is, the combination of (a-1) and (a-2) shows the state when the changing suggestion image a10A is displayed. Similarly, both (b-1) and (b-2) in FIG. 1-36 show the state when the changing suggestion image a10B is displayed, and (c-1) and (c-2) in FIG. A state when the changing suggestion image a10C is displayed is shown. Moreover, (d-1) and (d-2) of FIGS. 1-36 show the state at the time of display of the changing suggestion image a10D, and (e-1) and (e-2) of FIG. The state at the time of a10E display is shown. For convenience of explanation, (a-1) and (a-2) may be simply referred to as (a) below. Similarly, (b-1) and (b-2) are referred to as (b), (c-1) and (c-2) as (c), respectively (d-1) and (d-2) May be referred to as (d), (e-1) and (e-2) as (e), respectively.
(A), (b), (c), (d), and (e) in FIG. 1-36 are shown in time series, and shift in the order of (a) to (e) with the passage of time. It shall be.

At the time point shown in FIG. 1-36 (a), in addition to the changing suggestion image a10A, the CPU a301 of the effect control unit a300 has already made a preliminary determination for the holding ball a10B, the holding ball a10C, the holding ball a10D, and the holding ball a10E. It has been broken. And as shown to (a-1) of the same figure, the symbol fluctuation | variation based on the jackpot lottery which concerns on the fluctuation suggestion image a10A which is the earliest holding | maintenance part is performed (digestion), and it is called holding balls a10B-a10E There are four holds.
More specifically, as a result of the prior determination for the newly held ball sphere a10E, it is determined by the CPU a301 that it is a big hit and the lighting number increase effect is performed. Therefore, in (a-1) of FIG. 1-36, the holding ball a <b> 10 </ b> E is illustrated with the letter “T”. The start of the lighting number increase effect is the next change (see (b-2) in FIG. 1-36).

  And at the time shown to (a) of FIG. 1-36, the lighting number increase effect is not started, therefore, as shown to (a-2) of the same figure, all of the drum lamp parts a11-a14. The light is off. In addition, about the drum lamp part a11-a14, it is also considered that CPUa321 of the lamp control part a320 controls so that instead of turning off, the way of lighting at the normal time instead of the way of lighting at the time of increasing the number of lighting is performed. .

At the time point shown in (b) of FIG. 1-36, as shown in (b-1) of FIG. 1-36, the earliest reserved portion is digested (see the changing suggestion image a10B), and the reserved balls a10C, a10D, a10E In addition to the above, a holding ball a10F is newly generated. At this point, there are four holds. In addition, the result of the prior determination about the holding ball a10F was not a big hit.
Then, the lighting number increase effect is started, and as shown in (b-2) of the figure, only the uppermost drum lamp part a11 among the four drum lamp parts a11 to a14 is lit, and other drums are turned on. The lamp parts a12 to a14 are turned off (one is lit).

(C) in FIG. 1-36 shows that the earliest reserved portion is digested (see the changing suggestion image a10C) and the symbol is changing (see (c-1) in the same figure). In addition to the holding balls a10D, a10E, and a10F, a holding ball a10G that is a new holding ball is generated.
Also, at the time shown in FIG. 1-36 (c), the lighting number increase effect is continuously performed, and as shown in FIG. 1-3 (c-2), from the state of FIG. 1-3 (b-2). The number of lighting is increased by one to two. That is, the drum lamp part a11 and the a12 located below the drum lamp part a11 and adjacent to the drum lamp part a11 are lit (two lights). The other drum lamp portions a13 and a14 are turned off.

(D) in FIG. 1-36 is the time of digestion of the earliest reserved portion (refer to the changing suggestion image a10D), and in addition to the reserved balls a10E, a10F, a10G, a new reserved ball a10H is generated (See (d-1) in the figure).
In addition, the lighting number increasing effect is continued at the time shown in FIG. 1-36 (d), and as shown in FIG. 1-3 (d-2), the lighting number is further increased by one to three. . That is, the drum lamp parts a11 and a12 are lit, and a13 located below the drum lamp part a12 and adjacent to the drum lamp part a12 is lit (three lights).

  At the time point shown in (e) of FIG. 1-36, as shown in (e-1) of the same figure, the earliest reserved portion is digested (see the changing suggestion image a10E), and the design is changed. State. That is, it is the time of the change of the holding ball a10E for which the jackpot advance determination has been made. In addition to the holding balls a10F, a10G, and a10H, a holding ball a10I that is a new holding ball is generated.

And the lighting number increase production is continuing also in (e) of Drawing 1-36, and since it is the change concerned as mentioned above, it shifts to the final production mode. The final effect mode is determined in advance by a predetermined procedure. For example, in addition to four lighting (all lighting), three lighting, two lighting, and the like. In the case shown in (e-2) of the figure, the number of lighting by the lighting number increase effect is four which is the maximum value, and besides the drum lamp parts a11 to a13, it is located on the lowermost side and has the outermost shape. The large drum lamp part a14 is also lit (four lights). That is, all the four drum lamp parts a11 to a14 are lit (predetermined presentation mode). The design variation of the holding ball a10E is started, and the effect that reaches the big hit is started by the change of the holding ball a10E that is a big hit as a result of the preliminary determination.
As described above, the lighting number increase effect using the drum lamp portions a11 to a14 is performed over a plurality of symbol variations. And the lighting mode of the drum lamp parts a11 to a14 changes for each of a plurality of symbol variations, and such a change is directed to the final production mode of full lighting of the drum lamp parts a11 to a14.
As described above, if the jackpot lottery of the holding ball a10E is not a jackpot, a control example is considered in which the next symbol variation is started without performing a jackpot effect after the transition to the final effect mode.

Moreover, in this Embodiment, the lighting number increase effect in which the lighting number of the drum lamp parts a11-a14 increases gradually as a prefetching effect is performed. Such an increase in the number of lightings makes it possible to easily grasp a player approaching a jackpot, but is not limited to this, and the lighting pattern of the drum lamp parts a11 to a14 is changed. The production of can also be considered.
For example, in the pre-reading effect, control is performed so that any one of the drum lamp portions a11 to a14 is lit. More specifically, for example, the drum lamp part a11 is lit in (b-2) of FIG. 1-36, the drum lamp part a12 is lit in (c-2) of FIG. ), The drum lamp part a13 is turned on, and the drum lamp part a14 is turned on in (e-2) of FIG. In other words, the control is to sequentially switch the drum lamp portions a11 to a14 that are turned on.

[Second aspect of lighting increase effect]
FIG. 1-37 is a diagram illustrating a second specific example of the lighting number increase effect, and shows a case where the lighting number increase effect is interrupted. That is, the second mode shown in the figure is different from the first mode shown in FIG. 1-36 in that the lighting number increase effect is interrupted.
Note that in FIG. 1-37, the arrangement is shown in common with the above-described FIG. 1-36, and thus description of the common arrangement may be omitted. FIG. 1-37 shows (a) to (e) in time series, and (f) composed of (f-1) and (f-2) as the next variation of (e). Show. In addition, in FIG. 1-37, (d-2) and (e-2) have the same contents shown in the drawing, and therefore, overlapping illustration is omitted.

In FIG. 1-37 which shows a 2nd aspect, it is the same as that of the case of FIG. 1-36 (1st aspect) until it interrupts. That is, the respective time points shown in FIGS. 1-37 (a) to (c) correspond to the respective time points shown in FIGS. 1-36 (a) to (c), and detailed descriptions thereof will be given. Is omitted. In addition, in FIG. 1-37 (a), all lights are turned off, (b) is lit one, (c) is lit two.
As a result of the preliminary determination (see FIG. 1-30) for the holding ball a10E, it is determined that the CPU a 301 is a big hit and the lighting number increase effect is performed (see (a) in FIG. 1-37), and the next change The lighting number increase effect has been started (see (b) and (c) of FIG. 13; see step a3408 of FIG. 1-34).

If a game ball enters the second start port a122 before the symbol variation of the hold ball a10C ends, as shown in (d-1) of FIG. The jackpot lottery is not performed, and the jackpot lottery is performed for the second start-up winning prize for priority digestion (see FIG. 1-9).
At the time point shown in FIG. 1-37 (d), the variation display based on the second start opening winning is thus performed.

  More specifically, at the time point shown in (d) of FIG. 1-37, as shown in (d-2) of the same figure, none of the drum lamp portions a11 to a14 are lit, and are turned off. That is, in FIG. 1-37 (c), which is the previous time point, the drum lamp portions a11 and a12 are turned on, and an effect of increasing the number of lighting is already being executed ((c-2) in FIG. 1-37). (Refer to step a3405 in FIG. 1-34, step a3408). However, at the time shown in FIG. 1-37 (d), the lighting number increase effect is interrupted by the symbol variation based on the second start opening winning (see (d-2) in FIG. 1-37). 1-34, step a3402 Yes, see steps a3403 to a3404).

  Such interruption of the lighting number increase effect continues even at the time shown in FIG. 1-37 (e), which is the next change (see (e-2) in FIG. 1-34; in step a3406 in FIG. 1-34). No, see steps a3403 to a3404). That is, at the time shown in (e) of FIG. 1-37, the drum lamp part a13 is not lit, and three are not lit.

Then, at the time of the change when the big hit lottery (see FIG. 1-9) is performed for the holding ball a10E, that is, at the time shown in (f) of FIG. More specifically, the final effect mode in which all of the drum lamp portions a11 to a14 are turned on is executed (see (f-2) in FIG. 34. Yes at step a3406 in FIG. 1-34, steps a3407 to a3408). reference). In addition, when all of the drum lamp units a11 to a14 are turned on by the CPU a321 of the lamp control unit a320, first the drum lamp unit a11 is turned on, then the drum lamp units a12 and a13 are lit in order, and finally the drum lamp unit a14. The aspect which lights up all the drum lamp parts a11-a14 is also considered.
Note that the time point shown in (f) of FIG. 1-37 corresponds to the time point shown in (e) of FIG. 1-36.

[Third aspect of lighting increase effect]
FIG. 1-38 is a diagram for explaining a specific third aspect of the lighting number increase effect, and shows a case where the lighting number increase effect is interrupted, as in the second aspect shown in FIG. 1-37. That is, the third mode illustrated in FIG. 1-38 is different from the first mode illustrated in FIG. 1-36 in that the lighting number increase effect is interrupted.
Since FIG. 1-38 is illustrated in an arrangement common to the above-described FIG. 1-37, description of the common arrangement may be omitted. Further, in FIG. 1-38, (c-2), (d-2), and (e-2) are the same as each other, and thus overlapping illustration is omitted.

In the third mode, the preferential digestion second start opening winning occurs before the time point shown in FIG. 1-38 (d). For this reason, at the time point shown in FIG. 1-38 (c), as shown in FIG. 1-38 (c-1), the big hit lottery for the holding ball a10C which is the earliest holding portion is not performed.
And as shown to (c-2) of FIG. 1-38, the lighting number increase production performed until then is interrupted, and all of the drum lamp parts a11-a14 are extinguished (in FIG. 1-34). (Yes in step a3402; see steps a3403 to a3404).

  Further, the time point shown in (d) of FIG. 1-38 at which the symbol variation for the reserved ball a10C is performed (see (d-1) in the same figure) and the symbol variation of the reserved ball a10D ( At the time shown in e) (see (e-1) in the figure), the lighting number increase effect is still interrupted (see (d-2) and (e-2) in the figure. FIG. 1-34). No in step a3406, see steps a3403 to a3404).

  Then, at the time of the change of the reserved ball a10E shown in (f) of FIG. 1-38, the lighting number increasing effect is resumed as in the case of (f) of FIG. 1-37 showing the second mode (FIG. 1). (See (f-2) of -38. Yes at step a3406 of Fig. 1-34, see steps a3407 to a3408).

As described above, in the second mode shown in FIG. 1-37 and the third mode shown in FIG. 1-38, when the second start port winning occurs, the reserved digest of the first start port winning is delayed, and The execution of the lighting number increase effect is interrupted. A supplementary explanation will be given below.
One of the conditions under which the CPUa 321 of the lamp control unit a320 executes the lighting number increase effect is the generation of a holding ball related to the first start opening winning, not the second starting opening winning. And in the pachinko gaming machine a100 according to the present embodiment, the second start opening prize is a specification that is digested in preference to the first start opening prize.
Therefore, if there is a second start opening prize, even if a holding ball related to the first start opening prize is generated, the big start lottery of the second start opening prize and the symbol variation effect are interrupted (second start opening) Winning priority processing (see step a803 in FIG. 1-8).
In the present embodiment, since there is a possibility that the second start opening winning may occur during the lighting number increase effect, in order to avoid complication of the effect control, in this embodiment, as described above, the effect An interruption command is set (see step a3404 in FIG. 1-34). By such an effect interruption command, the lighting number increase effect of the determined content is interrupted. That is, the drum lamp portions a11 to a14 are all turned off, and the execution of image effects and sound effects associated therewith is refrained. In other words, it returns to the effect state before the lighting number increase effect is started.

More specifically, the CPU a301 of the production control unit a300 starts the holding ball processing related to the first start opening winning when the second start opening winning interrupt processing ends (FIG. 1-37 (e) or FIG. 1). (See (38) -38). However, the timing of resuming the lighting increase effect is not necessarily at the start of the holding ball process related to the first start opening winning (see (e) of FIG. 1-37) but at the time of the change (see FIG. 1-37). (Refer to (f) or (f) of FIG. 1-38). In other words, the interrupted lighting increase effect is not resumed until the time of the change. Therefore, a player who does not know in detail the fact that the lighting increase effect has been interrupted due to the second starting opening prize is not performed, so that, for example, anxiety or giving up, etc. To remember.
When the lighting number increase effect is resumed, the final effect mode (all the drum lamp parts a11 to a14 is fully lit) is performed regardless of the number of lighting of the drum lamp parts a11 to a14 before the interruption. Is called. Therefore, a player who does not know much about the details feels that all of the lights are suddenly turned on by increasing the number of lights, and feels lifted by feeling of achievement of pullback or feelings of happiness in future game development. Thus, it becomes possible to provide the game enjoyment to the player.
In addition, it is possible to prevent the lighting number increase effect control from being complicated after the second start opening winning interruption process performed by the CPU a301 of the effect control unit a300, and to reduce the control burden.

[Fourth aspect of lighting increase effect]
FIG. 1-39 is a diagram for explaining a specific fourth aspect of the lighting number increase effect, and shows a case where the lighting number increase effect is interrupted, as in the second aspect shown in FIG. 1-37. That is, the fourth mode shown in FIG. 1-39 is different from the first mode shown in FIG. 1-36 in that the lighting number increase effect is interrupted.
Since FIG. 1-39 is illustrated in an arrangement common to the above-described FIG. 1-38, description of the common arrangement may be omitted.

Each point of time shown in (a) to (c) of FIG. 1-39 showing the fourth aspect corresponds to each of the points of time shown in (a) to (c) of FIG. The detailed description of is omitted. In addition, in FIG. 1-39, (a) is all turned off, (b) is turned on, and (c) is turned off.
Moreover, each time shown to (d)-(f) of FIGS. 1-39 which shows a 4th aspect (c) of FIG. 1-36 which shows a 1st aspect which is a case where a lighting number increase production is not interrupted. It corresponds to each time point shown in (e). That is, in the fourth mode, even if the lighting number increase effect is interrupted due to the interruption of the second start opening prize, if the change display based on the earliest hold in the first starting opening prize is performed, the change (FIG. Regardless of whether it is (37) (f) or 1-38 (f)), the lighting number increase effect is resumed. More specifically, when the once-interrupted lighting increase effect is resumed, the final effect mode is not always executed, but the final effect mode (for example, two lights) to the final effect mode (for example, four) A lighting effect is executed in a stepwise manner.

Specifically, in the fourth mode, as shown in FIG. 1-39 (d-2), two lights are turned on when the lighting number increase effect is resumed, and the drum lamp parts a11 and a12 are turned on. Yes. In the next variable display shown in (e-2) of the figure, the drum lamp part a13 is further lit, and three lights are lit.
And in (f-2) of the figure which is the said fluctuation | variation in which the reservation ball a10E concerning the reservation prefetch which triggered the lighting number increase production is digested, the drum lamp part a14 lights up and four lights ( All are lit).

  As described above, in the fourth aspect, although the lighting number increasing effect is interrupted by the priority process of the second start opening winning, the lighting number increasing effect is resumed with the next variation display when the priority process is finished. For this reason, although the production control of the drum lamp unit lighting is more complicated than the second mode and the third mode, the drum lamp units a11 to a14 are sequentially turned on step by step for each variable display. It becomes possible to execute with.

  As described above, in the first embodiment to the fourth embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest by executing the lighting number increasing effect using the drum lamp portions a11 to a14 according to the result of the pre-reading. In addition, it is possible to reduce the control burden of the effect control unit a300 associated with the execution or interruption of such a more interesting lighting increase effect.

  In addition, based on the result of prior determination, you may vary the lighting color of the drum lamp part a11-a14 according to the kind of jackpot symbol. Specifically, when a jackpot (for example, 1 per 16R length, 2 per 16R length, 1 per 4R length (see FIG. 1-29-2)) that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot game is determined by prior determination. When the jackpot that shifts to the medium probability state (for example, 2 per 4R length (see FIG. 1-29-2)) is determined, and the jackpot that shifts to the low probability state (for example, 3 per 16R length (FIG. 1-29)). -2))) may be determined, and the emission color when the drum lamp portions a11 to a14 are caused to emit light may be different.

[Second embodiment]
A second embodiment will be described.
By the way, for example, in order to encourage participation by a player, for example, an effect of notifying or suggesting the determination result based on the operation of the operation means of the player, instead of simply notifying the determination result by the prior determination and performing the notice effect. May do.
Here, in the gaming machine, as the game progresses, special symbols are changed one after another, and the effects accompanying the stoppage are executed. In connection with this, in the control part which produces an effect, the process for display control of an image display apparatus is performed, for example, and the load of the process is also large. For this reason, an effective period for validating the operation of the operation means is set in advance, and an effect of notifying or suggesting the determination result is provided on the condition that the operation of the operation means is executed within the effective period. There is a case. On the other hand, in the case of such a configuration, there is also a request for appropriately informing the player of the timing when the operation of the operation means becomes effective.
However, for example, if the display mode of the effective period in the image display device is to be changed according to the effective period, in addition to the display control for the effect described above, a display control process for displaying the effective period is required. As a result, the load on the control unit that produces the effect is also increased.
Therefore, in the second embodiment, in the gaming machine that executes the notice effect based on the operation of the operation means, in order to appropriately suggest the operation timing of the operation means to the player while reducing the load on the control unit, The following configuration is adopted.

In other words, the gaming machine b100 according to the second embodiment is determined by determining means b200 (b234, b234) that determines whether or not to shift to a special gaming state advantageous to the player when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied. ) And determination result notifying means b300 for notifying the result of determination by the determination means b200 (b234, b234) in the image display part b114, and an operation having an operation part b161P and allowing the player to operate the operation part b161P A suggestion effect that suggests a result of determination by the determination means b200 (b234, b234) on condition that the operation of the operation unit b161P of the operation means b161 is performed during a predetermined effective period with the means b161 Instructing the operation of the operation unit b161 during a specific period including the execution unit b300 and the effective period Operation instruction display means b300 for displaying the instruction display on the image display unit b114, and notification means b161L provided in the operation means b161 for notifying that the effective period is in effect. This is a gaming machine.
Hereinafter, a specific description will be given with reference to the drawings having the drawing numbers including “FIG. 2” (hereinafter also referred to as FIG. 2). For the second embodiment, the drawing of the first embodiment (FIG. 1) may be referred to. In this case, the first digit “a” in FIG. It may be described as being replaced with “b”.

FIG. 2-2-2 is a diagram for explaining the effect button b161 in the second embodiment. The effect button b161 corresponds to the effect button a161 shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 2-2-2 (a), the effect button b161 of the present embodiment has an operation part b161P that is formed in a button shape and can be pressed by the player, and a button lamp b161L that emits light. doing. Light emission of the button lamp b161L is controlled by a lamp control unit b320 (corresponding to the lamp control unit a320 in FIGS. 1-3). The button lamp b161L can be turned on and off at a predetermined timing. In the present embodiment, when performing a prefetch notification effect described later, as shown in FIG. 2-2-2 (b), the light is turned on when the operation by the effect button b161 is valid. Also, as shown in FIG. 2-2-2 (b), it is configured to turn off when the operation of the effect button b161 becomes invalid. Then, the button lamp b161L notifies the player that it is a valid period during the valid period of the operation of the operation unit b161P of the effect button b161 in the prefetch notification effect.
Note that the pre-read notification effect and the notification of the effective period by the light emission of the button lamp b161L of the effect button b161 will be described in detail later.

[Advance notice based on prior judgment]
In the present embodiment of the second embodiment, a configuration for a notice effect based on the prior determination (holding prefetching) described in the first embodiment is provided, and control for that is performed (FIGS. 1-27 to 1). -31). Therefore, description or illustration of the same configuration and control may be omitted.

[Notification command acceptance processing]
FIG. 2-30 is a flowchart showing the contents of notification command reception processing by the effect control unit b300. This figure includes portions common to the prior determination command reception processing shown in FIG. 1-32 in the first embodiment, but the common portions are also described below for convenience of explanation.
After the processing at the time of reception of the above-described hold number increase command, the effect control unit b300 determines whether or not a notification command (or a prior determination command) extracted from the hold number increase command is stored in the RAM b303 (step S1). b3001). If it is determined that the notification command is stored (Yes in step b3001), the effect control unit b300 stores the storage area (first to fourth storage units b305a to b305d and the first to fourth storages) corresponding to the currently held ball in the RAMb303. In any of the parts b306a to b306d), the hold flag and the notification flag (or the predictor flag (see step a3202 of FIG. 1-32)) are turned ON. When a normal command is extracted from the hold count increase command instead of the notification command, only the hold flag is turned ON (step b3002). If the notification command is not stored (No in step b3001), the notification command reception process is terminated.

In addition to the control example in which the notification flag is always turned ON when the notification command is stored in the RAMb 303, various control examples can be considered. For example, when a notification command is stored in the RAMb 303, a lottery (notification lottery) is performed as to whether or not the notification flag is to be turned ON, and the result of the notification lottery is when the notification flag is turned ON (winning) This is a control example in which the notification flag is turned ON.
In this case, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or may be changed according to the gaming state. For example, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state, the winning probability is higher than when the gaming state is a low-probability gaming state. Set to.

  Next, the effect control unit b300 determines whether the notification flag is ON in any of the first to fourth storage units b305a to b305d and the first to fourth storage units b306a to b306d of the RAM b303 (step) b3003). When it is determined that the notification flag is ON in any of the storage units b305a to b305d and b306a to b306d (Yes in step b3003), the effect control unit b300 next has the variation time H greater than the predetermined value K. Whether or not (step b3004). If it is determined that the variation time H is greater than the predetermined value K (Yes in step b3004), a notification effect command (or a hold number predictor display command (step in FIG. 1-32) for performing a notice effect is performed. a3204) is set (step b3005), and the notification command receiving process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the notification flag is not ON in any of the first to fourth storage units b305a to b305d and the first to fourth storage units b306a to b306d (No in step b3003), the fluctuation time H is a predetermined value. When it is determined that it is equal to or less than K (No in step b3004), the effect control unit b300 performs a normal effect command (or hold number normal display command (step a3205 in FIG. 1-32) for performing a normal effect without notifying the prefetch result). (Refer to step b3006), and the notification command receiving process is terminated.

  These commands are for informing the player of the number of holds in the effect control process, and individual information for each hold ball (the hold ball according to either the first start port b121 or the second start port b122). Or the number of the holding ball at each starting port). The notification effect command also includes information indicating which of the first to fourth storage units b305a to b305d and the first to fourth storage units b306a to b306d has the notification flag turned on.

  More specifically, the fluctuation time H referred to here is a time when the special symbol fluctuates due to the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 1-9), and can also be referred to as a fluctuation time related to the fluctuation. Further, the predetermined value K is a value larger than the time (scale) necessary for performing the notice effect. For example, when the scale of the notice effect to be executed is 3 seconds, a value of 4 seconds may be adopted as the predetermined value K. This is because the notice effect cannot be performed during the symbol change unless the fluctuation time H is longer than the scale of the notice effect to be executed. Therefore, even when the notification flag is ON in any of the first to fourth storage units b305a to b305d and the first to fourth storage units b306a to b306d, the variation time H is equal to or less than the predetermined value K. Is not a notification effect command but a normal effect command is set (see steps b3003, b3004, b3006).

[Flag setting process when production is selected]
As described above, the effect control unit b300 that has received the hold number increase command sets a hold flag or the like based on the notification command or the normal command included in the received hold number increase command. Based on the hold flag or the like and information on the previous hold ball, a command (notification effect command or normal effect command) for notifying information on the hold ball in the effect is set.

  However, the storage areas b305 and b306 to which each reserved ball corresponds are switched every time the reserved ball is digested due to the change of the special symbol. For example, consider the first to fourth storage units b306a to b306d. In this case, when the first one of the reserved balls winning the second start opening b122 is digested, the second to fourth reserved balls are moved up to the first to third reserved balls. Therefore, the storage area b306 to which each reserved ball corresponds changes from three of the second to fourth storage units b306b to b306d to three of the first to third storage units b306a to b306c. Therefore, for example, when the number of holds is subtracted in the effect selection process (see FIG. 1-21) (see step a2103), as additional processing, the first to fourth storage units b305a to b305d and the first to fourth storage units The flags b306a to b306d are reset.

  Further, when the flag is reset, a command (notifying effect command or normal effect command) for notifying information about the holding ball in the effect is also reset. The command set processing procedure is the same as the procedure shown in steps b3003 to b3006 in FIG.

  Although not specifically shown, when the effect control unit b300 executes a routine process, a prior determination command and an effect execution command may be received simultaneously. In this case, a notification effect command or a normal effect command has already been set in step b3005 or step b3006 of the notification command reception process shown in FIG. On the other hand, at the time of selecting an effect, a notification effect command or a normal effect command is set based on the information after the holding ball and the storage areas b305 and b306 are switched separately from the notification command receiving process. Therefore, the command set at step b3005 or step b3006 is different from the command set at the time of effect selection.

Subsequently, the prefetch notification effect will be specifically described.
[Specific example of pre-reading notification effect]
Here, a specific example of the prefetch notification effect according to the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, information related to the holding ball is notified by the effect image displayed on the image display unit b114. The information to be notified includes presence / absence of a reserved ball, the number of held balls, and pre-read information (determination result of prior determination) regarding each held ball.
FIG. 2-31 is a diagram illustrating an example of a holding ball display displayed on the image display unit b114.
In the example shown in FIG. 2-31, the positions where the first holding ball object b51 to the fourth holding ball object b54 and the first holding ball object b51 to the fourth holding ball object b54 are displayed at the bottom of the screen of the image display unit b114. The first hold position display b61 to the fourth hold position display b64 are displayed. Further, a pedestal image b71 and a digested object b72 representing that the reserved ball is digested and the change is executed are displayed at the bottom of the screen of the image display unit b114.

The first holding ball object b51 to the fourth holding ball object b54 are images that display the holding balls generated by winning the first start opening b121. In the example shown in FIG. 2-31 (a), four hold balls, which are the maximum value of the number of holds in the first start port b121, are displayed. Basically, the first reserved ball object b51 to the fourth reserved ball object b54 are expressed using the same image. In this embodiment, an image that imitates “Gyoen” is used as a default shape.
In the present embodiment, since the maximum number of first start opening prizes held is 4, the upper limit of the number of lighting is set to 4, but other numbers may be considered. For example, in the case where not only the number of the first start opening winnings held but also the number of the second starting opening winnings is used, the number of the holding ball objects is set to an upper limit of eight. It is also conceivable that the upper limit of the number of reserved ball objects is a number other than 4 or 8.

  In the actual game, depending on the increase / decrease of the number of holds by adding the number of holds in the command reception process (see step a1902 in FIG. 1-19) and subtracting the number of holds in the effect selection process (see step a2103 in FIG. 1-21) Thus, the holding ball display displayed on the image display unit b114 changes. That is, the information on the presence / absence of the holding ball and the number of holdings is notified to the player by the holding ball display.

The first holding position display b61, which is a position for displaying the presence / absence of the first holding ball, the second holding position display b62, which is the position for displaying the presence / absence of the second holding ball, and the third A third holding position display 63, which is a position for displaying the presence / absence of the holding ball, and a fourth holding position display b64, which is a position for displaying the presence / absence of the fourth holding ball, are provided. In the present embodiment, the first holding position display b61 to the fourth holding position display b64 are provided side by side adjacent to the base image b71. And it arrange | positions in order of the 1st reservation position display b61-the 4th reservation position display b64 from the side near the base image b71 to the side far.
The first holding position display b61 displays the first holding ball object b51, the second holding position display b62 displays the second holding ball object b52, and the third holding position display 63 displays the third holding ball. The object b53 is displayed, and the fourth holding ball object b54 is displayed on the fourth holding position display b64.

  The digest object b72 is an image displayed on the upper side of the base image b71. The digest object b72 is an image having the same shape as the reserved ball objects (b51 to b54). Then, by using an expression such that the digest object b72 is placed on the pedestal represented by the pedestal image b71, it is displayed that the reservation ball is digested and the change is being performed.

  For example, when the number of holdings is added by command reception processing according to the winning at the first starting port b121 (see step a1902 in FIG. 1-19), the first holding ball object b51 is displayed, and the second holding ball object The information is displayed in the order of b52, third reserved ball object b53, and fourth reserved ball object b54.

Then, when the number of reservations is subtracted by the effect selection process according to the change of the special symbol (see step a2103 in FIG. 1-21), as shown in FIG. 2-31 (b), the fourth reservation ball object b54 is displayed. The digest object b72 is displayed on the pedestal image b71. As a result, the first reserved ball object b51 moves on the pedestal image b71, and the movement as if the second reserved sphere object b52 to the fourth reserved sphere object b54 moved to the pedestal image b71 side is expressed.
When a new hold occurs, the fourth hold ball object b54 is displayed on the fourth hold position display b64.
Here, the holding ball object display of the holding ball based on the winning at the first starting port b121 has been specifically described, but the same applies to the holding ball based on the winning at the second starting port b122.

FIG. 2-32 is a diagram for explaining the prefetch notification effect.
[Execution of pre-read notification effect]
In the pachinko gaming machine b100 to which the present embodiment is applied, a prefetch notification effect that is an effect of notifying the determination result of the prior determination of the present embodiment is executed. The prefetch notification effect is configured with two stages. That is, the display mode of the holding ball object is changed based on the “operation instruction effect” for instructing the player to operate the effect button b161 and the operation part b161P of the effect button b161 being actually operated. The “result suggesting effect” for informing the result of the prior determination is executed. Thus, in this embodiment, when the notification flag corresponding to the holding ball is ON, the determination result of the prior determination is not immediately notified as it is, but the determination is based on the operation of the effect button b161 by the player. The result notification is executed.

(Operation instruction production)
As shown in FIG. 2-32 (a), the operation instruction effect is obtained by displaying an operation instruction object b73 which is an image for instructing an operation of the effect button b161 (see FIG. 2-2-2) on the screen of the image display unit b114. indicate. Then, the image display unit b114 indicates that there is a reserved ball to be notified, and prompts the operation of the effect button b161 for executing the notification result effect on the reserved ball. In the present embodiment, the operation instruction object b73 is an image imitating the shape of the effect button b161. Then, the operation instruction object b73 is displayed so as to be superimposed on the corresponding holding object of the holding ball. In the example shown in FIG. 2-32 (a), the operation instruction object b73 is displayed so as to overlap the third holding ball object b53. The player can grasp that the prefetch notification effect can be executed with respect to the holding ball corresponding to the holding ball object.
In addition, in this embodiment, the button lamp b161L (see FIG. 2-2-2 (a)) of the effect button b161 is also lit as an operation instruction effect. Thereby, not only the image display unit b114 but also the effect button b161 at hand can prompt the player to operate the effect button b161.

[Result suggestion]
In the present embodiment, the operation instruction effect is executed, and when the effect button b161 is actually operated, the prefetch notification effect is executed and the determination result of the preliminary determination process is notified. Here, the pre-reading information of the holding ball is information obtained by the pre-determination process (see steps a605 and a611 in FIG. 1-6). Specifically, the winning type (big hit, small hit, off), If it is a big win, the type of the big hit (for example, per high probability length, per medium probability length, low probability short hit, etc.), whether the content of the production is a production with reach or a production without reach This is information to show. However, when changing the mode of the first reserved ball object b51 to the fourth reserved ball object b54, the determination result is suggested using not only the information indicating the determination result as it is but also an ambiguous expression or a metaphorical expression. Information that causes the player to guess the determination result may be output.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 2-32 (b), when it is determined that the winning type is a big hit by prior determination, a default image is displayed on the third reserved ball object b53 based on the operation of the effect button b161. Gives a different white glowing effect. In this way, for example, by changing the display mode of the first reserved ball object b51 to the fourth reserved ball object b54 from the default shape depending on the type of hit, the player has a sense of expectation. Yes. In addition to the effect of changing the default shape, it may be possible to make the display mode recognizable at a glance by the player, such as different default colors and sizes.

  In addition, based on the result of prior determination, according to the kind of jackpot symbol, you may vary the aspect which displays the determination result with the reservation object. Specifically, when a jackpot (for example, 1 per 16R length, 2 per 16R length, 1 per 4R length (see FIG. 1-29-2)) that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot game is determined by prior determination. When the jackpot that shifts to the medium probability state (for example, 2 per 4R length (see FIG. 1-29-2)) is determined, and the jackpot that shifts to the low probability state (for example, 3 per 16R length (FIG. 1-29)). -2)) may be different from the case where the determination result is displayed on the hold object.

Instead of notifying the final determination result by one operation of the effect button b161, the determination result may be notified based on a plurality of operations of the effect button b161. In this case, it is configured to change the mode stepwise in accordance with the number of operations toward the final display mode of the holding ball object. As a result, the player can be encouraged to participate more actively, and the player can have a higher sense of expectation and further enhance interest.
Further, information that is completely unrelated to the determination result of the prior determination (in other words, gas information) may be output. As described above, by providing information other than the information indicating the determination result of the prior determination as it is, the player guesses the determination result as compared with the case where only the information indicating the determination result is provided as it is. Can be expected to increase interest.

  As shown in FIG. 2-32 (c), after the operation instruction effect is executed, if the operation with the effect button b161 is not performed before the reserved ball is digested, the reserved ball to be notified. The operation instruction object b73 continues to be displayed so as to overlap the holding ball object corresponding to. For example, in the state illustrated in FIG. 2-32 (a), the notification target is initially set as the third reserved ball, and the operation instruction object b73 is displayed over the third reserved ball object b53. Then, if the production button b161 is not operated, the hold is advanced by digesting the hold, and as shown in FIG. 2-32 (c), the notification hold ball is the second hold ball object b52. Is displayed, the operation instruction object b73 is displayed so as to overlap the second holding ball object b52.

  Thereafter, there is a case where the player does not operate the effect button b161 until the reserved ball to be notified is digested. In this case, when the reserved ball to be notified is digested, and when the digest object b72 is displayed on the pedestal image b71, the digest object b72 image is not in the default form but as described above. The display mode is changed by applying a light effect. As a result, a player who has not operated the effect button b161 this time can operate the effect button b161 to change the display mode of the reserved ball object and know the presence of the pre-read notification effect.

[Valid period of result suggestion operation]
Subsequently, the setting of the effective period in the result suggesting effect and the display (informing) of the effective period will be described.
FIG. 2-33 is a timing chart for explaining operation instruction display and notification related to the effective period.
Note that in the example of FIG. 2-33, there is two reserved balls in one change that is changing (the change), and the notification flag is set to ON in the second held ball. ing. That is, the second reserved ball is the target of the prefetch notification effect. And the operation instruction display of the effective period and notification of the effective period related to the pre-read notification effect of the reserved ball will be described.

First, the effective period of operation will be described with reference to FIGS. 2-33 (a) and (b).
In this embodiment, in order to execute the result suggesting effect, an effective period during which the operation using the effect button b161 is possible is determined. For example, the effective period is set to a part of the period during one fluctuation as shown in FIG. 2-33 (a). On the other hand, the operation using the effect button b161 for executing the result suggesting effect is invalidated immediately before the end of one change or until the start of the next change after the end of one change.

Specifically, until the end of one change (the change stops), as described with reference to FIG. When the process during the end of the variation effect is executed, the effect control unit b300 analyzes the change stop command (step a2201 in FIG. 1-22) and sets the change effect end command (step a2209 in FIG. 1-22). Process. Therefore, the burden of various processes in the effect control unit b300 increases until the change actually stops.
In addition, during the period from the end of one change to the start of the next change, the effect selection process is executed as described with reference to FIG. When this effect selection process is executed, the effect control unit b300 analyzes the change start command and performs a process for setting the change effect start command (step a2105 in FIG. 1-21). Therefore, until the next change is actually started, a burden for various processes in the effect control unit b300 is large.

And also regarding the pre-read notification effect described above, a certain processing burden is required to draw the result suggesting effect in the pre-read notification effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2-33 (b), in the process for executing the variation effect in the effect control unit b300, as described above, the pre-read notification effect in the period when the processing load is particularly large. In order not to execute the result suggesting effect, an invalid period is provided in a certain period during one fluctuation time.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 2-33 (b), during the one variation time (or during the next variation time), except for the period during which the variation effect end process is executed, The operation by the effect button b161 is validated. That is, an effective period in which an operation by the effect button b161 is effective only in a predetermined period of a specific period in which one change is performed is set.

In the present embodiment, regarding the operation instruction for executing the operation effect for the player, different instruction modes are performed in the image display unit b114 and the effect button b161.
First, in the operation instruction performed by displaying the operation instruction object b73 on the image display unit b114, as long as the holding ball object is displayed, the operation instruction object b73 is continuously displayed together with the holding ball object. That is, display is performed on the image display unit b114 regardless of the valid / invalid period. In the present embodiment, the hold ball object corresponding to the notification target hold ball is displayed with the change as a break. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 2-33 (c), the operation instruction object b73 is displayed corresponding to the period during the variable display operation (while the variable display for one winning is being performed). That is, since the reservation ball object is updated in units of the fluctuation display for one winning, the display period of the operation instruction object b73 is set corresponding to a series of the fluctuation periods.

For example, as shown in FIG. 2-33 (a), there is a certain period between the fluctuation period of one fluctuation and the fluctuation period of another fluctuation. When the player does not operate the effect button b161 and one change and another change are executed in order, the operation instruction object b73 is not displayed during the certain period. However, in practice, this certain period is very small, and it appears to the player that the operation instruction object b73 is continuously displayed across one change and another change.
Further, in the present embodiment, the operation instruction object b73 is displayed so as to overlap the holding ball object corresponding to the notification target holding ball. Here, for example, an aspect may be employed in which an object for instructing an operation is displayed separately from the holding ball object. In this case, it is not always necessary to display the operation instruction object b73 in association with the update of the display of the holding ball object of the holding ball to be notified. Therefore, for example, the operation instruction object b73 can be continuously displayed over one fluctuation period or another fluctuation period until the operation of the effect button b161 is performed.

On the other hand, in the effect button b161, as shown in FIG. 2-33 (d), the button lamp b161L is turned on in accordance with the operation effective period, and the effective period is notified during the operation effective period. That is, the button lamp b161L of the effect button b161 is turned on in accordance with the set valid period of the operation, and the button lamp b161L of the effect button b161 is turned off in accordance with the invalid period of the operation.
Since the lighting process of the button lamp b161L is performed separately from the process for displaying the change display and the holding ball, the processing load in the effect control unit b300 is suppressed. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the operation instruction in accordance with the effective period of operation is configured to be performed by the button lamp b161L of the effect button b161.

In particular, the player pays attention to the image display unit b114 on which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. For this reason, it is preferable to display the operation instruction object b73 (see FIG. 2-32 (a)) on the image display unit b114 that the prefetch notification effect is executed and the prefetch result can be known. Further, by keeping the display mode of the operation instruction display on the image display unit b114 of the effect button b161 being displayed without being changed, it is possible to suppress an increase in the drawing processing load in the effect control unit b300.
On the other hand, in the button lamp b161L having a relatively small processing load, the player can execute the operation of the effect button b161 at an appropriate timing by accurately displaying the effective period.

  Note that, for example, when there are many opportunities to enter the second starting port b122 (corresponding to the second starting port a122 in FIG. 1-1) in a short-time state or the like, a process for holding balls or a process for displaying a change is performed. As a result, the display control process in the image display unit b114 is crowded. In such a gaming state, in particular, by applying the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to appropriately notify the operation timing while suppressing the load on the effect control unit b300.

In this embodiment, in order to notify the effective period, the lamp is turned on when the operation is valid, and the lamp is turned off when the operation is invalid. However, the present invention is not limited to this notification mode.
For example, a speaker may be provided for the effect button b161 to output a sound that can be recognized as an effective period during the operation effective period, or a fan may be provided for the effect button b161 to be an effective period during the operation effective period. You may blow air so that it can be grasped.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, although the production | presentation which suggests the result of the determination of the result of prior determination (prefetching) is performed in association with the holding ball display, the present invention is not limited to this. You may perform the production | presentation which suggests the result of prior determination in relation to aspects other than a holding ball display. Even in this case, when the player is instructed to operate the operating means in order to display the result of the prior determination, the operation of the effect button b161 during a specific period including the valid period set on the screen of the image display unit b114. An operation instruction image for instructing is displayed. On the other hand, the effect button b161 may be configured to notify that the effective period is in effect.

Moreover, the following effects can be illustrated as another example of the effect which suggests the result of the determination of the result of prior determination (prefetching).
For example, an effect that displays the result of the determination is executed on condition that the effect button b161 is continuously operated for a certain period of time, such as when the effect button b161 is repeatedly hit or long pressed.
At this time, the display of the operation instruction display of the effect button b161 displayed on the image display unit b114 is rounded up early for the effective period of the operation. Then, at the end of the effective period, the player feels as if the effective period has ended, even though it is actually a period during which an operation can be accepted. Here, after the display of the operation instruction display in the image display unit b114 is finished, the determination result is notified when the player continues to operate the effect button b161 and satisfies the operation for a certain period as a condition. Thereby, it is possible to improve the mood of the player who has operated the effect button b161 without giving up.

  And in said production | presentation, notification of operation in production button b161 (lighting of button lamp b161L) is made to correspond with the effective period of predetermined operation. By configuring in this way, the player who thinks that the effective period has expired due to the screen display of the image display unit b114 is made aware of the lighting state of the button lamp b161L in the effect button b161, so that the operation of the effect button b161 is performed. You can create a chance to continue. And as a result, a determination result is alert | reported as mentioned above, and it can make a player feel good.

[Third embodiment]
A third embodiment will be described.
By the way, in the conventional gaming machine, various information is presented to the player by displaying the image on the image display device, but this kind of image is an effect performed as the gaming state and the progress of the game progress. It was what was displayed. Therefore, it is displayed on the image display device only in a predetermined scene where information is presented. Moreover, since the image for such an effect is used in an effect controlled as the game progresses, the displayed scene is limited.
Here, if a specific image is continuously displayed on the image display device separately from the gaming state and the progress of the game, the player plays a game on the gaming machine regardless of the gaming state or the contents of the production. It can be expected to increase the player's mood and make them interested in the game. Further, if the display mode of the specific image is changed in accordance with the specific game control or production, the specific game display state or production is suggested to the player by the display mode of the specific image. be able to. Therefore, the player's interest in the specific image can be further enhanced.
Therefore, the third embodiment adopts the following configuration in order to enhance the interest of the player by displaying a specific image on the image display device separately from the effects performed in accordance with the progress of the game. .

That is, the gaming machine according to the third embodiment is
Game control means c200 for obtaining game information in response to establishment of the start condition and performing game control based on the game information;
Effect control means c300 for controlling execution of a game effect according to the progress of the game based on information related to game control from the game control means c200;
Image display means c114 for displaying an effect image;
Image control means c310 for controlling the display of the effect image by the image display means c114, based on the effect control by the effect control means c300,
The image control means c310 is
A special effect different from the game effect can be executed on a part of the display screen of the image display means c114.
When the specific control predetermined by the game control unit c200 is performed by the game control unit c200, or when the production by the production control unit c300 based on the specific control is executed, Perform the first production,
When the specific control is not performed, the second effect as the special effect is executed regardless of the control of the game state by the game control unit c200 and the control of the effect by the effect control unit c300.
It is characterized by.
Hereinafter, a specific description will be given with reference to the drawings having the drawing numbers including “FIG. For the third embodiment, the drawing of the first embodiment (FIG. 1) may be referred to. In that case, the first digit “a” in FIG. c ”may be described as being replaced.

[Special production using image display section]
Next, a special effect performed in the present embodiment in the third embodiment will be described.
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine c100, the game control unit c200 (based on the game information obtained by winning a game ball at the start openings c121, 122 (corresponding to the start openings a121, a122 in FIG. 1-1). (Corresponding to the game control unit a200 in FIG. 1-3) is performed, and the production control by the production control unit c300 (corresponding to the production control unit a300 in FIG. 1-3) according to the progress of the game based on this game control. Execution is controlled. In the present embodiment, an image display on the image display unit c114 (corresponding to the image display unit a114 in FIG. 1-1 or FIG. 1-3) is provided separately from the effect according to the progress of the game (game effect). Special production by

FIG. 3-27 is a diagram for explaining special effects in the third embodiment.
FIG. 3-27 shows a state in which a decorative symbol variation display as a game effect is performed, and an image display unit c114 on which a special effect according to the present embodiment is displayed. The decorative symbol shown in FIG. 3-27 is composed of three symbols. Numbers are written on each symbol constituting the decorative symbol. In the decorative symbol variation display, each symbol is cyclically forwarded from the top to the bottom, for example, and the display is scrolled on the display screen of the image display unit c114. In addition, the decorative symbol is stopped when the variable symbol display on the first special symbol indicator c221 or the second special symbol indicator c222 is stopped. The lottery result of the special symbol lottery is shown. Although not particularly shown, usually, a game effect is displayed on the image display unit c114 for displaying various background images together with the decorative design.

  As shown in FIG. 3-27, the special effect according to the present embodiment is performed by displaying a specific image c114a in a partial area (upper right in the illustrated example) of the display screen of the image display unit c114. . This specific image is displayed in front of the player as compared to the background image in the game effect. In the illustrated example, a moving image of a specific person (character) is displayed as the specific image c114a. In principle, the image c114a is displayed on the image display unit c114 continuously continuously regardless of the progress of the game. Then, the character displayed in the image c114a performs various actions (actions) or emits words.

  In the special effect of the present embodiment, the first effect whose execution condition is that a predetermined specific control is performed by the game control unit c200 or the effect control unit c300 and the specific control are not performed. Sometimes, it can be classified into a second effect that is appropriately and spontaneously executed, and a third effect that is regularly executed when neither the first effect nor the second effect is executed. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first effect is classified into a plurality of categories (sections) based on the execution conditions. In these special effects, in the image c114a, the displayed character performs an action set in advance for each category specified according to the established execution condition, and generates a speech.

FIG. 3-28 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the special effect.
In the example shown in the figure, there are three categories of “first notice”, “big hit”, “big hit”, “revival big hit”, “single shot” as the second effect, and “standby” as the third effect. For each of the categories, actions, lines, and execution conditions are described. Each category illustrates a combination of a plurality of actions and lines.

  In the special effect shown in FIG. 3-28, the effect of the “Intense heat notice” category of the first effect is executed on the condition that a specific lottery result such as a jackpot is won with a predetermined reliability in the special symbol lottery. The The production of the “big hit” category of the first production is executed under the execution condition that a big win other than the revival jackpot described later is won in the special symbol lottery. The effect of the “revival jackpot” category of the first effect is executed on the condition that the winning of the revival jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery. Here, the rebirth jackpot refers to a change in the decorative symbol that is temporarily changed (temporarily stopped (in this document, “pseudo” may be referred to as “pseudo”)) and then changed again. Then, it is a big hit where a game effect is performed so as to stop and notify the lottery result. In addition, it is specified based on the fluctuation pattern of a special symbol whether it is won as a revival jackpot or other jackpots.

  In addition, the “single-shot” category effect of the second effect is executed on the condition that a specific variation pattern is selected in the variation of the special symbol. In addition, the “single” category effects are associated with an executable variation pattern for each effect. Then, based on the variation pattern selected in the variation of the special symbol, the effect of the “single shot” category to be executed is determined.

  In addition, the “standby” category effect of the third effect is regularly executed when neither the first effect nor the second effect is performed. That is, in the special effect, the third effect is normally continuously executed, and when either execution condition of the first effect or the second effect is satisfied, the special effect corresponding to the execution condition is executed.

  As described above, in the special effects of the present embodiment, the first effect and the second effect are information such as jackpot symbols and change patterns included in the change start command sent from the game control unit c200 to the effect control unit c300. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the execution condition is satisfied. Therefore, the special effect to be executed is determined at the timing when the effect control unit c300 acquires the change start command.

  Moreover, in this Embodiment, the timing with which each production included in the 1st production and the 2nd production is performed is defined beforehand. For example, as shown in FIG. 3-28, the first effect “Restoration jackpot” category effect is executed at the timing of temporary stop at a symbol whose decoration symbol is out of place. On the other hand, although not shown in particular, the production of the “big hit” category is executed at the timing when the design of the decorative symbol stops and the design is fixed, and the production of the “super hot notice” category is performed during the variation of the decorative design. It is executed at a preset timing. In addition, the timing for executing each effect of the second effect is specified. Therefore, if the execution timing is different, it does not prevent a plurality of effects in the first effect or the second effect from being executed together. However, when the execution timings of the first effect and the second effect overlap, the first effect is preferentially executed in the present embodiment.

  In addition, although the example of the special effect shown in FIGS. 3-27 and 3-28 was comprised by the combination of the action of the character by the moving image displayed on the image c114a and the speech by speech as described above, It may be possible to switch between output and non-output by setting. With respect to the speech, a speech balloon can be displayed on the image c114a to produce a visual presentation regardless of whether or not audio output is performed or whether audio output is performed.

[Control of special effects]
As described above, the special effect of the present embodiment is executed by the image / sound control unit c310 based on the control of the effect control unit c300 that has received the change start command transmitted from the game control unit c200. As an example of the special effect control method of the present embodiment, a special effect executed by the effect control unit c300 is selected, and whether or not the image / sound control unit c310 executes the special effect selected by the effect control unit c300. A method for determining the value can be considered.

FIG. 3-29 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example of the effect control unit c300 in the special effect control method.
In the example shown in FIG. 3-29, when the effect control unit c300 acquires the change start command from the game control unit c200 (step c2901), first, the effect of the “standby” category that is the third effect (hereinafter referred to as standby effect). Is determined to be changed (step c2902). The standby effect is constantly executed regardless of the type of jackpot or the variation pattern, but the type of standby effect to be executed is changed based on a predetermined condition. For example, when the special symbol is changed a predetermined number of times, it is possible to set a condition such as changing the standby effect being executed to another standby effect.

When it is determined that the standby effect is to be changed (Yes in step c2902), the effect control unit c300 selects the standby effect to be executed next (step c2903). The selection of the standby effect to be executed next can be performed based on, for example, a predetermined switching rule. It is also possible to acquire a random number value of a standby effect random number as an effect random number acquired at the time of receiving a change start command, and to select a standby effect based on the acquired random number value.
On the other hand, when it is determined not to change the standby effect (No in step c2902), the effect control unit c300 selects the standby effect currently being executed as the standby effect to be executed next (step c2904). Thereby, the current state is maintained in the standby effect which is the third effect.

  Next, the effect control unit c300 selects the first effect (step c2905). In the present embodiment, the first effect is always selected one by one for each category in this operation accompanying the reception of the change start command. Therefore, here, effects to be executed are selected for the first effects of the three categories described with reference to FIG. The selection of the first effect is, for example, an effect random number for each category as an effect random number acquired when the change start command is received (an effect random number for the “Intense Hot Notice” category, an effect random number for the “big hit” category, It is also possible to acquire a random value of a “big hit” category effect random number) and select each first effect based on the acquired random value.

  Next, the effect control unit c300 confirms the variation pattern based on the variation start command acquired in step c2901 (step c2906). Then, the effect control unit c300 selects one effect of the “single” category, which is the second effect corresponding to the confirmed variation pattern (that is, can be implemented with the variation pattern) (step c2907). When there are a plurality of second effects corresponding to the confirmed variation pattern, for example, a random number value for the effect of the “single” category is obtained as an effect random number acquired when the change start command is received and acquired. It is also possible to select the second effect based on the random number value. If there is no second effect corresponding to the confirmed variation pattern, the second effect is not selected in step c2907.

  Information on each of the first effects (three in the present embodiment), second effect, and third effect (standby effects) selected as described above is the command transmission process shown in FIG. 1-18 (b). In step a1813, the image / sound control unit c310 is transmitted.

FIG. 3-30 is a flowchart illustrating an operation example of the image / sound control unit c310 that has acquired the information on the special effect from the effect control unit c300.
Referring to FIG. 3-30, when image / sound control unit c310 confirms the reception of the command including information on the special effect from effect control unit c300 (step c3001), the image / sound control unit c310 determines the content of the standby effect based on the received command. Confirm (step c3002). Here, if an effect different from the currently active standby effect is selected, the standby effect is switched, and if the same effect as the currently active standby effect is selected, the active standby effect is maintained. It becomes. Thereafter, the image / sound control unit c310 sets the image data in the RAMc 313 in order to display the selected standby effect image on the image display unit c114 as the image c114a shown in FIG. 3-27 (step c3003). .

  Next, the image / sound control unit c310 determines whether or not each first effect can be executed (step c3004). Specifically, based on the lottery result and the variation pattern of the special symbol lottery, it is determined whether or not the “superheated notice” category effect specified by the command received from the effect control unit c300 can be executed. Also, based on whether the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot other than the revival jackpot, it is determined whether or not the “big hit” category effect can be executed. In addition, based on whether the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a revival jackpot, it is determined whether or not the production of the “revival jackpot” category can be performed. If there is an executable first effect, the image data is set in the RAM c 313 in order to display the image of the first effect on the image display unit c114 as the image c114a shown in FIG. c3005).

  Next, the image / sound control unit c310 determines whether or not the second effect can be executed (step c3006). Since the second effect is selected based on the variation pattern, it can be always executed in principle. However, if any of the first effects can be executed and the execution timing of the first effect overlaps with the execution timing of the second effect, the first effect is preferentially executed. The production cannot be executed. Therefore, here, it is determined whether or not the second effect can be executed based on the execution timing of the first effect and the execution timing of the second effect that can be executed. In step c2907 of FIG. 3-29, depending on the variation pattern, the second effect may not be selected, and there may be no executable second effect. If the second effect can be executed, the image / sound control unit c310 displays the image of the second effect on the image display unit c114 as the image c114a illustrated in FIG. Is set in the RAMc 313 (step c3007).

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, a special effect using the image display unit c114 is continuously executed separately from a game effect based on a game ball winning or the like under the control of the effect control unit c300. . Thereby, without being related to the progress of the game, it is possible to continuously raise the player's mood and to have an interest in the game. In addition, when specific game control is performed, such as winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery, information related to the game can be presented to the player by the first effect, thereby further enhancing the interest of the player Can do.

  In the above embodiment, in the operation example described with reference to FIGS. 3-29 and 3-30, the standby effect to be executed every time the change start command is received is selected (see step c2903). ). However, when the order of switching the standby effect is set in the image / sound control unit c310, only whether or not to switch the standby effect is determined, and a command to that effect is sent from the effect control unit c300 to the image / sound. You may make it send to the control part c310.

  In the above operation example, a special effect executed by the effect control unit c300 is selected, and the image / sound control unit c310 determines whether or not the selected special effect can be executed. Was executed. On the other hand, only the special effect category that can be executed in the effect control unit c300 may be determined, and the image / sound control unit c310 may select the effect to be executed. In this case, the production control unit c300 determines whether or not the “super hot notice” category in the first production can be executed based on the lottery result and the variation pattern of the special symbol lottery, It is determined whether or not either can be executed. Then, information on the category of the first effect determined to be executable, and information on the “single” category that is the second effect and the “standby” category that is the third effect that can be executed regardless of the gaming state, The image / sound control unit c310 is notified by a command. Then, the image / sound control unit c310 selects and executes effects in the corresponding category one by one based on the acquired category information.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the image c114a resulting from the special effect is continuously displayed on the image display unit c114. However, when the special effect is executed by the effect control unit c300, the image c114a is not displayed. It is also possible to control so as not to execute the special effect. In the above embodiment, a specific character is displayed on the image c114a, and the special effect is performed by the action and dialogue of the character. However, the specific aspect of the special effect is limited to the above embodiment. Not. Various aspects can be adopted as long as the effect is executed as an effect different from the game effect based on the winning of a game ball or the like.

  It should be noted that the special effects may be further varied based on the type of jackpot symbol. For example, after a jackpot game, a jackpot (for example, 1 per 16R length, 2 per 16R length, 1 per 4R length (see FIG. 1-17-2)) is determined after transition to a high probability state. A jackpot that shifts to a probability state (eg, 2 per 4R length (see FIG. 1-17-2)) is determined, and a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state (eg, 3 per 16R length (see FIG. 1-17-2) The action and dialogue of a specific character may be different depending on the case where)) is determined.

Furthermore, although the example in which the special effect (first effect) to be executed according to the type of jackpot is selected is shown in the above embodiment, the special effect to be selected and executed according to the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine c100. It is also possible to prepare. In this case, for example, a special effect that can be executed according to the current gaming state (high probability state, medium probability state, or low probability state) recognized based on the previously acquired change start command is selected. Then, the selected special effect is executed at an appropriate timing determined in advance, such as the second effect performed in a single shot. Thereby, the present game state can be suggested by the special effect of this embodiment.
In the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 1-17-2, when winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery, after the jackpot game, transition to either a high probability state or a medium probability state, When the special symbol lottery is performed 80 times, the state shifts to a low probability state. Also, depending on the type of jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot game may change according to the number of executions of the special symbol lottery. In the example shown in Fig. 1-17-2, if 2 wins per 4R length or 2 per 4R short wins, the gaming state after the big hit game is a high probability state until the first 40 times of the special symbol lottery 80 times In the latter half 40 times, the medium probability state is obtained. Therefore, it is possible to increase the concentration of the player on the game by suggesting the game state in the special effect of this embodiment. Note that the suggestion of the gaming state by the special effect may be performed by setting an appropriate reliability (including false information with an appropriate probability).

[Fourth embodiment]
A fourth embodiment will be described.
Here, during the jackpot game, you can win a lot of prize balls, and you can expect the player's mood to rise and maintain and recover the concentration of the game, but depending on the performance performed during the jackpot, On the contrary, the player's concentration may be reduced.
Therefore, the fourth embodiment employs the following configuration in order to make it possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play with the effects performed during the jackpot game.

That is, in the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, the game control unit d200 performs a jackpot game that opens and closes the big prize opening d125 according to the result of the determination performed in response to the winning, and produces an effect accompanying the jackpot game. A gaming machine d100 performed by the control unit d300, wherein the gaming control unit d200 is configured to continuously open a ball that facilitates entry into the big winning opening d125 when the result of the determination is a first jackpot game. The first opening operation control means d201 for performing a continuous short opening operation that makes it difficult to enter the big prize opening d125 at the time of opening following the operation, and the result of the determination is different from that of the first jackpot game. A second jackpot game, the second opening operation control means d201 that performs the continuous long opening operation and does not perform the continuous short opening operation, the production control unit d300, When an end display effect performed when the winning game is ended in the first jackpot game, an end display effect control means d301 for performing the end display effect during the continuous short opening operation is provided. To do.
Hereinafter, a specific description will be given with reference to FIG. For the fourth embodiment, the drawing of the first embodiment (FIG. 1) may be referred to. In this case, the first digit “a” in FIG. d ”may be described as being replaced.

[Opening action during jackpot game]
Next, in the fourth embodiment, the special prize opening d125 (in FIG. 1-1) performed by the special prize opening operation control part d238 (corresponding to the special prize opening operation control part a238 in FIG. 1-4) of the game control unit d200. The control of the first big prize opening a125A) will be described.
FIG. 4-27 is a diagram for explaining the opening control of the big winning opening d125 during the big hit game in the fourth embodiment.
As shown in the figure, the control contents of the big prize opening d125 at the time of the jackpot game include an opening (OP) at the start of motion control and an ending (ED) at the end of motion control, and these opening and ending Including a predetermined number of consecutive (n) releases. Such continuous opening is performed across an interval (IN).
More specifically, when the special prize opening operation control unit d238 starts the operation control of the special prize opening d125, the special prize opening operation control unit d238 first performs an opening operation during the opening time. Then, the special prize opening operation control unit d238 sets the first open state at the special prize opening d125, and closes the special prize opening d125 after the opening time (R1). Subsequently, after the elapse of the interval time, the special prize opening operation control unit d238 sets the second open state at the special prize opening d125, and closes the special prize opening d125 after the opening time (R2). After such opening / closing of the special prize opening d125 is performed a predetermined number of times (Rn), the special prize opening operation control unit d238 performs an ending operation only during the ending time to control the operation of the special prize opening d125. Exit.
The period (ending) from the end of the continuous opening of the big winning opening d125 to the end of the jackpot game can be called the end of the jackpot game.

[First Embodiment]
Next, the relationship between the jackpot game control and the jackpot game effect control according to the first embodiment will be described.
FIG. 4-28 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between jackpot game control and jackpot game effect control according to the first embodiment, (a) shows a first mode of effect control, b) shows the 2nd mode of production control. In addition, in FIG. 4-28 explaining a 4th form example, long win (refer FIG. 1-20) is shown as the specific symbol A. Further, the short hit after short hit is shown as a specific symbol B. In addition, although the specific symbol A and the specific symbol B are hits with a short time, the specific symbol A and the specific symbol B can also be a hits without a short time.
As shown in (a) or (b) of FIG. 4-28, when the jackpot symbol is the specific symbol A, the CPU d201 of the game control unit d200 (corresponding to the CPUa201 of FIG. 1-3) A long release operation of 29.5 seconds per round is continuously performed for 16 rounds (long release 16R), and finally, a series of jackpot games are completed through an ending operation (ED16).
When the jackpot symbol is the specific symbol B, after the opening operation, the CPU d201 continuously performs the long release operation of 29.5 seconds per round for 4 rounds (long release 4R), and then continues to 0 per round. .Sequential 12 rounds of short-release operation for 1 second are performed (short-release 12R), and finally a series of jackpot games are completed through an ending operation (ED4).
Such a continuous long opening operation is an operation that makes it easy to enter the big winning opening d125, and a continuous short opening operation is an operation that makes it difficult to enter the large winning opening d125.

When the jackpot symbol is the specific symbol A, the CPU d301 of the effect control unit d300 (corresponding to the CPUa301 in FIGS. 1-3) starts the jackpot effect with the start of the jackpot game. When the 16-round long release is completed and the CPUd 201 moves to an ending operation (ED16), the CPU d301 executes an end display effect. The term “end display effect” here refers to an effect that is performed when the jackpot game ends. Details will be described later.
More specifically, the start timing of the end display effect in the case of the specific symbol A is when the operation of the 16 round long release (long release 16R) is completed or when the ending operation (ED16) starts, and the end display effect is displayed. The end timing of is the end time of the ending operation (ED16).

  When the jackpot symbol is the specific symbol B, the CPU d301 performs effect control so that the end display effect is performed during the operation of the short opening 12R. That is, the end display effect in the case of the specific symbol B is not started when the ending operation (ED4) as in the case of the specific symbol A is started, but at an earlier time.

More specifically, the end display effect needs to end at the end of the ending operation (ED4), and is executed by the CPU d301 during the operation of the short opening 12R so as to satisfy the condition.
More specifically, in the first mode shown in (a) of FIG. 4-28, this is performed with the start of the short opening 12R, and in the second mode shown in (b) of FIG. This is done at a predetermined time after the start of 12R.

That is, in (a) of FIG. 4-28, in the case of the specific symbol B, when the content of the end display effect in the case of the specific symbol A is started together with the start of the short opening 12R, it ends at the end of the ending operation (ED4). So-called scale adjustment is performed for the time of the ending operation (ED4) so that the display effect ends. The effect time T4a for the specific symbol B is the same as the effect time T16a for the end display effect of the specific symbol A.
Also, in (b) of the figure, the end display effect executed in the case of the specific symbol B is a predetermined time during the short opening 12R so that the end display effect ends in accordance with the end of the ending operation (ED4). Control to start is performed. The effect time T4b in the case of the specific symbol B is the same as the effect time T16b in the end display effect of the specific symbol A.

Thus, in the case of the specific symbol B, the reason for performing the end display effect at a timing different from that of the specific symbol A is as follows. That is, when the jackpot symbol is the specific symbol B, the number of winning balls that can be acquired is smaller than that in the specific symbol A. That is, in the case of the specific symbol B, although the long release operation is performed for 4 rounds, the prize ball can be easily acquired, but even if the short release operation is subsequently performed for 12 rounds, the prize ball is acquired. Is difficult. Therefore, it is assumed that a player who wants to acquire more prize balls with fewer shot balls will stop the launch of the game ball during the 12-round short opening operation (stop shot). If such a stop-attack is performed, the greater the number of jackpot symbols of the specific symbol B, the lower the operating rate of the pachinko gaming machine d100, which may lead to an unfavorable situation as a hall store.
Further, from the viewpoint of the player, after a game ball is fired during the long opening operation (long opening 4R) to obtain a prize ball, it is stopped when the short opening operation (short opening 12R), and a longer ending operation is performed. At the time of (ED4), the end display effect that is information irrelevant to the gaming state is continuously viewed. For this reason, there is a possibility that the player's concentration on the game that has been maintained until then will be cut off.

  Therefore, in order to deal with such an inconvenient situation, the time of the ending operation (ED4) (ending time) is shortened by raising the start time of the end display effect in the jackpot game when the jackpot symbol is the specific symbol B. That is, the game control and the effect control are performed so that the period from the end of the long release operation (long release 4R) to the end of the jackpot game is shortened. This prevents a decrease in the operation rate and maintains the concentration of the player.

Next, an image displayed in the end display effect will be described.
FIGS. 4-29 is a figure which shows the example of an image displayed on the image display part d114 by an end display effect, (a) shows the example of an image displayed initially, (b) is (a). Next, an example of an image to be displayed is shown. In addition, the modification which reverses the display order of (a) and (b) of FIGS. 4-29 is also considered.
This end display effect is performed in the image display unit d114 (corresponding to the image display unit a114 in FIG. 1-1 or FIG. 1-3) at the end of the jackpot game. For example, the probability change continues after the jackpot. This includes an effect of displaying the word “continue” to notify the user, an effect of displaying an image of a company logo indicating the company that manufactured the pachinko gaming machine d100 (equivalent to the pachinko gaming machine a100 in FIG. 1-1), and the like. .

  In the end display effect, it is conceivable to adopt a mode that suggests a gaming state. For example, in the case of a probability change (high probability game state or medium probability game state), it is a suggestion effect in which the characters “continue” are displayed in a different color, size, or the like than in the normal case (low probability game state).

In addition, the end display effect may include an effect (attention effect) that displays an image that alerts the user so as not to forget to take the prepaid card. More specifically, the display timing for performing the alerting effect is at the end of the jackpot, but the alerting effect must not necessarily be performed at the end of every jackpot. For example, in the case of the big hit at the first time and the latent time, there is a presentation control that displays when the big hit ends with a ball. In addition, it is conceivable that the presentation control is not performed in the case of big hits with certainty / short time.
The content of the end display effect when the jackpot symbol is the specific symbol B is the same as the content of the end display effect when the jackpot symbol is the specific symbol A.

In the end display effect in the present embodiment, under the control of the CPU d301, first, as shown in FIG. 4-29 (a), the “continuation” character d11 and the alert image d12 are displayed on the image display unit d114. The In addition, in the image example shown in FIG. 4-29 (a), a modification in which the alert image d12 is omitted and the “continue” character d11 is displayed is also conceivable.
In FIG. 4-29 (a), an image indicating that the game is played by right-handed is also displayed.
As described above, in order to shorten the effect time T4a of the end display effect, a mode in which a plurality of information is notified to the player on one screen is adopted.
Thereafter, as shown in (b) of FIG. 4-29, the display content of the image display unit d114 is switched to the image d13 of the company logo “◯ △ □ company”.
Note that the end display effect is based on the ending effect start command (see step a2403 in FIG. 1-24) set in the ending effect selection process (see FIG. 1-24) performed by the CPU d301. This is performed by the CPU d311.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, the effect control of the jackpot game according to the second embodiment will be described. Since the second embodiment has the same configuration and function as the first embodiment, the same reference numerals are used for the common configuration, and the description and illustration of the common configuration and function are used. May be omitted. Various modifications described above for the first embodiment can be applied to the second embodiment. Also, a part of the configuration or control of the second embodiment can be applied to the first embodiment, and the part of the configuration or control of the first embodiment can be applied to the second embodiment. It is also possible to apply to the embodiment.

  4-30 is a figure explaining the content of the end display effect which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. In the figure, the case where the alert image d12 is displayed in the end display effect (upper), the case where the alert image d12 is not displayed (middle), and the case where the alert image d14b is displayed (lower) are shown. Is also controlled by the CPU d301 of the effect control unit d300. The end display effects are effect times T4a, T16a, T4b, and T16b, which are the same.

  When displaying the alert image d12 in the end display effect, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 4-30, the alert image d12 is displayed on the image display unit d114 from the start of the end display effect to the time point ta1. Then, at the time ta1, the character is switched to the “continue” character d11 and displayed until the time ta2. Furthermore, at the time ta2, the screen is switched to the company logo image 13 and displayed until the end display effect ends.

  Further, when the alert image d12 is not displayed in the end display effect, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 4-30, the “done” character d11 is displayed on the image display unit d114 at the start of the end display effect. At time tb1, the image is switched to the company logo image d13 and is displayed until the end display effect ends.

  More specifically, the time from the time ta2 when displaying the alert image d12 in the end display effect to the end of the end display effect, and from the time tb1 when not displaying the alert image d12 to the end of the end display effect. Are equal to each other. That is, the time for displaying the company logo image d13 is set to a certain time. This makes it possible to reduce the burden on the person in charge of model development.

When displaying the alert image d14b in the end display effect, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 4-30, at the start of the end display effect, an image d14 including the “continue” character d14a and the alert image d14b is displayed. Displayed in the part d114. At time tc1, the image is switched to the company logo image d13 and displayed until the end display effect ends.
Note that, due to space limitations, not all of the alert image d14b in the image d14 is illustrated in the lower part of FIG. 4-30, and is partially omitted.
In addition, even in the case of the lower part of FIG. 4-30, the time for displaying the company logo image d13 is set to a fixed time.

  More specifically, in the image d14, the alert image d14b is displayed smaller than the alert image d12 shown in the upper part of FIG. 4-30. That is, the alert image 12 is displayed more conspicuously, and is displayed as a part of the image d14 so that the alert image d14b is not so conspicuous.

  Here, the case where the alert image d12 is displayed and the case where the image d14 including the alert image d14b is displayed will be described. A control example of displaying the alert image d12 prominently displayed on the image display unit d114 when a relatively large number of award balls is acquired (a jackpot symbol is a specific symbol A) can be considered. Further, the alert image d14b displayed so as not to stand out so much on the image display unit d114 is displayed when a long hit after short hit (a big hit symbol is a specific symbol B) where it is difficult to obtain many prize balls. A control example can be considered. By appropriately using the alert image d12 and the alert image d14b, more appropriate alert can be performed.

  As described above, in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the player maintains concentration during the big hit game including the opening operation of the big winning opening d125 in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball. In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate at the hall store.

[Fifth Embodiment]
A fifth embodiment will be described.
Here, since the effect performed when the special symbol is changed based on the determination is performed in order to enhance the interest of the game in the change, it is usually started with the start of the change of the special symbol. Here, most of the gaming machines hold the right for jackpot determination up to a predetermined number when there is a prize at the start of the game ball during the change of the special symbol. And the determination based on the right which concerns on the held jackpot determination is performed, repeating the change and stop of a special symbol. Therefore, when a right related to a jackpot determination based on a certain prize is held, it takes a certain amount of time depending on the number of holds previously held before the determination based on the held right is made. Along with this, it takes time until the effect at the time of the change of the special symbol executed based on the determination result based on the reserved right is started.
On the other hand, for the player, the main operation in the game is to fire a game ball and win a prize in the winning opening. Therefore, by immediately giving some effect in response to the winning, it is possible to make a strong impression of the relationship between the player's action and effect in the game, and to further enhance the player's interest in the game.
Therefore, the fifth embodiment adopts the following configuration in order to enhance the player's interest in the game by performing an effect associated with the effect accompanying the variation of the special symbol, with the winning of the game ball as an opportunity .

That is, the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment is
A determination means (e234) for determining whether or not to shift to a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the winning of a game ball in a predetermined starting area;
Symbol display means (e114, e221, e222) for stopping and displaying a symbol indicating the determination result after the symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time according to the determination result by the determination means (e234);
Storage means (e203, e303) for storing the right to be judged by the judgment means (e234) up to a predetermined number in accordance with the winning of game balls in the starting area;
Prior determination means for making a prior determination as to whether or not to shift to the special gaming state before the determination by the determination means (e234) is made regarding the rights stored in the storage means (e203, e303). e200)
Production control means (e300) that produces an effect according to the display of the symbols by the symbol display means (e114, e221, e222),
The production control means (e300)
Based on the result of the prior determination by the prior determination means (e200), it is determined to perform a special effect,
Triggering a stage effect that suggests that there is a possibility that the special effect will be performed before the special effect is performed, triggered by the winning of the game ball in the starting area,
It is characterized by.
Hereinafter, a specific description will be given with reference to the drawings having the drawing numbers including “FIG. 5” (hereinafter also referred to as FIG. 5). For the fifth embodiment, the drawing of the first embodiment (FIG. 1) may be referred to. In that case, the first digit “a” in FIG. It may be described as being replaced with “e”.

[Special production based on prior judgment]
Next, a special effect based on prior determination performed in the fifth embodiment will be described.
In the fifth embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 1-6 as the first embodiment, the first starting port e121 (corresponding to the first starting port a121 in FIG. 1-1 or FIG. 1-3). And when the first start port switch e211 (corresponding to the first start port switch a211 in FIG. 1-3) is turned ON, and the second start port e122 (FIGS. 1-1 or 1- 3) (corresponding to the second starting port a122 of 3) and the second starting port switch e212 (corresponding to the second starting port switch a212 in FIG. Prior to the jackpot determination (see steps a808 and a809 in FIG. 1-8), a pre-determination (prefetching) is performed (see steps a605 and a611 in FIG. 1-6).

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the right of jackpot determination based on winning of a game ball is suspended, the effect control unit e300 determines whether or not to perform a special effect based on the result of the prior determination. . Here, the pre-determination is not limited to the pre-determination as to whether or not the jackpot is true, but may be a pre-determination regarding the variation pattern (variation time) of the selected special symbol. In this case, for example, even if it is determined that it is not a big hit by prior determination, the special effect may be executed based on the preliminary determination that a specific variation pattern is selected. In addition, if the winning of the game ball at the starting point, which is a trigger for determining whether or not to execute the special effect, is a win in a state where the number of reserved rights regarding the jackpot determination is 0, the special effect Whether to execute or not is determined not by prior determination but by jackpot determination when the symbol changes. In the present embodiment, the effect control unit e300 performs an effect of switching the background image displayed on the image display unit e114 during the special symbol change to a specific image (for example, an image representing a night background) as the special effect. .

FIG. 5-27 is a diagram illustrating an example of special effects in the fifth embodiment.
FIG. 5-27 (a) shows the state of the display screen of the image display unit e114 before the special effect according to the present embodiment is executed, and FIG. 5-27 (b) shows the special effect according to the present embodiment. Is a state of the display screen of the image display unit e114 after the above is executed. In the illustrated example, the image representing the daytime scene is displayed before the background image is switched by the special effect, and the image representing the night scene is displayed after the background image is switched by the special effect.

  In the present embodiment, the special effect is executed in response to winning of a game ball at the start ports e121 and e122. That is, when it is determined that a special effect is to be performed with respect to a certain hold, the preceding effect is digested, and the special effect is started along with the start of the special symbol variation display based on the winning (hold) determined to perform the special effect. Instead of being started, the special effect is immediately executed when the execution of the special effect is determined by the preliminary determination executed by winning the start openings e121 and e122. As a result, it seems that the special performance starts at the moment when the winnings at the start openings e121 and e122 are received, so that the player is strongly impressed with the relevance between the special performance and the winning prize. Can do. The special effect that is started is continued until the change display of the special symbol based on the hold determined to perform the special effect is completed.

  In the present embodiment, two types of modes are set as modes in which the production control unit e300 starts the special production. One is a mode in which a special effect is immediately started upon the winning of a game ball at the start openings e121 and e122. Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 5-27, the state shown in FIG. 5-27 (a) is directly switched to the state shown in FIG. 5-27 (b). The other one is a mode in which the transition to the special effect is made after performing the precursor effect suggesting that the special effect may be performed.

FIG. 5-28 is a diagram illustrating a state in which a transition is made to a special effect through a precursor effect.
Fig. 5-28 (a) shows the state of the display screen of the image display unit e114 before the special effect is executed, and Fig. 5-28 (b) shows the display of the image display unit e114 in which the precursor effect is executed. FIG. 5-28 (c) shows the state of the screen of the image display unit e114 after the special effect is executed. FIG. 5-28 (a) is the same screen as FIG. 5-27 (a), and FIG. 5-28 (c) is the same screen as FIG. 5-27 (b).

  When the precursor effect of this embodiment is started, as shown in FIG. 5-28 (b), a black hazy area (hereinafter referred to as a screen) representing a daytime scene (see FIG. 5-28 (a)). , Dark areas) occur. And if the area | region becomes large gradually and covers the whole screen, it will switch to the screen (refer FIG. 5-28 (c)) showing a night view. Here, a plurality of times until the dark area becomes large and covers the entire screen can be set, and can be determined dynamically by lottery using random numbers. Moreover, it is also possible to adopt a display mode in which the entire screen is covered after a motion that makes the dark area larger or smaller is repeated several times.

  The precursor effect of the present embodiment is executed in response to winning of a game ball at the start ports e121 and e122. In other words, when the precursor effect is executed, it is first determined whether or not to execute the special effect when the game ball wins and the hold occurs. When it is determined that the special effect is to be executed, the precursor effect is executed, and then the special effect is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of shifting to the special effect after the precursor effect is performed, a unique sound effect is generated at the moment when the special effect is started. This sound effect may be generated at the moment when the special effect is started, even when the sign effect is not performed. Thereby, the player can recognize the start and the timing of the special performance auditorily.

  In the present embodiment, the sign effect may be executed even when the special effect is not executed. In this case, the suggestion of the special effect by the sign effect is false (so-called gasse). Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 5-28, a dark area is displayed by shifting from the state of FIG. 5-28 (a) to FIG. 5-28 (b). Production control is performed such that the image disappears without spreading completely and returns to the state of FIG.

  In this way, by performing the precursor effect before starting the special effect, the player can perform the effect with the expectation that the special effect executed based on the result of the prior determination may be started. I can enjoy it. In addition, even when the sign effect is performed, the sign effect is started immediately after the game ball is won. And, as described above, the sign production shifts along the natural flow to the special production, so that the player is strongly impressed with the relevance between the sign production and the special production and the winning prize that triggered it. Can do.

  By the way, when the winning of the game ball to the start openings e121 and e122 occurs during the special symbol variation display, and the remaining time until the variation ends is short (for example, about 1 second), the precursor effect is started. Immediately after, the special symbol is stopped and confirmed. At this time, since the player's attention is directed to the start of the precursor effect, it is considered that the player may fail to recognize that the special symbol has been confirmed. Therefore, in such a case, the effect control unit e300 may perform control such that the special effect is started directly at the start of the next special symbol variation display without executing the precursor effect.

FIG. 5-29 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the effect image displayed on the image display unit e114.
The effect image shown in FIG. 5-29 is composed of three layers (layers), and is arranged in the order of the first layer e114a, the second layer e114b, and the third layer e114c as viewed from the player. Therefore, when the image drawn on the first layer e114a overlaps with the image drawn on the second layer e114b or the third layer e114c, the player draws another image drawn on the first layer e114a Visible in a state of being overlaid on the image. In addition, when the image drawn on the second layer e114b and the image drawn on the third layer e114c overlap, the player draws the image drawn on the second layer e114b over another image. It is visually recognized in the state. In other words, each layer has a higher display priority in the order of the first layer e114a, the second layer e114b, and the third layer e114c. Note that the transparency of each of the layers e114a to e114c can be set by performing mask processing or the like on a drawn image or a region other than the image. Therefore, for example, by setting a portion other than the image drawn in the upper layer to be transparent, the image in the lower layer is transparently seen in the portion where the image is not drawn.

  On the first layer e114a, an image including information related to the game, such as a hold icon for notifying the player of the number of hold of the right related to the jackpot determination, is drawn with the decorative design and the effect image. These images are drawn on the first layer e114a with the highest display priority that is not hidden by other images because the player should not be misidentified regarding the information indicated by the images. In addition, by setting a portion other than the image drawn on the first layer e114a to be transparent, the image drawn on the second layer e114b or the third layer e114c remains visible, and the second layer e114a remains on the second layer e114a. A decorative pattern, a hold icon, etc. of the first layer e114a can be displayed.

  On the second layer e114b, images of characters and effects used in a specific effect such as a notice effect are drawn. An image for special effects such as reach effects is also drawn on the second layer e114b. Since these images are effects that are particularly executed while satisfying the execution conditions, it is required that these images be displayed with priority over general effect images. However, the image drawn on the first layer e114a as described above must not be hidden. Therefore, the image is drawn on the second layer e114b having the second highest display priority after the first layer e114a. By setting the portion other than the image drawn on the second layer e114b to be transparent, the character drawn on the third layer e114c remains visible while the character on the second layer e114b is visible. Expression that moves the image around is possible.

  A background image as a general effect image is drawn on the third layer e114c. An image of the special effect and the sign effect according to the present embodiment is drawn on the third layer e114c. These images are displayed when an image including information related to a game such as a decorative pattern drawn on the first layer e114a or an image for special effects drawn on the second layer e114b is displayed. The image is drawn on the third layer e114c having the lowest display priority so as not to hide the image.

  For example, during execution of a special effect such as a reach effect, a game ball may win a start opening e121, e122, and a precursor effect or a special effect may be started. In this case, since the player is paying attention to the special performance being executed, if the special effect or the prelude effect is started immediately after winning a prize, special control (so-called so-called special performance) There is a risk that the illusion will appear as if the development effects were performed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the warning effect image and the special effect image are drawn on the third layer e114c located behind the second layer e114b on which the image of the special effect is drawn. As a result, even if the warning effect or special effect is started during execution of the special effect, the image of the warning effect and the special effect is hidden by the image of the special effect and cannot be viewed by the player. However, since the unique sound effect is generated at the moment when the special effect is started, the player can recognize that the special effect has been executed.

  It should be noted that exception control may be performed to generate a sound effect at the start of the special effect regardless of the execution of the special effect during the execution of the effect in a particularly defined effect (such as a special reach effect). For example, this sound effect is generated when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery related to the variation of the special symbol in which the specific effect is performed. That is, if a sound effect is generated while this specific performance is being performed, it means that the big win is confirmed. In this way, the player has the illusion that a special effect has been performed due to the occurrence of the sound effect, but when the specific effect ends, it becomes a big hit, and the game is more advantageous than the player expects. , It is possible to provide an interest with unexpectedness to the player.

[Control of special effects and precursor effects]
FIG. 5-30 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a control procedure for a special effect and a sign effect.
As shown in FIG. 5-30, when a game ball wins in the start openings e121 and e122 (step e3001), the effect control unit e300 adds 1 to the stored value x of the number of rights related to the jackpot determination ( Step e3002). Then, it is determined whether or not the updated number x is 1 (step e3003).

  When the number of holdings x is other than 1 (that is, 2 or more) (No in step e3003), the effect control unit e300 next performs a prior determination on the right related to the jackpot determination based on the winning in step e3001 (step e3004). Then, the effect control unit e300 determines whether or not to execute the special effect based on the preliminary determination result (step e3005). When it is determined that the special effect is to be executed (Yes in step e3005), the effect control unit e300 next determines whether or not the time until the current special symbol change stops is equal to or shorter than a predetermined time (for example, about 1 second). Judgment is made (step e3006).

  When the time until the special symbol variation stop is longer than the predetermined time (No in step e3006), the effect control unit e300 determines whether or not the special effect (reach effect) is being executed (step e3007). If the special effect is not being executed (No in step e3007), then the effect control unit e300 determines whether or not to execute the warning effect (step e3008). If it is determined to execute the warning effect (Yes in step e3008), the performance control unit e300 immediately executes the warning effect, and then executes the special effect (step e3009). On the other hand, when it is determined not to execute the precursor effect (No in step e3008), the effect control unit e300 immediately executes the special effect (step e3010).

When the special effect is being executed in step e3007 (Yes in step e3007), the effect control unit e300 is positioned after the second layer e114b (see FIG. 5-29) on which the image of the special effect is drawn. It is determined that a special effect image is to be drawn on the third layer e114c (step e3011), and processing subsequent to step e3008 (determination of whether or not to perform the warning effect) is executed.
Also, in step e3006, when the time until the special symbol change stop is equal to or shorter than the predetermined time (Yes in step e3006), the production control unit e300 waits for the change to stop and the hold is digested and the next is stopped. As the special symbol changes, the special effect is executed (step e3012).
When it is determined in step e3005 that the special effect is not to be executed (No in step e3005), the effect control unit e300 determines to perform the effect when the special symbol other than the special effect is changed, and ends the process. (Step e3016). Here, the effects other than the special effects are determined according to various conditions such as the variation pattern determined in the special symbol lottery and the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine e100 at the time of variation.

If the number of holds x is 1 in step e3003 (Yes in step e3003), the effect control unit e300 first determines whether or not the current special symbol is changing (step e3013). And when it is changing (it is Yes at Step e3013), since it is judged whether special production is performed based on prior judgment with respect to the suspension, production control part e300 performs processing after Step e3004 . On the other hand, when it is not changing (No in step e3013), the effect control unit e300 determines a determination value related to the jackpot acquired by winning in step e3001 (step e3014). Then, based on the determination result, it is determined whether or not to execute the special effect (step e3015). When it is determined that the special effect is to be executed (Yes in step e3015), the effect control unit e300 executes the processing after step e3008 (determining whether or not to execute the warning effect).
On the other hand, when it is determined not to execute the special effect (No in step e3015), the effect control unit e300 determines to perform the effect when the special symbol other than the special effect is changed, and ends the process (step e3016). .

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, a special effect or a predecessor effect is immediately started when a game ball is won at a start opening e121, e122 in a game. It is possible to make a strong impression of the relevance between the main operation of the pachinko gaming machine e100 for winning the game ball and the special effect and the sign effect.

  In the above-described embodiment, whether or not to execute the special effect is determined based on the winning of the game ball to the start openings e121 and e122, and the special effect is immediately executed. Moreover, when performing the precursor effect before performing the special effect, the precursor effect was executed in response to the winning. In other words, based on the same winning, a sign effect is performed, and then a special effect is performed. On the other hand, it is also possible to perform effect control such that the sign effect and the special effect are executed based on different winnings.

  For example, it is determined that the special effect is to be executed based on one winning at the start openings e121 and e122, and the process waits without starting the execution. Then, when there is another winning next time, this is used as an opportunity to perform a precursor effect, and the special effect that has been on standby is executed following this precursor effect. According to such effect control, the special effect is not immediately executed after winning a prize, but the sign effect is immediately executed after winning a prize, so that the player can be strongly impressed with the relationship between the prize and the sign effect.

  In addition, based on the result of prior determination, according to the kind of jackpot symbol, the contents of the sign effect and the special effect may be varied. Specifically, for example, with regard to special effects, jackpots that transition to a high probability state after jackpot game by prior determination (for example, 1 per 16R length, 2 per 16R length, 1 per 4R length (see FIG. 1-29-2)) If it is determined, it shifts to the background of the night, and if it is determined that the jackpot that shifts to the medium probability state (2 per 4R length (see Fig. 1-29-2)), it shifts to the background of the evening. May be. Or, when the jackpot that shifts to the high probability state after the jackpot game is determined, and the jackpot that shifts to the medium probability state is determined, the probability that the precursor effect is executed before the execution of the special effect is different. You may do it.

  In the prior determination at step e3004 in FIG. 5-30 and the determination at step e3014, as described with reference to FIG. 1-17-1, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine e100 (high probability state, medium probability state or low probability) The determination is made using a table of jackpot random numbers provided according to the state. Here, the probabilities of executing the special effects and the precursor effects may be varied depending on which gaming state table is used and determined.

[Sixth embodiment]
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described.
Here, in the case of the conventional pseudo-continuous notice, if the reach effect is performed, the pseudo-continuous notice is not performed after that, so the pseudo-continuous notice is not performed or the number of pseudo-continuous notices is small. And if the reach production is performed, the expectation to the jackpot for the reach production would be significantly reduced. In particular, even if super reach (variation mode of specific reach) is performed after so-called normal reach (variation mode of reach), as a harmful effect that pseudo continuous notice was not performed, super reach has a sense of expectation for jackpot I can't hold it.
Therefore, the sixth embodiment adopts the following configuration in order to provide a gaming machine that can further enhance the interest of the game while performing pseudo continuous notice.

In other words, the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment, when the determination condition is satisfied, special game determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (for example, jackpot determination in step Sf311). Main CPU f110a) that performs processing, and special game execution means that executes the special game when the special game determination means determines that the special game is to be executed (for example, main CPU f110a that performs jackpot game processing in step Sf340) And an effect symbol display means (for example, an image display device f31) for displaying an effect symbol for performing an effect based on a determination result by the special game determination means, and an effect symbol displayed on the effect symbol display means Effect design control means for performing display control (for example, an effect including at least a sub CPU f120a) And your board f120, etc.), with a,
When the determination by the variation mode storage unit (for example, the sub ROM f120b) for storing a plurality of types of variation modes in the variation display of the effect symbol and the special game determination unit are performed, the effect symbol control unit stores the variation mode. A variation display control means (for example, a sub CPU f120a) for stopping and displaying the effect symbol for notifying the determination result by the special game determining means after the effect symbol is variably displayed in the variation mode stored in the means; Based on the determination result by the game determining means, a variation mode determining means (for example, a sub CPU f120a) for determining a variation mode to be variably displayed on the variation display control means from a plurality of types of variation modes stored in the variation mode storage means. And having
The fluctuation display control means is an order of normal fluctuation symbol control means for fluctuating and displaying the effect symbols in a normal fluctuation mode (for example, normal fluctuation), and the normal fluctuation mode and normal reach fluctuation mode (for example, normal reach). The normal reach symbol control means for variably displaying the effect symbol, and the specification for variably displaying the effect symbol in the order of the normal variation mode, the normal reach variation mode, and the specific reach variation mode (for example, super reach). The effect symbols are variably displayed in the order of reach symbol control means, the normal variation mode, the normal reach variation mode, and the specific reach variation mode, and the variation display of the effect symbol according to the specific reach variation mode is displayed. After the start, the effect symbols that are variably displayed are temporarily stopped, and the effect symbols that are temporarily stopped are re-variable. After illustrated, has a quasi-continuous pattern control means for the variable display of the performance symbols by predetermined fluctuation mode, and symbol stop control means for stopping the display of the performance symbol, at least,
The variation mode storage unit stores a plurality of types of variation modes of the specific reach (for example, A, B, C, D reach),
The variation mode determining means, when the effect symbol variation display is performed by the pseudo continuous symbol control means, based on the specific reach variation aspect performed before the effect symbol re-variable display, The predetermined variation mode performed after the re-variation display of the effect symbol is determined.
Hereinafter, a specific description will be given with reference to the drawings having the drawing numbers including “FIG. 6” (hereinafter also referred to as FIG. 6). For the sixth embodiment, the drawing of the first embodiment (FIG. 1) and other embodiments may be referred to.

In the sixth embodiment, a ROM f302 (see ROMa 302 in FIG. 1-3) of the effect control unit f300 stores an effect control program and data and tables necessary for determining various games.
Specifically, a pseudo continuous notice scenario determination table for determining a pseudo continuous notice scenario (see FIG. 6-12), a symbol effect pattern determination table for determining a symbol effect pattern (see FIG. 6-13), background A background pattern determination table or the like for determining a pattern is stored in the ROM f302. Note that the above-described table is merely an example of characteristic tables among the tables in the present embodiment, and a number of other tables and programs (not shown) are provided for the progress of the game. ing.

[Pseudo continuous notice scenario decision table]
FIG. 6-12 is a diagram showing a pseudo continuous notice scenario determination table for determining the configuration of the pseudo continuous notice.

  As shown in FIG. 6-12, the pseudo continuous notice scenario determination table includes a special symbol variation pattern designation command received from the game control unit f200 (corresponding to the game control unit a200 in FIG. 1 random number value), a pseudo continuous notice scenario, the number of pseudo continuous runs, and a pseudo continuous execution time are associated with each other.

  Here, the “pseudo continuous notice scenario” means data for determining the structure of the pseudo continuous notice (execution time of the pseudo continuous notice, etc.)

  In the rightmost column of the pseudo continuous notice scenario determination table of FIG. 6-12, the configuration of each pseudo continuous notice scenario is illustrated for reference.

  Here, the “normal variation” means that the plurality of effect symbols f38 vary at high speed (see FIG. 6-39 (a)), and “NR” means the left and right effect symbols f38. Means a normal reach in which the temporary production symbol f38 fluctuates temporarily (see FIG. 6-39 (b)).

  “SP reach” means a super reach in which the production symbol f38 changes specially, a special character is displayed, or all the production symbols f38 are reduced and displayed toward the corner of the screen. (See FIGS. 6-42 and 6-43).

“SPSP reach” and “help reach” mean special reach performed after super reach.
In addition, the “full rotation reach” means a reach that displays a variation at a low speed in a state where all the combinations of the plurality of effect symbols f38 for notifying the jackpot are gathered, and in the present embodiment, when winning in the jackpot lottery Reach is only performed.

  Further, “development failure” means whether or not the production design f38 in the middle temporarily stops with a special design (for example, “ream” design) when the left and right production design f38 is temporarily stopped and becomes normal reach. This means that the development effect is effected, and the effect symbol f38 in the middle does not temporarily stop at the special symbol, but stops at the symbol corresponding to the loss (see FIGS. 6-40 (f) and (g)).

  Also, “success in development” means whether or not the middle effect symbol f38 temporarily stops with a special symbol (for example, “ream” symbol) when the left and right effect symbols f38 are temporarily stopped and become normal reach. It means an effect in which an effect is developed and the effect symbol f38 in the middle temporarily stops with a special symbol (see FIG. 6-40 (e)).

  Further, the “pseudo development” means that a predetermined character is displayed after the production design f38 in the middle is temporarily stopped with a special design, or the second decorative member f33b imitating a “sword” is driven, This means an effect of notifying that the change is started (see FIGS. 6-41 (a) and (b)).

  Further, the “pseudo variation” means an effect in which all the effect symbols f38 are changed again after all the effect symbols f38 are temporarily stopped (after executing the “pseudo development”) (FIG. 6). -41 (c), see (d)).

  In the pseudo continuous notice scenario, the specific variation mode of the effect symbol f38 such as the type of super reach is not defined, and the effect symbol f38 is determined by the symbol effect pattern determination table (see, for example, FIG. 6-13) described later. The specific variation mode and the like will be determined.

Further, as described above, “pseudo continuous notice number” means “the number of times of pseudo continuous notice execution”, and “pseudo continuous notice time” means “time to execute pseudo continuous notice”.
In the present embodiment, “G1a” of the pseudo continuous execution time corresponds to the time of executing the first pseudo continuous notice after the normal reach, and “G1b” of the pseudo continuous execution time is the first time after the super reach. “G2a” of the pseudo continuous execution time corresponds to the time of executing the second pseudo continuous notice after the normal reach, and “G2b” of the pseudo continuous execution time. "Corresponds to the time when the second pseudo continuous notice is executed after super reach, and" G3 "of the pseudo continuous execution time corresponds to the time when the third pseudo continuous notice is executed after super reach. ing.

  The CPU f 301 (corresponding to the CPU a 301 in FIG. 1-3) refers to the pseudo continuous notice scenario determination table shown in FIG. 6-12, and receives a special symbol variation pattern designation command received from the CPU f 200 (corresponding to the CPU a 201 in FIG. 1-3). Then, based on the selection rate (first random number value), the pseudo continuous notice scenario, the number of pseudo continuous runs, and the pseudo continuous execution time are determined.

  When the CPU f301 determines the pseudo continuous notice scenario, the pseudo continuous number of times, and the pseudo continuous execution time, the CPU f301 stores the determined pseudo continuous notice scenario, the pseudo continuous number of times, and the pseudo continuous execution time in the RAM f303 (RAMa303 in FIG. 1-3). In a predetermined storage area.

  Further, as a feature of the pseudo continuous notice scenario determination table shown in FIG. 6-12, the pseudo continuous notice is determined at two different timings, that is, the time when the pseudo continuous notice is executed after the normal reach and the time when the pseudo continuous notice is executed after the super reach. A quasi-continuous notice scenario for executing notice is provided.

  Further, as a feature of the pseudo continuous notice scenario determination table shown in FIG. 6-12, the first pseudo continuous notice scenario (for example, for executing the pseudo continuous notice after the normal reach) for the same number of pseudo consecutive times (the same variation pattern designation command) (for example, The pseudo continuous notice scenario A1a-SP1) and the second pseudo continuous notice scenario (pseudo continuous notice scenario A1b-SP1) in which the pseudo continuous notice is executed after super reach are within the same special symbol variation time. The production pattern of the pseudo continuous notice scenario is configured.

  In addition, as a feature of the pseudo continuous notice scenario determination table shown in FIG. 6-12, pseudo continuous notice is performed after normal reach by a special symbol variation pattern designation command (type of jackpot) and a selection rate (first random number value). Rather than executing, the expectation of jackpot is higher when the pseudo continuous notice is executed after super reach.

  Further, as a feature of the pseudo continuous notice scenario determination table shown in FIG. 6-12, when the pseudo continuous notice is executed again after the pseudo continuous notice is executed after the super reach, the pseudo continuous notice is not executed after the normal reach. In addition, the pseudo continuous notice is executed again after the super reach.

  Moreover, as a feature of the pseudo continuous notice scenario determination table shown in FIG. 6-12, the pseudo continuous notice is executed three times by a special symbol variation pattern designation command (type of jackpot) and a selection rate (first random number value). In such a case (when the “variation display of 4 times” is performed with the normal variation and the three pseudo continuous notices), it is configured to be a big hit.

[Design production pattern determination table]
FIG. 6-13 is a diagram illustrating a symbol effect pattern determination table for determining a symbol effect pattern that defines a specific effect mode performed during one change of the special symbol.
This figure is a symbol effect pattern determination table 1 that is referred to when pseudo continuous notice is not executed.

  The symbol effect pattern determination table 1 shown in the figure includes a special symbol variation pattern designation command received from the CPU f200 (corresponding to the CPUa 201 in FIG. 1-3), a selection rate (second random number value), a symbol effect pattern, and the like. Are associated. Note that the symbol effect pattern determination table 1 shown in the figure is a table that is referred to when the pseudo continuous notice is not executed, and is associated only with the change pattern designation command of the change pattern that does not execute the pseudo continuous notice. . Note that the variation pattern designation command here indicates a variation pattern of a special symbol.

The CPU f301 refers to the symbol effect pattern determination table 1 shown in FIG. 6-13, and determines the symbol effect pattern based on the special symbol variation pattern designation command received from the CPU f200 and the selection rate (second random number value). To do.
Here, even with the same special symbol variation pattern designation command, a plurality of different symbol effect patterns can be determined based on the selection rate (second random number value). By reducing the number of commands, the storage capacity of the CPU f200 is reduced.

Here, the “symbol effect pattern” is a specific effect mode performed by the image display device f31, the sound output device f32, the effect drive device f33, and the effect illumination device f34 during one change of the special symbol. In the image display device f31, it is for determining a specific variation mode of the effect design f38.
For example, in the image display device f31, the display mode of the character and the variation mode of the production design f38 are determined by the design production pattern. In addition, “reach” in the present embodiment refers to a state in which a part of the combination of the effect symbols f38 for notifying the transition to the special game is temporarily stopped and the other effect symbols f38 are variably displayed. Say. For example, when the combination of the three-digit effect symbol f38 of “777” is set as the combination of the effect symbol f38 for notifying that the game will shift to the jackpot game, the temporary effect display is performed when the two effect symbols f38 are “7”. In this state, the remaining effect symbol f38 is in a variable display.

[Example of time chart of pseudo-continuous notice effect]
As described above, for the same number of pseudo-continuations, the overall performance time when the pseudo continuous notice is executed after the normal reach and the overall effect time when the pseudo continuous notice is executed after the super reach are the same variation pattern. The production pattern by the pseudo continuous notice scenario is configured so as to be within the fluctuation time (see FIG. 6-12).

An example of a time chart of pseudo continuous notice effect will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 6-38 (a) shows a pseudo-continuation based on a pseudo-continuous notice scenario when a variable pattern command (MODE = “E6H / E7H”, DATA = 02H) is executed by executing one pseudo-continuous notice. FIG. 6-38 (b) shows a variation pattern command (MODE = “E6H / E7H”, DATA = 03H) that is a big hit by executing two pseudo continuous notices. It is an example of the time chart of the production | presentation of the pseudo | simulation continuous notice by the quasi-continuous notice scenario when it receives.

As shown in FIG. 6-38 (a), in the case of the pseudo continuous notice scenario A1a-SP1, “normal fluctuation” for 10 seconds, “normal reach” for 5 seconds, “successful development” for 5 seconds, “ Production is performed in the order of "pseudo development", 5 seconds of "pseudo fluctuation", 5 seconds of "normal reach", and 10 seconds of "super reach".
In the case of the pseudo continuous notice scenario A1b-SP1, 10 seconds of “normal fluctuation”, 5 seconds of “normal reach”, 10 seconds of “super reach”, 5 seconds of “pseudo development”, and 5 seconds of “pseudo fluctuation”. "The performance is performed in the order of" Super Reach "for 10 seconds.

  That is, when the fluctuation time (T2) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command (MODE = “E6H / E7H”, DATA = 02H) that is a big hit by executing one pseudo-continuous notice is 45 seconds, pseudo-continuous The presentation time of the notice scenario A1a-SP1 and the pseudo continuous notice scenario A1b-SP1 is configured to be the same as 45 seconds.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6-38 (b), in the case of the pseudo continuous notice scenario A2a-SP1, “normal fluctuation” of 10 seconds, “normal reach” of 5 seconds, “successful development” effect of 5 seconds, 5 seconds "Pseudo-development" production, 10-second "pseudo-variation", 5-second "normal reach", 5-second "pseudo-development" production, 5-second "pseudo-variation", 5-second "normal reach", 10-second " Produce in the order of “Super Reach”.
Also, in the case of the pseudo continuous notice scenario A2b-SP1, “normal fluctuation” of 10 seconds, “normal reach” of 5 seconds, “successful development” effect of 5 seconds, “pseudo development” effect of 5 seconds, “pseudo development” of 5 seconds Production is performed in the order of “variation”, “normal reach” of 5 seconds, “super reach” of 10 seconds, “pseudo development” of 5 seconds, “pseudo variation” of 5 seconds, “super reach” of 10 seconds.
In the case of the pseudo continuous notice scenario A2c-SP1, 10 seconds of “normal fluctuation”, 5 seconds of “normal reach”, 10 seconds of “super reach”, 5 seconds of “pseudo development” production, 5 seconds of “pseudo fluctuation” ”10 seconds of“ super reach ”, 5 seconds of“ pseudo development ”, 5 seconds of“ pseudo fluctuation ”, 10 seconds of“ super reach ”.

  That is, when the fluctuation time (T2) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command (MODE = “E6H / E7H”, DATA = 03H) that is a big hit by executing two pseudo-continuous notices is 65 seconds, the pseudo-continuous The presentation time of the notice scenario A2a-SP1, the pseudo-continuous notice scenario A2b-SP1, and the pseudo-continuous notice scenario A2c-SP1 is configured to be the same as 65 seconds.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the overall performance time when the pseudo continuous notice is executed after the normal reach and the overall effect time when the pseudo continuous notice is executed after the super reach correspond to the same variation pattern. The production pattern by the pseudo continuous notice scenario is configured so as to be within the fluctuation time.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, at least the “pseudo fluctuation” performance time (for example, 10 seconds) when the pseudo continuous notice is executed after the normal reach and the “pseudo fluctuation” when the pseudo continuous notice is executed after the super reach. The production time when the pseudo-continuous notice is executed after the normal reach and the overall effect time when the pseudo-continuous notice is executed after the super reach. Are adjusted to have the same performance time.

  In this embodiment, by adjusting the production time of “pseudo fluctuation”, the overall production time when the pseudo continuous notice is executed after the normal reach, and when the pseudo continuous notice is executed after the super reach. Although the entire production time is configured to be the same time, the production time of “normal reach”, “pseudo development”, “SP reach”, etc. is adjusted, and pseudo continuous notice is executed after normal reach. You may comprise so that the whole production time and the whole production time when a pseudo continuous notice is performed after super reach may become the same time.

[Pseudo continuous notice effect display screen]
Next, an example of the content of the pseudo continuous notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 6-39 (a), when a game ball enters the first starting port f121 or the second starting port f122 (corresponding to the first starting port a121 and the second starting port a122 in FIG. 1-1). The three effect symbols f38 are displayed with a “normal variation” variation display.

  As shown in FIG. 6-39 (b), when the normal variation time elapses, the left effect symbol f38a and the right effect symbol f38a are temporarily stopped, and “normal reach” in which the effect effect f38c in the middle fluctuates is performed. Is called.

  As shown in FIG. 6-39 (c), when the reach reaches normal and the permission start time G0s elapses, a drum character f31a prompting the operation of the effect button f35 (corresponding to the effect button a161 in FIG. 1-1) is displayed. .

  As shown in FIG. 6-40 (d), if there is an operation of the effect button within the permission period (G0s to G0e) or if the permission end time G0e elapses without the operation of the effect button, A fireworks ball character f31b with a special symbol ("ream" symbol) corresponding to the production symbol f38c is displayed, and whether or not the fireworks ball character f31b stops at the center of the screen is "development effect (successful development or development). Production of failure) ”is performed.

  As shown in FIGS. 6-40 (f) and (g), if the production is “development failure”, the firework ball character f31b falls downward on the screen and loses as the production design f38c inside. The symbol to be notified is stopped and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 6-40 (e), when the effect is “successful development”, the firework ball character f31b temporarily stops with a special symbol at the center of the screen, and the firework ball leads to a crack and fire. The production is performed.

  Then, with the effect that the fireworks ball is lit, the development effect started with the operation of the effect button within the permission period (G0s to G0e) and the permission end time G0e without any operation of the effect button. It absorbs the time difference from the development effect that began after the lapse.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 6-41 (a) and (b), after the effect of “successful development”, the fireworks ball explodes and the second decorative member f33b simulating “sword” is driven. Then, the effect of “pseudo-development” displayed by the character “f31e” indicating re-change and a predetermined character is performed.

  As described above, this “pseudo-development” effect is configured to be the same effect whether the pseudo continuous notice is executed after the normal reach or the pseudo continuous notice is executed after the super reach.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 6-41 (c) and (d), after the effect of “pseudo development”, the background is changed to a different background from that at the time of normal variation, and all the effect symbols f38 are re-variable. A “pseudo-variation” is performed.

  In addition, in order to notify that the pseudo continuous notice has been executed, the number of changes f31g including the first normal change is displayed in the background of “pseudo fluctuation”.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 6-41 (e) and (f), a plurality of backgrounds having different jackpot expectations are prepared as the background of “pseudo fluctuation”.

  FIG. 6-42 and FIG. 6-43 are examples of the contents of effects when a pseudo continuous notice is performed after super reach. 6-42 corresponds to A and B reach as the super reach of the present embodiment, and FIG. 6-43 corresponds to C and D reach as the super reach of the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIGS. 6-42 (h) and (i), two characters perform an effect of fighting using the effect symbol f38.

  In particular, as shown in FIG. 6-42 (i), an effect is performed in which the special symbol and the lost symbol are pressed against each other as the two effect symbols f38c.

  When the pseudo continuous notice is performed after super reach, as shown in FIG. 6-42 (j), the special symbol pushes out the lost symbol, and the special symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed as the effect symbol f38c in the middle. .

  On the other hand, when the pseudo continuous notice is not performed after the super reach and the game is lost, as shown in FIG. 6-42 (k), the special symbol is pushed out as the special symbol f38c. The stop will be displayed.

  Then, when the special symbol is displayed temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 6-42 (m), fireworks balls are displayed on the back of the special symbol, and the “pseudo development” and “pseudo variation” shown in FIG. "Will be performed.

  Further, as super reach different from FIG. 6-42, as shown in FIGS. 6-43 (n) and (p), the character f31d performs an effect of punching out the effect symbol f38 with a gun.

  When a pseudo continuous notice is performed after super reach, as shown in FIG. 6-43 (q), a special symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed as an effect symbol f38c in the middle.

  On the other hand, when the pseudo continuous notice is not performed after the super reach and the game is lost, as shown in FIG. 6-43 (r), the lost symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed as the production effect f38c.

  When the special symbol is displayed temporarily, as shown in FIG. 6-43 (s), fireworks balls are displayed on the back of the special symbol, and the “pseudo development” and “pseudo variation” shown in FIG. "Will be performed.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the pseudo continuous notice is executed after the super reach, even if the super reach is executed without the pseudo continuous notice before the reach or after the normal reach. The expectation that the pseudo continuous notice is executed can be maintained.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the pseudo continuous notice is executed at different execution timings when the pseudo continuous notice is executed after the normal reach and when the pseudo continuous notice is executed after the super reach. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving expectation that the pseudo continuous notice is executed at a plurality of times.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the expectation of jackpot is higher when the pseudo continuous notice is executed after super reach than when the pseudo continuous notice is executed after normal reach. Two pseudo-continuous notices can be executed, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, in the same number of pseudo-continuations, the overall performance time when the pseudo continuous notice is executed after the normal reach, and the overall effect time when the pseudo continuous notice is executed after the super reach However, the number of variation patterns stored in the ROM f 202 (corresponding to the ROMa 202 in FIGS. 1 to 3) is reduced, and the burden of the storage capacity of the ROM f 202 is reduced. be able to.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, even when the pseudo continuous notice is executed after the normal reach or when the pseudo continuous notice is executed after the super reach, the common as shown in FIG. Since the effect of pseudo development is performed, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the pseudo continuous notice has been executed.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, when the pseudo continuous notice is executed after super reach, the probability (development probability) that the pseudo continuous notice is executed differs depending on the type of super reach. It is possible to give a sense of expectation that continuous notice will be executed.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, the pseudo continuous notice is executed after the normal reach and the pseudo continuous notice is executed after the super reach. In addition, in the case of executing the pseudo continuous notice, the three pseudo continuous notices may be executed.

  For example, with regard to the content of the pseudo-continuous notice, for example, a jackpot (for example, 1 per 16R length, 2 per 16R length, 1 per 4R length (see FIG. 1-29-2)) that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot game is determined. If a jackpot that shifts to a medium probability state (eg, 2 per 4R length (see FIG. 1-29-2)) is determined, a jackpot that transitions to a low probability state (eg, 3 per 16R length (FIG. 1— 29-2))), the content may be varied depending on the state of the probability of transition after the jackpot game.

[Seventh embodiment]
Next, a seventh embodiment will be described.
Here, conventionally, when a game ball enters the starting area, a jackpot lottery (first symbol lottery) is performed, the lottery result is notified by a first effect performed on the display screen, and the game ball passes through the passing area. There is a gaming machine that performs a lottery of normal symbols (second symbol lottery) and notifies the lottery result by a second effect performed on a display screen. In this conventional gaming machine, in the second effect, when the normal symbol lottery is performed, a suggestion effect that suggests the first effect being executed is also interwoven. However, in the conventional gaming machine, the second effect is performed with the change of the second symbol based on the second symbol lottery, and in terms of controlling the effect while diversifying the execution factor. There was room for improvement.
Therefore, the seventh embodiment adopts the following configuration in order to control the specific effect while diversifying the execution trigger of the specific effect.

That is, in the gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment, special game determination means for performing a special game determination as to whether or not to execute a special game according to the establishment of the first start condition, and establishment of the first start condition In response to this, the first symbol display means notifies the result of the special game determination by causing the first symbol display means to change and then stop, and the first start condition is established independently. A predetermined game determination means for performing a predetermined game determination as to whether or not to execute a predetermined game different from the special game according to establishment of a second start condition that can be performed; A second symbol control means for notifying a result of the predetermined game determination by causing the second symbol display means to stop after changing the second symbol, and an effect control means for controlling a predetermined effect; The production control means responds to the variation of the first symbol. Whether or not to execute the specific effect, and if it is determined to execute, the first specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect and whether to execute the specific effect according to the variation of the second symbol If it is determined whether or not to execute, it is determined that the specific effect is executed by the second specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect, the first specific effect executing means, and the second specific effect executing means. A priority control unit that prioritizes any one of the specific effect by the first specific effect executing unit and the specific effect by the second specific effect executing unit.
Hereinafter, a specific description will be given with reference to the drawings having the drawing numbers including “FIG. 7-” (hereinafter also referred to as FIG. 7). In addition, about the 7th form example, drawing (FIG. 1) of a 1st form example and another form example may be referred.

  FIG. 7-6 is a liquid crystal display g5 (corresponding to the image display unit a114 in FIG. 7) of the pachinko gaming machine g1 (corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine a100 in FIG. 1-1) according to the present embodiment in the seventh embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the characteristic production performed on the screen of.

  As shown in FIG. 7-6, in the pachinko gaming machine g1 of the present embodiment, the specific effect g70 may be performed on the liquid crystal display g5. The specific effect g70 is an effect of variably displaying a plurality of identification displays g71. The variation display of the identification display g71 is performed by moving the highlight display g72.

  Specifically, the specific effect g70 can be executed according to the variation of the normal symbol. In the example shown in FIG. 7-6, a state in which the fourth symbol g65 corresponding to the normal symbol is variably displayed is shown. On the other hand, in FIG. 7-6, since the decorative symbol g51 and the fourth symbols g61 and g62 are stopped, the special symbol is not changed.

  When the specific effect g70 is executed, the highlighted display g72 is moved and displayed so that the highlighted display g72 is sequentially displayed on any of the plurality of identification displays g71. The result of the normal symbol determination is notified by the identification display g71 of the position where the highlight display g72 is stopped.

  More specifically, the identification display g71 includes an image written “open” and an image written “x”, and when the highlight display g72 stops on the identification display g71 written “open”. Then, it is notified that the result of the normal symbol determination is per long opening, and thereafter, the electric tulip g17 (corresponding to the electric tulip a123 in FIG. 1-1) is long opened. On the other hand, when the highlight display g72 stops on the identification display g71 written as “X”, it is notified that the result of the normal symbol determination is not per long release (that is, per loss or short release).

  Here, the results of the normal symbol determination include per long opening, per short opening, and loss. In the normal symbol determination, when the long opening is reached, the electric tulip g17 returns to the closed position after having been in the open position for, for example, 5.6 seconds. In the normal symbol determination, when the short opening is reached, the electric tulip g17 returns to the closed position after having been in the open position for 0.1 seconds, for example. If the normal symbol determination results in a loss, the electric tulip g17 does not operate.

  When the result of the normal symbol determination is per long opening, the electric tulip g17 is in an open posture for a relatively long time, and thus a plurality of game balls are provided at the second start opening g12 (corresponding to the second start opening a122 in FIG. Will be easier to win. On the other hand, when the result of the normal symbol determination is per short opening, since the electric tulip g17 is in the open posture for a relatively short time, it is difficult for the game ball to win the second start opening g12.

  FIG. 7-7 is a diagram illustrating another example of the characteristic effects performed on the screen of the liquid crystal display g5 of the pachinko gaming machine g1 according to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 7-7, the specific effect g70 may be executed during the special symbol variation display (decorative display g51 variation display). Since the special symbol and the normal symbol can vary independently, the normal symbol may vary during the special symbol variation display, and the specific effect g70 may be performed. When a specific effect is performed during the special symbol fluctuation display, as shown in FIG. 7-7, an identification display other than the above-mentioned identification display g71 of “open” and “x” (for example, “extreme heat” is written). May be displayed. The identification display g71 written as “extreme heat” suggests the result of the special symbol determination. In addition, a plurality of types of identification displays g71 are prepared.

  7-8 is a figure which shows an example of the identification display displayed in the specific production performed in the pachinko gaming machine g1 of this embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 7-8, the identification display g71 includes “opportunity”, “pseudo”, “extreme heat”, and “RUSH” in addition to “x” and “open” described above. The identification display “x” indicates a gase, that is, a result that is not advantageous to the player, and indicates that the result of the normal symbol determination is a loss as described above. In addition, the identification display “×” may indicate that the result of the special symbol determination is a loss. The identification display “open” indicates that the result of the normal symbol determination is per long opening, and that the electric tulip g17 (second start opening g12) is long open.

  The identification “opportunity” indicates the result of the special symbol determination. Specifically, the identification display “opportunity” indicates more than the normal reach effect among the reach effects using the decorative design g51. When the identification display “opportunity” stops, an effect more than the normal reach effect is performed. “Direction more than normal reach production” means production where the reliability (expectation: probability) that is a big hit is more than normal reach production. When the identification display “opportunity” stops, the probability that a jackpot will be notified thereafter is relatively low.

  Here, the reach effect is an effect in which, for example, the same kind of decorative design is stopped in the left region g51a and the right region g51c, and the decorative design is variably displayed in the middle region g51b. This is an effect that causes the player to expect the decorative symbol to stop in the middle region g51b and become a big hit. The reach production includes, for example, a normal reach production and a long reach production. The normal reach production is a reach production with a relatively short production time, and is a production with relatively low reliability that is a big hit. The long reach production is a reach production with a relatively long production time, and is a production having a relatively high reliability (expected degree) as a big hit.

  The identification display “pseudo” suggests the result of the special symbol determination. Specifically, the identification display “pseudo” indicates a pseudo continuous notice effect using the decorative design g51. The pseudo continuous notice effect is an effect in which the effect that the decorative symbol g51 fluctuates and stops is performed a predetermined number of times in one special symbol variation. Here, “the decorative design g51 stops in a pseudo manner” is a state in which the decorative design g51 is not completely stopped and slightly fluctuates in such a manner that the player can recognize that it has stopped. When the pseudo continuous notice effect is performed, the decorative symbol g51 fluctuates and then stops in a pseudo manner, and then fluctuates again. While the quasi-continuous notice effect is being performed, the variation display of the special symbol is continuously performed, and the fourth symbol g61 (or g62) is also variably displayed.

  Further, the identification display “Intense heat” indicates the result of the special symbol determination. Specifically, the identification display “Intense heat” suggests more than a long reach effect. The identification display “Intense heat” has a relatively high reliability for the jackpot, and for example, the jackpot is subsequently notified with a probability of 60%.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7-8, an identification display “RUSH” is prepared. The identification display “RUSH” suggests the result of the special symbol determination. Specifically, the identification display “RUSH” means that the jackpot is confirmed, and means a rank-up bonus (RUB) jackpot that is a specific jackpot.

  FIGS. 7-9 is a figure which shows an example of the flow of the specific production using identification display "RUSH". As shown in FIG. 7-9, when the specific effect g70 is started during the change of the special symbol, the identification display “x”, the identification display “open”, the identification display “RUSH”, and the identification display are displayed as the identification display g71. “Intense heat” is displayed. The highlighted display g72 moves on these identification displays as time passes (FIG. 7-9 (A)).

  When a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the specific effect g70, the highlighting g72 stops on the identification display “RUSH” (FIG. 7-9 (B)). As a result, it is informed that the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot, specifically, a specific type of jackpot, and the decorative symbol g51 stops in a jackpot mode (FIG. 7-9 (C)). . Thereafter, a jackpot game is performed to open the grand prize opening g13B (corresponding to the second big prize opening a125B in FIG. 1-1).

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the specific effect g70 can suggest the result of the normal symbol determination and can also indicate the result of the special symbol determination. In the present embodiment, the specific effect g70 may be triggered by a change in a normal symbol and may be triggered by a change in a special symbol.

  FIGS. 7-10 is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect performed with the fluctuation | variation of a normal symbol as a trigger. FIGS. 7-11 is a figure which shows an example of the specific production performed by the change of a special symbol as a trigger.

  As shown in FIG. 7-10, the specific effect g70 is a normal symbol change start command (described later by the effect control unit g130 (corresponding to the effect control unit a300 in FIGS. 1-3)) according to the change of the normal symbol. (Depending on receipt). Here, the specific effect triggered by the variation of the normal symbol may be referred to as a general symbol specific effect.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 7-10 (A), the specific effect A may be executed simultaneously with the start of the change of the normal symbol, triggered by the change of the normal symbol. The specific effect A ends in response to the end of the variation of the normal symbol. In the specific effect A, as described above, after the effect of variably displaying the plurality of identification displays g71 is performed, the effect that any one identification display g71 is stopped and displayed is performed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7-10 (B), the specific effect B may be executed after a predetermined time from the start of the change of the normal symbol, triggered by the change of the normal symbol. The specific effect B ends in response to the end of the variation of the normal symbol.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 7-11, the specific effect g70 can be performed in response to a change in the special symbol (in response to the effect control unit g130 receiving a special symbol change start command). is there. A specific effect triggered by a change in a special symbol may be referred to as a special figure specific effect. As shown in FIGS. 7-11, the specific effect C may be executed after a predetermined time from the start of the change of the special symbol, triggered by the change of the special symbol.

  Here, the special symbol is used for winning a game ball at the first start opening g11 (corresponding to the first start opening a121 in FIG. 1-1) or the second start opening g12 (corresponding to the second start opening a122 in FIG. 1). The normal symbol changes according to the passage of the game ball to the first gate g15 (corresponding to the left gate a124L in the figure) or the second gate g16 (corresponding to the right gate a124R in the figure). . For this reason, the special symbol and the normal symbol fluctuate independently, and the execution condition of the special figure specific effect triggered by the fluctuation of the special symbol and the execution condition of the universal figure specific effect triggered by the fluctuation of the normal symbol are It can be established at the same time.

  7-12 and FIG. 7-13 are specific cases in which the execution conditions of special figure specific effects triggered by changes in special symbols and the execution conditions of special figure specific effects triggered by changes in ordinary symbols are simultaneously established. It is a figure which shows an example of execution control of production.

  As shown in FIG. 7-12, when the execution condition of the special figure specific effect triggered by the change of the special symbol and the execution condition of the universal figure specific effect triggered by the change of the normal symbol are satisfied at the same time, the pachinko game The machine g1 preferentially executes a special figure specifying effect triggered by a change in the special symbol. In other words, in this case, the pachinko gaming machine g1 executes only the special figure specific effect, and does not execute the usual figure specific effect. In the special figure specific effect, as shown in FIGS. 7-9, the specific effect g70 including the identification display “RUSH” is performed.

  More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 7-13, the pachinko gaming machine g1 determines whether or not to execute a special figure specific effect when it is determined that, for example, a specific jackpot at the start of the variation of the special symbol. . When it is determined that the special symbol specific effect is to be executed, the execution of the special symbol specific effect based on the normal symbol that has started to fluctuate before the variation of the special symbol is terminated is prohibited.

  Thus, by preferentially executing the special figure specific effect triggered by the change of the special symbol, it is possible to reliably execute the effect as to whether or not the jackpot game that is more advantageous for the player is performed.

  FIGS. 7-14 is a figure which shows the type of jackpot of the pachinko gaming machine g1 of this embodiment. As shown in the figure, in this embodiment, there are a plurality of jackpot symbols indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot, and the type of jackpot game differs depending on each jackpot symbol.

Note that jackpot symbol A and jackpot symbol B in FIG. 7-14 correspond to “2 per 16R length (RUB) (high probability time shortening)” in the first embodiment (see FIG. 1-17-2).
The jackpot symbol C in FIG. 7-14 corresponds to “1 per 16R length (high probability short time)” (see FIG. 1-17-2), and the jackpot symbol D in FIG. Corresponds to “high probability short time” or “2 per 4R length (medium probability short time)” (see FIG. 1-17-2).
In addition, the big prize opening (lower attacker) g13A in FIG. 7-14 corresponds to the first big prize opening a125A (see FIG. 1-1) described in the first embodiment. In addition, a special winning opening (upper attacker) g13B in FIG. 7-14 corresponds to the second large winning opening a125B (see FIG. 1-1) described in the first embodiment.

  For example, in the first special symbol display g41 (corresponding to the first special symbol display a221 in FIGS. 1-3) or the second special symbol display g42 (corresponding to the second special symbol display a222 in the same figure) When A stops, a rank-up bonus (RUB) jackpot is won, and 16 round games are performed in which the big winning opening g13B is controlled to be released. For example, a round game of one round is performed until 30 seconds elapses after the grand prize opening g13B is opened or until nine game balls are won in the big prize opening g13B, and 16 rounds (represented as “R”). ) Is a big hit game. Further, when the jackpot symbol B stops, it becomes a rank-up bonus (RUB) jackpot and four rounds (4R) of controlling the opening of the jackpot g13B are performed (4R).

  During the jackpot game of RUB jackpot, there is an effect that the round game is played 16 times or 4 times, and the player is expected to expect 16R jackpot game. In the RUB jackpot, the “RUSH” symbol (see FIG. 7-9) is stopped as the decorative symbol g51, and the player plays a 16R RUB jackpot at the time of jackpot notification in the performance performed on the liquid crystal display g5, or a 4R RUB. It is not easy to identify whether it is a big hit.

  The identification display “RUSH” in the special figure specific effect described above is an identification display indicating a RUB jackpot (a jackpot in jackpot symbol A or jackpot symbol B).

  When the jackpot symbol C stops, the 16R jackpot is reached and the round game for controlling the opening of the big winning opening g13A is performed 16 times (16R). Further, when the jackpot symbol D stops, 4R jackpot is achieved, and the round game for controlling the opening of the big winning opening g13A is performed four times (4R).

  When the jackpot symbol C or the jackpot symbol D is stopped, three number symbols (designs in which any number from “1” to “9”) are arranged as the decorative symbol g51 are stopped. For example, when three “7” symbols and “3” symbols are arranged, it indicates a big hit of 16R. If there are three other numeric symbols, it indicates a big hit of 4R. Even if three numeric symbols other than the “7” symbol and the “3” symbol are gathered, the promotion effect to 16 rounds is performed during the jackpot game, and it is notified that it is a 16R jackpot game. Good.

  Even if the advantage differs between the case where the special symbol determination is performed based on the winning at the first starting port g11 and the case where the special symbol determination is performed based on the winning at the second starting port g12. Good. Specifically, the case where the special symbol determination is performed based on the winning at the second starting port g12 is 16R than the case where the special symbol determination is performed based on the winning at the first starting port g11. The probability of a big hit (a big hit in jackpot symbol A or jackpot symbol C) may be high.

  Next, the relationship between the symbol stopped by the special symbol display, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the special symbol specific effect will be described. FIGS. 7-15 is a figure which shows the relationship between the symbol stopped by the special symbol display, the variation pattern of the special symbol when the symbol stops, and the special symbol specific effect.

  As shown in FIG. 7-15, when it is determined that the jackpot symbol A is to be stopped in the special symbol determination, for example, the variation pattern P1 (variation time 30 seconds), the variation pattern P2 (variation) Time 60 seconds) and a fluctuation pattern P3 (fluctuation time 90 seconds) are selected. In addition to this, when the jackpot symbol A stops, a large number of variation patterns may be selectable. Further, when it is determined that the jackpot symbol B is to be stopped in the special symbol determination, any one of the variation patterns P1 to P3 is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol.

  For example, when the fluctuation pattern P1 is selected, the above-described special figure specific effect can be executed, and when the special figure specific effect is executed, the identification display “RUSH” is displayed in a variable manner. RUSH "stops.

  When it is determined that the jackpot symbol C is to be stopped in the special symbol determination, the variation pattern P1 is not selected and the variation pattern P11 or P12 is selected. When it is determined that the jackpot symbol D is to be stopped in the special symbol determination, the variation pattern P1 is not selected, and the variation pattern P11 or P12 is selected.

  When it is determined that the jackpot symbol C or the jackpot symbol D is to be stopped, the variation pattern P2 or P3 may be selectable, but the variation pattern P1 is not selected. In addition to the variation patterns shown in FIGS. 7-15, a large number of variation patterns that can be selected when each jackpot symbol stops may be prepared.

  Further, when it is determined that the special symbol is lost, for example, the fluctuation pattern P100 (fluctuation time 20 seconds), the fluctuation pattern P101 (fluctuation time 30 seconds), the fluctuation pattern P102 (fluctuation time 2 seconds), the fluctuation pattern P103 (fluctuation) Any one of a variation pattern P104 (a variation time of 12 seconds), a variation pattern P105 (a variation time of 60 seconds), and the like is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 7-15, when the fluctuation pattern P100 or the fluctuation pattern P101 is selected, the special figure specific effect can be executed, and when the special figure specific effect is executed, the identification display “RUSH” is displayed. The above-mentioned specific effect including is performed. However, when the variation pattern P100 or the variation pattern P101 is selected, the identification display “RUSH” does not stop finally.

  As described above, the special figure specifying effect can be executed when a specific variation pattern P1, P100, or P101 is selected. Further, when a specific jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol A or a jackpot symbol B) among a plurality of jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed, the special symbol specific effect can be executed. In other words, when it is determined that a specific jackpot game among a plurality of types of jackpot games is to be performed, a special figure specific effect can be executed.

  Here, the details of the special figure specific effect triggered by the change of the special symbol will be described with reference to FIGS. 7-16. FIGS. 7-16 is a figure which shows an example of the special figure specific production triggered by the change of the special symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 7-16, it is assumed that the special symbol determination result is a jackpot in the jackpot symbol A at the start of variation of the special symbol, and the variation pattern P1 is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol. Since the variation pattern P1 is selected, it is assumed that the special figure specific effect can be executed and it is determined that the special figure specific effect is executed. The special figure specifying effect is a standby period for a predetermined period after the start of variation of the special symbol, and is not executed immediately after the start of variation.

  On the other hand, in response to the start of the variation of the special symbol, a special symbol variation effect that varies the decorative symbol g51 is performed on the liquid crystal display g5. Specifically, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the three areas g51a to g51c of the liquid crystal display g5 from the start of the variation of the special symbols to before the reach is established. The period from the start of the change to the establishment of reach is at least 13 seconds, and during this period, various notice effects are performed in addition to the decorative display variable display effect.

  When at least 13 seconds have elapsed since the start of the change of the special symbol, for example, the same type of decorative symbol stops in the left and right regions (region g51a and region g51c), and reach is established. Thereafter, a reach effect is performed to change the decorative design in the middle region g51b. As shown in FIG. 7-16, the special figure specifying effect triggered by the change of the special symbol is performed after the reach is established. Specifically, a specific effect g70 for variably displaying a plurality of identification displays including the identification display “RUSH” shown in FIG. 7-9 is performed.

  In this way, the special figure specifying effect triggered by the change in the special symbol is performed after the reach is established, and is not performed before the reach is established. Further, the identification display “RUSH” is used only in the special figure specific effect. For this reason, the identification display “RUSH” is used only in the specific effect that starts after the reach is established, and is not used in the specific effect that is started before the reach is established.

  When a variation pattern other than the specific variation pattern (variation pattern P1, variation pattern P100, variation pattern P101) for executing the special figure specific effect is selected, the normal figure specific effect is triggered by the variation of the normal symbol. Is called. In the general symbol specific effect triggered by the change of the normal symbol, an effect based on the result of the special symbol determination may be performed.

  FIGS. 7-17 is a figure which shows an example in the case where the production | presentation which suggests the result of a special symbol determination is performed in the common figure specific production triggered by the fluctuation | variation of a normal symbol.

  As shown in FIGS. 7-17, first, it is assumed that, for example, it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot symbol C when the special symbol starts to change. When the jackpot symbol C is a jackpot, the variation pattern P1 is not selected, so that the special symbol specific effect is not performed in response to the variation of the special symbol. Therefore, the execution of the special symbol specific effect triggered by the change of the normal symbol is not prohibited.

  Assume that the normal symbol starts to change after the special symbol starts to change. At the start of normal symbol variation, the result of the special symbol determination relating to the variation of the special symbol already started is referred to. Based on the result of this special symbol determination, the contents of the special figure specific effect triggered by the fluctuation of the normal symbol are determined, and the special figure specific effect is started according to the fluctuation of the normal symbol. For example, the specific effect including the identification display “Intense heat” is started, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the identification display “Intense heat” is stopped and displayed.

  In this way, in the general symbol specific effect triggered by the variation of the normal symbol, the effect of stopping the identification display “extreme heat” suggesting the result of the special symbol determination is performed. In addition, the specific effect of stopping the identification display “opportunity” and the identification display “pseudo” shown in FIG.

  Next, the execution time of the general figure specific effect triggered by the fluctuation of the normal symbol will be described. FIGS. 7-18 is a figure which shows an example of the common figure specific effect in the case of stopping, after a normal symbol fluctuates during the fluctuation period of a special symbol. FIGS. 7-19 is a figure which shows an example of the common figure specific effect in case a normal symbol fluctuates across the time of the change start of a special symbol, and / or the time of a change stop.

  As shown in Fig.7-18, when the normal symbol starts to change during the special symbol change period from when the special symbol changes until it stops, the common symbol specification triggered by the change of the normal symbol The production starts at the timing of starting the variation of the normal symbol and ends at the timing of stopping the variation of the normal symbol. That is, the variation time of the normal symbol is 12 seconds, and the usual figure specific effect is also performed for 12 seconds.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7-19, when the normal symbol starts to change during the special symbol change period and the normal symbol stops after the special symbol change ends, The time is shorter than the fluctuation time. Specifically, the normal symbol specific effect is performed for 6 seconds in the latter half of the normal symbol variation time of 12 seconds.

  In FIG. 7-19, when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol crosses when the special symbol starts to change and / or when the fluctuation stops, the execution time of the special symbol specific effect is shortened. You may set the execution start time of a usual figure specific effect so that it may not straddle the time of a change start and / or a change stop.

  FIGS. 7-20 is a figure which shows the other example of the common figure specific effect in case a normal symbol fluctuates across the time of the change start of a special symbol, and / or a change stop. As shown in FIG. 7-20, when the normal symbol starts to change during the change of the special symbol, when the normal symbol stops after the special symbol stops, the special design specific effect is performed in the latter half of the normal symbol change period. If it does, the special figure specific effect may be in execution at the stop timing of the special symbol. In this case, if the general symbol specific effect is performed in the first half of the normal symbol variation period, the special symbol specific effect can be ended before the special symbol stops. Therefore, in this case, the common figure specific effect may be executed in the first half of the normal symbol fluctuation period. Moreover, the execution start time and the execution time of the special symbol specific effect may be adjusted so as not to cross over when the special symbol starts to change and / or when the change stops.

  In this way, when the normal symbol changes during the change period of the special symbol and stops, the usual symbol specific effect of the same time as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is performed. If the normal symbol fluctuates during the special symbol fluctuation period, and the normal symbol stops after the special symbol fluctuation period ends, the special symbol specific effect is performed for a shorter time than the normal symbol fluctuation period. Is called. In this way, when the variation of the normal symbol straddles when the variation of the special symbol starts and / or when the variation stops, the execution time of the special symbol specific effect is shortened, so that when the variation of the special symbol starts or stops It is possible to reduce the frequency at which the usual figure specific effect is performed across the.

  As described above, the specific effect may indicate the result of the normal symbol determination or may indicate the result of the special symbol determination. In addition, the specific effect may be executed in response to a change in a normal symbol, or may be executed in response to a change in a special symbol. For this reason, when the specific effect is executed, the player can expect to be a long hit in the normal symbol determination, and can also be expected to be a big hit in the special symbol determination. However, if the change of the special symbol ends during execution of the specific effect, it becomes easy for the player to guess that the specific effect is not based on the result of the special symbol determination. You cannot have a sense of expectation that the result of symbol determination is a big hit.

  For this reason, in the present embodiment, if the normal symbol does not stop during the fluctuation period of the special symbol, the execution time of the special symbol specific effect is shortened and the normal symbol is changed during the fluctuation period of the special symbol. Make certain productions easier to execute. Thereby, when a specific effect is executed, the player can have a sense of expectation for the jackpot and a sense of expectation that the electric tulip g17 will be opened for a long time.

  FIGS. 7-21 is a figure which shows an example of the production pattern of a specific production. As shown in FIGS. 7-21, the patterns of specific effects include patterns 1 to 6 and post-reach patterns 1 to 3.

  For example, in the pattern 1, for example, as the configuration of the identification display g71 shown in FIG. 7-6, the identification display “×”, the identification display “open”, the identification display “×”, the identification display “open”, and the identification display are sequentially performed from the left. Five identifications of “x” are used. In FIG. 7-6, four identification displays are displayed for the sake of space, but actually, for example, five identification displays are displayed. In pattern 1, in such a configuration of the identification display g71, five identification displays are variably displayed by moving the highlight display g72, and the highlight display g72 is displayed as an identification display “x” or “depending on the result of normal symbol determination”. The identification display stops.

  In the pattern 2, the identification display g71 is composed of five identifications in order from the left: identification display “×”, identification display “open”, identification display “×”, identification display “open”, and identification display “opportunity”. A display is used. In the pattern 2, in the configuration of the identification display g71, five identification displays are variably displayed by moving the highlight display g72, and the highlight display is performed based on the result of the normal symbol determination and / or the special symbol determination. The g72 stops at the identification display “×”, the identification display “open”, or the identification display “opportunity”. For example, when the highlight display g72 stops in the identification display “open”, it means that the result of the normal symbol determination is per long release, and the electric tulip g17 is long open. Further, when the highlighting g72 is stopped in the identification display “opportunity”, the result of the special symbol determination is suggested, and it is suggested that the special symbol determination is a big hit with a predetermined probability. Further, for example, in the pattern 3, when the rightmost identification display is “extreme heat” and the highlighted display g 72 is stopped in the identification display “extreme heat”, the jackpot is greater than the case where the identification display is “opportunity”. High reliability.

  Further, for example, in the pattern 6, as the configuration of the identification display g71, the identification display “x”, the identification display “opportunity”, the identification display “x”, the identification display “extreme heat”, and the identification display “pseudo” are sequentially arranged from the left. Five identifications are used. In pattern 6, based on the result of the special symbol determination, the highlight display g72 stops at the identification display “X”, the identification display “opportunity”, the identification display “extreme heat”, or the identification display “pseudo”.

  The specific effects of Patterns 1 to 6 shown in FIGS. 7-21 are ordinary graphic specific effects that are performed with the change of the normal symbol as a trigger.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 7-21, in the post-reach patterns 1 to 3, the specific effect of the configuration including the identification display “RUSH” is performed as the third identification display from the left. The specific effects of the post-reach patterns 1 to 3 are performed only when the above-described specific variation pattern (variation pattern P1, P100, or P101) is selected. That is, the specific effects of the post-reach patterns 1 to 3 are special graphic specific effects that are performed in response to changes in special symbols. When the highlighting g72 stops at the identification display “RUSH”, the result of the special symbol determination is The jackpot symbol A or jackpot symbol B is a jackpot (RUB jackpot).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the special symbol specific effect triggered by the change of the normal symbol and the special symbol specific effect triggered by the change of the special symbol are performed in the same effect mode, and the result of the normal symbol determination Alternatively, an effect suggesting the result of the special symbol determination is performed. By performing such a specific effect, the result of the normal symbol determination or the special symbol determination can be suggested, and interest can be improved.

  In addition, about the content of the production | presentation which suggests the result of special symbol determination, for example, jackpot which shifts to a high probability state after jackpot game (for example, 1 per 16R length, 2 per 16R length, 1 per 4R length (FIGS. 1-17-2) )) Is determined, a jackpot that shifts to a medium probability state (for example, 2 per 4R length (see FIG. 1-17-2)) is determined, and a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state (for example, per 16R length). 3 (see FIG. 1-17-2)) may be determined, and the state of the probability of shifting after the jackpot game may be related.

  Next, an example of effect control will be described with reference to FIGS. 7-40.

  As shown in FIG. 7-40, according to the establishment of the start condition (the game ball has won the first start port g11 or the second start port g12, and neither the big hit game nor the special symbol change) The special symbol starts to fluctuate in the special symbol display (the first special symbol display g41 or the second special symbol display g42). During this special symbol change, the normal symbol changes depending on the establishment of another starting condition (the game ball passes through the gate g15 or g16 and the electric tulip g17 is not open or the normal symbol is not changing). Start (common figure fluctuation 1).

  In this case, the variation time of the normal symbol is 12 seconds, and the normal symbol stops by the end of the variation time of the special symbol, so that the 12-second regular symbol specific effect is performed at the same timing as the start of variation of the normal symbol. Is called. It should be noted that the general symbol specific effect is not necessarily executed, and it is determined whether or not to execute based on the result of the normal symbol determination. In this case, there may be an effect that suggests the result of the special symbol determination based on the result of the special symbol determination related to the special symbol being changed. Thereafter, the normal figure variation 1 ends, and the special symbol variation ends.

  Next, the second variation of the special symbol starts, and the second variation of the normal symbol starts during the variation (ordinary variation 2). The variation time of the second special symbol is relatively short, and the variation of the special symbol ends during the variation of the normal symbol. For this reason, in the normal map variation 2, the general map specific effect is set short, and the normal map specific effect is performed only in the latter half of the normal symbol variation period. Thereafter, the normal map change 2 ends.

  Next, while the special symbol is not fluctuating, the third ordinary symbol variation starts (ordinary symbol variation 3). In this case, the time for the usual figure specific effect is set to 12 seconds, and the usual figure specific effect for 12 seconds is performed. Even if the special symbol fluctuates during this time, the time and content of the general symbol specific effect determined at the start of the variation of the normal symbol are not changed. After that, the normal symbol stops and the special symbol also stops.

  After that, the special symbol variation is started (special variation A). In response to the start of the variation of the special symbol, the variation effect using the decorative symbol g51 is started. Further, at the start of the variation of the special symbol, it is determined that the jackpot symbol A is a big hit, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined to be the specific variation pattern (variation pattern P1). In addition, it is determined that the special figure specific effect is executed at the start of fluctuation. Even if the normal symbol starts to change during the change of the special symbol, it is determined that the special symbol specific effect is to be executed. Therefore, the general symbol specific effect is not executed in response to the change of the normal symbol.

  When a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the special figure variation A, reach is established. The special figure specific effect is started at a predetermined timing after the reach is established. In the special figure specific effect, the variable display effect including the identification display “RUSH” is performed, and the identification display “RUSH” stops after a predetermined time. Thereafter, the jackpot game is started.

  As described above, the effect control by the effect control unit g130 is performed based on the command from the game control unit g100 (corresponding to the game control unit a200 in FIG. 1-3). In the present embodiment, the special figure specifying effect as described above is performed based on a special symbol change start command from the game control unit g100. Further, based on the normal symbol change start command from the game control unit g100, the usual figure specific effect is performed.

  Specifically, it is determined whether or not to perform the specific effect g70 (common figure specific effect) based on the normal symbol change start command transmitted from the game control unit g100 in response to the start of normal symbol change. When it is determined that the effect g70 is to be performed, a variable effect using the identification display g71 is performed as the specific effect g70. Also, based on the special symbol change start command transmitted from the game control unit g100 in response to the start of the special symbol change, it is determined whether or not to perform the specific effect g70 (special effect specific effect). When it is determined to be performed, a variation effect using the identification display g71 is performed as the specific effect g70.

  When it is decided to perform a specific effect triggered by a special symbol change, even if it is decided to perform a specific effect triggered by a normal symbol change, the specific effect triggered by a special symbol change However, it is preferentially performed over a specific effect triggered by a change in normal symbols. Thereby, even if the special symbol and the normal symbol fluctuate at the same time, the result of the special symbol determination can be notified by the specific effect. It should be noted that the specific effect triggered by the change of the normal symbol may be preferentially executed over the specific effect triggered by the change of the special symbol. That is, when it is determined to execute both the specific effect triggered by the change of the special symbol and the specific effect triggered by the change of the normal symbol, either one may be prioritized.

  Moreover, although the said specific production | presentation is performed with the fluctuation | variation of a normal symbol as a trigger, when it determines with a big jackpot in a specific jackpot symbol in the result of special symbol determination, it is performed with the fluctuation | variation of a special symbol as a trigger. The jackpot symbol determines the type of jackpot (16R jackpot or 4R jackpot that opens the jackpot g13B). For this reason, the specific jackpot type can be notified by the specific effect.

  In addition, the specific effect is performed in response to a change in the normal symbol, but when a specific variation pattern is selected as a result of the special symbol determination, the specific effect is performed in response to the change in the special symbol. Thereby, a specific effect can be performed according to various conditions, the execution pattern of the effect can be prevented from being simplified, and the player can be prevented from getting bored.

  In addition, the above-mentioned specific effects that are performed when a normal symbol fluctuates are performed only for the normal symbol variation time if the normal symbol fluctuates without straddling the start and / or stop timing of the special symbol. When the normal symbol fluctuates across the stage, the production time is shortened. Thereby, the frequency with which the special symbol starts and / or stops during execution of the specific effect can be reduced.

  Further, the specific effect including the identification display “RUSH” is performed after a predetermined timing (for example, reach establishment timing) during the change of the special symbol, and is not performed before the predetermined timing. That is, the identification display “RUSH” appears only as an identification display during a specific performance after a predetermined timing. For this reason, when the specific effect is executed after the predetermined timing and the identification display “RUSH” appears, the player can be expected to stop at the identification display “RUSH”.

  The specific effect including the identification display “RUSH” may be performed before reaching and not performed after reaching. That is, the specific effect including the identification display “RUSH” is performed before or after the predetermined timing during the change of the special symbol, and the specific effect including no identification display “RUSH” is performed on the other side. It may be configured as follows.

[Modification]
In addition, this invention is not limited to the said embodiment, The following forms may be sufficient.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, four types of jackpots (16R jackpot that opens the big prize opening g13A, 4R jackpot that opens the big prize opening g13A, 16R jackpot that opens the big prize opening g13B, and the big prize opening g13B is opened. 4R jackpot) is prepared, but the type of jackpot is not limited to this. In the above embodiment, four types of jackpot symbols are prepared corresponding to the four types of jackpots. In other embodiments, jackpot symbols and jackpot types may be associated in many-to-one correspondence. That is, a plurality of jackpot symbols for determining a certain jackpot type may be prepared, and a plurality of other jackpot symbols for determining another jackpot type may be prepared.

  Further, the aspect of the specific effect is not limited to the example described above, and the specific effect may be an effect of any other aspect.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, when the result of special symbol determination is a jackpot, the game machine which changes to a probability change game state according to a jackpot symbol was assumed. In the gaming machine of the other embodiment, when a big hit is made, when a predetermined winning opening (V winning opening) is opened during the big winning game according to the big winning symbol and the game ball wins the V winning opening. , It may be configured to shift to a probable gaming state. In such a gaming machine, depending on the type of jackpot symbol, the V prize opening is long open or short open during the jackpot game, and when the game is opened long, the game ball wins the V prize opening and short opens. It is configured not to win almost. In such a gaming machine, when the V winning award is won, the game proceeds to the probability variation gaming state, and when the certain probability variation gaming state continues for a predetermined period (the number of special symbol fluctuations is a predetermined number), Return to gaming state. In such a gaming machine, the above-mentioned specific effect may be executed when it is determined that the V prize opening is a big hit that is long open.

  Note that, for example, as described above, the probability variation gaming state that shifts after the jackpot game when winning in the V winning opening can be exemplified by either the medium probability state or the high probability state. Furthermore, if one of the plurality of winning openings (for example, the first V winning opening, the second V winning opening) wins one of the first V winning openings, it shifts to a medium probability state after the jackpot game, and if winning the other 2 V winning opening, the big hit You may comprise so that it may transfer to a high probability state after a game.

  Further, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine g1 described in the above embodiment is merely an example, and it is needless to say that the present invention can be realized with other configurations. Further, the order of processing, the set value, the threshold value used for determination, etc. in the flowcharts described above are merely examples, and the present invention can be realized with other orders and values without departing from the scope of the present invention. Needless to say.

[Configuration of gaming machine according to the present invention and its effects]
As described above, the gaming machine according to the present invention may have the following configuration. The parentheses are merely examples.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention allows a special game (opening of the big winning opening g13A or g13B) according to the establishment of the first starting condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting opening g11 or the second starting opening g12). The special game determining means for determining whether or not to execute the special game and the special game by stopping the first symbol display means after changing the first symbol in response to the establishment of the first start condition. The special symbol control means for notifying the determination result and the establishment of the second starting condition that can be established independently of the first starting condition (passing of the game ball to the gate g15 or 16) A predetermined game determination means for performing a predetermined game determination as to whether or not to execute a predetermined game (opening of the second start opening g12) different from the game, and a second symbol display means according to the establishment of the second start condition By stopping after changing the second pattern And a second symbol control means for informing the result of the predetermined game determination, and an effect control means for controlling the predetermined effect, wherein the effect control means provides a specific effect according to the variation of the first symbol. It is determined whether or not to execute, and when it is determined to execute, the first specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect and whether or not to execute the specific effect according to the variation of the second symbol If it is determined to execute the specific effect by the second specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect, and the first specific effect executing means and the second specific effect executing means, Priority control means for prioritizing any one of the specific effect by the first specific effect executing means and the specific effect by the second specific effect executing means.

  According to the above configuration, the specific effect can be executed according to the variation of the first symbol, and the specific effect can be executed according to the variation of the second symbol. When executing a specific effect according to the variation of the first symbol, priority is given to the specific effect according to the variation of the first symbol even if it is determined to execute the specific effect according to the variation of the second symbol. Can be executed automatically.

[Eighth embodiment]
An eighth embodiment will be described.
Here, with conventional gaming machines, a variation effect corresponding to the symbol variation is executed during the symbol variation, and a jackpot effect corresponding to the jackpot game is performed during the jackpot game. There was a completely different production during the game. For this reason, it cannot be said that an effective production that makes the player feel the relevance between the production during the symbol variation and the production during the jackpot game is not performed.
Therefore, the eighth embodiment adopts the following configuration in order to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the presentation during the symbol variation and during the jackpot game.

That is, the gaming machine (h1) according to the eighth embodiment includes an operable operating means (h26), and determines whether or not to execute an advantageous special game according to the establishment of the starting condition. A game machine that executes the special game according to the result of the determination, and the symbol display control means (h101, h) displays the symbol indicating the determination result of the special game after the symbols are variably displayed on the symbol display means. Sh316) and a first effect instructing to perform an operation at a timing related to the output effect sound while outputting the effect sound under a predetermined condition during the symbol variation display in the symbol display means. Following the stop of the first effect executing means (h140, Sh110) to be executed and the symbol indicating that it is determined that the special game is executed in the symbol variation when the first effect is executed. During the special game to be performed, a second effect executing means (h140, Sh125) for outputting a production sound and executing a second production instructing to perform an operation at a timing related to the outputted production sound is provided. Prepare.
Hereinafter, a specific description will be given with reference to the drawings having the drawing numbers including “FIG. 8-” (hereinafter also referred to as FIG. 8). For the eighth embodiment, the drawing of the first embodiment (FIG. 1) and other embodiments may be referred to.

[Direction performed for each type of jackpot]
The effects performed in the pachinko gaming machine h1 (corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine a100 in FIG. 1-1) in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-6 to 8-15. FIG. 8-6 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between the type of jackpot and the effect when it is determined that the jackpot is in the normal gaming state.

In addition, per 16R probability variation in FIG. 8-6 corresponds to “1 per 16R length (high probability short time)” (see FIG. 1-17-2), and per 4R probability variation in FIG. 8-6 is “1 per 4R length ( Corresponds to “high probability short time” or “2 per 4R length (medium probability short time)” (see FIG.
Further, the 16R probability variation (RUB) in FIG. 8-6 corresponds to “2 per 16R length (RUB) (high probability time shortening)” in the first embodiment (see FIG. 1-17-2).
In addition, the first big winning opening (lower right) in FIG. 8-6 corresponds to the first big winning opening a125A (see FIG. 1-1) described in the first embodiment. Moreover, the 2nd big winning opening (blade attacker) in FIG. 8-6 is corresponded to the 2nd big winning opening a125B (refer FIG. 1-1) demonstrated in the 1st form example.

  As shown in FIG. 8-6, the 16R probability variation and the 4R probability variation are jackpots using the first big prize opening h13 (corresponding to the first big prize opening a125A in FIG. 1-1). In the case of these jackpots, during the symbol change, after reaching various reach effects such as SP reach effects and SPSP reach effects, the fact that the jackpot has been won and the type of jackpot are notified. In the jackpot game following the symbol change, the player selects a video during the first long-opening round game and the second round game is started. A video is played back.

  In this way, when 16R probability variation or 4R probability variation is reached, different effects are performed during symbol variation and jackpot game.

  On the other hand, the 16R probability variation (RUB) and the 4R probability variation (RUB) are jackpots using the second big prize opening h19 (corresponding to the second big prize opening a125B in FIG. 1-1). In the case of these big wins, during the symbol change, a game production is performed that causes the player to operate the production button h26 (corresponding to the production button a161 in FIG. 1-1). Is notified. In the jackpot game following the symbol variation, a game effect of the same type as that during the symbol variation is performed in a form that takes over the reproduction of the game effect moving image and effect sound (music) during the symbol variation. Then, the presence / absence of round promotion is notified by the result notification of the second game.

  In this way, when the 16R probability variation per (RUB) or 4R probability variation per (RUB) is reached, the same kind of game effect is performed during the symbol variation and during the jackpot game.

  FIG. 8-7 is a diagram showing the flow of performance performed during the symbol change to the jackpot game for each type of jackpot. FIG. 8-8 is a screen diagram illustrating a specific example of the effect related to the jackpot using the first big winning opening h13. FIGS. 8-9 and 8-10 are screen views illustrating a selection screen for moving images displayed on the liquid crystal display device h5 (corresponding to the image display unit a114 in FIG. 1-1).

[In the case of a jackpot using the first grand prize opening h13]
Hereinafter, the effects related to the jackpot (the jackpot other than the RUB) using the first jackpot h13 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-7 (A) and FIGS. 8-8 to 8-10.

  When a game ball is won in the first starting port h11 (corresponding to the first starting port a121 in FIG. 1-1) when the game is controlled in the normal gaming state, the first special symbol display h41 (FIG. 1-3) is selected. In the first special symbol display device a221), the variation of the decorative symbols is such that the decorative symbols displayed in three columns on the liquid crystal display device h5 scroll from the top to the bottom. The display is started (see FIG. 8-8 (SA)). Then, when the decorative symbol is pseudo-stopped in the order of the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol on the effective line on the front screen of the liquid crystal display device h5, the reach is established when the different left symbol and right symbol are pseudo-stopped. do not do. In this case, as the lost symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display h41, the breaks are stopped and displayed on the active line.

  On the other hand, when each symbol is pseudo-stopped, if the same decorative symbol is pseudo-stopped on the active line as the left symbol and the right symbol, reach is established (see FIG. 8-8 (SB)), and the liquid crystal display device h5 Then, reach production is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), this reach effect is reproduced on the effective line while playing a reach effect movie (for example, a movie that plays a predetermined story) as a background image. In addition, a reach effect is performed using a decorative symbol that enthuses the player's expectation that the same middle symbol as the left symbol and the right symbol may stop. Further, during the reach production, the production sound corresponding to the video for production of reach production (specifically, music A corresponding to the video for production of reach) is speaker h25 (corresponding to speaker a156 in FIG. 1-1). Is output from.

  Then, when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation display, the jackpot symbol indicating that, for example, 16R probability variation is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display h41, the effective line is displayed. The three decorative symbols that become the same pattern are stopped (see FIG. 8-8 (S-C)). As is apparent from FIGS. 8-8 (SB) and (SC), each of the decorative symbols is displayed largely in the center of the screen of the liquid crystal display device h5 during the reach effect and when the symbols are stopped.

  When the symbol is stopped and displayed in this way, a predetermined opening effect is performed in the opening period of the jackpot game. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 8-7 (A), while playing a moving image for an opening effect (for example, a moving image in which a specific person is celebrating a big hit) as a background image, A right-handed notification is performed together with an effect display for notifying that the player has won a jackpot and the type of jackpot. Specifically, a message such as “Please aim at the right” together with the words “SUPER OO Bonus!” Is superimposed and displayed on the moving image for the opening effect. During the opening effect, an effect sound corresponding to the opening effect moving image being played (specifically, a sound such as “big hit!”) Is output from the speaker h25.

  In this way, when the opening period during which the opening effect is performed ends, a moving image selection screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device h5 during the first long-opening round game (FIGS. 8-7 (A) and 8). -8 (see SD)). During display of the moving image selection screen, a predetermined effect sound (BGM or the like) corresponding to the moving image selection screen is output from the speaker h25.

  As illustrated in FIG. 8-9, the video selection screen includes a list of selectable videos, and the player selects a video to be played by using the cross key h27 (the effect key a162 in FIG. 1-2). And use the effect button h26 to determine (specify). Note that the movie that is being selected (“Movie 1” in FIG. 8-9) is highlighted, and the movie that is currently selected when the effect button h26 is pressed is determined as the movie to be played. The In the present embodiment, the number of moving images that can be selected on the moving image selection screen increases according to the number of consecutive channels (the number of consecutive big hits). Note that the number of videos that can be selected increases regardless of the type of jackpot. FIG. 8-10 shows an example of a video selection screen in a state where the number of continuous channels is larger than the state shown in FIG. 8-9 (third continuous channel), and is exemplified in FIGS. 8-9 and 8-10. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to select a number of moving images corresponding to the number of consecutive channels on the moving image selection screen.

  When a moving image is selected in the first long open round game, in the present embodiment, playback of the selected moving image is started at the start of the second long open round game (FIGS. 8-7 and 8). 8-8 (SE)). In addition, a musical piece that is a production sound corresponding to the selected moving image (in FIG. 8-7, musical piece B different from musical piece A during the reach production) is output from speaker h25. If the video to be played is not determined (specified) in the first round, the video that was selected (highlighted) at the end of the first round and the music corresponding to the video are in the second and subsequent rounds. Played.

  As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), the above moving image is played until the end of the final round. After that, an ending effect is performed in the ending of the jackpot game. In the ending, an ending effect (for example, a display such as “probability change mode entry”) for notifying the player of the effect mode indicating the game state (here, the probability change game state) after the jackpot game is ended is performed. In addition to the ending effect, an ending background moving image and an effect sound (for example, a sound effect) corresponding to the ending background moving image are reproduced (see FIG. 8-7 (A)).

  In the present embodiment, in the case of the jackpot using the first big winning opening h13, the movie selection screen is displayed and the movie is selected regardless of whether the jackpot type is 16R probability variation or 4R probability variation. It becomes possible. However, in another embodiment, in the case of 4R probability variation, the player may not select a moving image. In the case of 4R probability variation, the time for jackpot gaming is shorter than that for 16R probability variation, so if a video is selected in the first round, there is a risk that sufficient time for playing the video during jackpot gaming cannot be secured. Because there is. That is, in the case of 4R probability variation, a preset moving image (and effect sound) may be reproduced from the first round.

  As described above, in the case of a big hit using the first big winning opening h13, different videos are played and different presentations during the period from the change of the symbol to the stop, the opening period, and the period during the big hit game. Sound (music) is played (see FIG. 8-7 (A)). For this reason, even for the overall performance performed using the liquid crystal display device h5, the speaker h25, and the like, the performance is not continuous before and after the start of the jackpot game.

[In the case of a big hit using the second big prize opening h19]
FIGS. 8-11 and FIGS. 8-12 are screen diagrams showing a specific example of the game effect performed during the symbol variation that may win the RUB. 8-12 and FIGS. 8-13 are screen diagrams showing specific examples of the game effects performed during the jackpot game related to the RUB.

  Hereinafter, referring to FIGS. 8-7 (B) and (C) and FIGS. 8-11 to 8-15, the second big prize opening h19 (corresponding to the second big prize opening a125B in FIG. 1-1) is set. An effect related to the jackpot (RUB) to be used will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-6, when the first win is RUB, the first game effect is performed during the symbol variation, and the second game effect is performed during the jackpot game (see FIG. 8-6). The first game effect is an effect for notifying whether or not it is a big hit, and the second game effect has 16 rounds (number of long open round games) performed during the big hit game. It is an effect for notifying whether or not. Although details will be described later, when the first hit is RUB, one background effect (moving sound and effect sound such as music to be BGM) is continuously performed from the time of symbol variation to the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 8-6, with respect to the RUB, a big hit game is performed using the second big prize opening h19 which is a blade-type attacker.

  As a result of the jackpot determination performed in response to the winning of the game ball at the first start opening h11, if there is a possibility of RUB, the first game effect is performed during the symbol change (FIGS. 8-7 ( B) and (C)). Specifically, first, in response to the game ball winning the first starting port h11, the decorative display of the decorative pattern is started on the liquid crystal display device h5, and the three decorations including the middle design suggesting execution of the game effect are displayed. The symbol pseudo-stops on the active line. Thereby, the first game effect is started (see FIGS. 8-11 (SG)). It should be noted that each decorative symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal display device h5 in the same manner as in the case of a big win other than the RUB from when the decorative symbol variable display is started until the decorative symbol suggesting execution of the game effect is pseudo-stopped. Is displayed large in the center of the screen.

  When the first game effect is started, first, as an effect indicating the start of the game, for example, a countdown display until the game start or a display indicating the operation content such as “Press the button in time with the rhythm!” Is performed. Production sound (sound effect) is output in accordance with the display. Subsequently, the first game production is started.

  As illustrated in FIG. 8-12, a game area h61 is provided in a part of the screen area of the liquid crystal display device h5 (here, an area on the lower side of the screen), and the reference button image h62 and movement are provided in the game area h61. A button image h63 is displayed. The reference button image h62 is fixed and displayed at a predetermined position, and the movement button image h63 is displayed so as to move to the right side from the end of the screen (here, the left end) over the reference button image h62. Also, as shown in FIG. 8-12, a message such as “Press in time with the rhythm!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device h5. The game performed here is a so-called rhythm game, and is a game in which an operation (rhythm input operation) is performed with good timing at a timing when the plurality of movement button images h63 sequentially pass over the reference button image h62. Although the operation method in a game is arbitrary, in this embodiment, it is set as operation which depresses production | presentation button h26.

  Although not shown, according to the above operation being performed, the time difference between the operation timing and the timing at which the moving button image h63 passes over the reference button image h62 is evaluated, and the evaluation result is displayed. For example, evaluation results such as “exquisite”, “best”, “good”, and “good” are displayed in the vicinity of the reference button image h62 in order from when the timings of both are close.

  Here, when the first game effect is started, a background video h65 for game effect is reproduced as a background effect, and an effect sound (specifically, music C) corresponding to the background video h65 is reproduced. (See FIGS. 8-7 (B) and (C)). Note that the song C, which is the effect sound for the game effect, is different from the song A and the song B, which are the effect sounds that are reproduced in the case of the jackpot other than the RUB described above. However, in another embodiment, the music piece C may be the same as the music piece A or the music piece B. Further, the movement button image h63 passes over the reference button image h62 at a timing according to the tempo and rhythm of the music piece C that is the production sound. Therefore, the first game is a rhythm game that is operated at a timing that matches the music. As described above, in the present embodiment, during the design variation, the effect sound (music) is output, and the game effect is instructed to perform the operation at the timing related to the output effect sound.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8-12, a gauge h64 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device h5. The gauge h64 is displayed so that the gauge amount (the part of the gauge where the color is changed, which is indicated by the hatched area in FIG. 8-12) increases in accordance with the operation of the rhythm game. Although details will be described later, when the game is successful (when the jackpot is notified), a display is made so that the gauge amount reaches the upper limit. On the other hand, the first game effect is performed under a certain condition even when it is determined that the game is lost in the jackpot determination. In this case, even if the effect button h26 is pressed, the gauge amount does not increase beyond a certain level. Fails.

  During the first game presentation, the decorative symbol h66 is variably displayed in a state where the visibility is lowered. Specifically, after the pseudo stop as described above before the start of the game effect, the decorative symbol moves to the vicinity of the lower right of the screen and is displayed in a semi-transparent manner that is smaller than the case where the reach effect is performed. . This is to prevent the continuity between the effect during the symbol variation and the effect during the jackpot game from being lost. In addition, the decoration symbol h66 is stopped and displayed in a normal visual state (that is, in a non-translucent state) after the end of the first game effect. At this time, the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed are displayed small (that is, in the same size as during the game production) near the end of the screen, as in the game production. In FIG. 8-12, the decorative symbol h66 is displayed on the right side of the reference button image h62. However, the decorative symbol h66 is variably displayed on the back side of the reference button image h62, and the decorative symbol h66 that is changing the symbol is displayed. The visibility may be reduced.

  FIG. 8-13 is a diagram illustrating an example of an image displayed after the image illustrated in FIG. 8-12 when the first game effect is performed. In the first game effect, after a predetermined number of movement button images h63 shown in FIG. 8-12 are moved and displayed, as shown in FIG. 8-13, a continuous hit button image h67 indicating continuous hitting is displayed. The Similarly to the move button image h63, the continuous hit button image h67 is displayed so as to move from the end (left end) of the screen to the right side over the reference button image h62. Although not shown in the figure, the number of operations (the number of consecutive hits) performed while the repeated hit button image h67 passes over the reference button image h62 is displayed in the vicinity of the reference button image h62.

  As described above, in the first game effect, after the player performs an operation (rhythm input operation) at a timing corresponding to the movement of the movement button image h63, the continuous hit button image h67 is displayed on the reference button image h62. The operation of repeatedly striking the effect button h26 (continuous hit input operation) is performed while passing through.

  After the continuous hit button image h67 is displayed, the first game effect is ended, and the result (success / failure) of the game is notified at the end of the symbol variation. That is, when it is determined that the game is lost, the gauge amount of the gauge h64 does not increase to the upper limit, and the game fails. At this time, as an effect of notifying the failure, an effect of displaying characters such as “failure” may be performed. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a RUB, the game is successful and a jackpot game is played.

  When it is determined that the symbol is a RUB, when the symbol variation display ends, a jackpot symbol indicating that the symbol is 16R probability variation (RUB) or 4R probability variation (RUB) is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display h41. As a result, the decorative pattern h60 indicating the RUB is stopped and displayed (see FIGS. 8-11 (SH)). The decorative design h60 has a common display position and display size compared to the decorative design h66 that has been variably displayed, but is stopped and displayed in a non-translucent manner in front of other effect images. This is different from the decorative pattern h66. Thus, after the start of the first game effect, the decorative pattern h66 is displayed so as not to disturb the visibility of the background video for the game. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the continuity between the effect during the symbol variation and the effect during the jackpot game from being impaired.

  In addition, in the opening of the jackpot game following the stop display of the symbol, an opening effect is provided to notify that the number of rounds in the jackpot game is a jackpot (more specifically, RUB) in a manner in which the player cannot recognize the number of rounds. FIG. 8-11 (S-H)). In this opening effect, specifically, a character such as “XXRUSH!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device h5, and a message “Please aim right” is output from the liquid crystal display device h5 and the speaker h25.

  It should be noted that during the decorative display stop display and the opening effect after the game effect is finished, and during the game, the background effect video and effect sound (song C) for the game that is changing the pattern are continuously played ( FIG. 8-7 (B), (C), and FIG. 8-11 (SH)). Even during the jackpot game, the background effect video and the effect sound for the game are continuously played (see FIGS. 8-7 (B) and (C)).

  During the jackpot game, the game background effect video and effect sound are played, and the second game effect is started at a predetermined timing (see FIG. 8-11 (S-I)). The timing at which the second game effect is started may be any timing as long as it is before the fourth round, but in this embodiment, the second game effect is started at the start of the second round. .

  FIGS. 8-14 is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device h5 at the time of the 2nd game production. As shown in FIG. 8-14, at the time of the second game effect, a game area h61 similar to that at the time of the first game effect is provided, and the reference button image h62 and the continuous hit button image h67 are provided in the game area h61. The gauge h64 is displayed on the upper left side of the game area h61. Further, a message such as “continuous hit!” Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device h5. Further, as described above, the background video h65 for game effect that is continuously reproduced from the time of the first game effect is displayed above the game area h61.

  Furthermore, since the big game is being played at the time of the second game, the round number image h68 indicating the current number of rounds, the round icon h69 indicating the current number of rounds and the total number of rounds performed in the current big hit game, and Then, a right-handed notification image 70 for notification for prompting a right-hand shot is displayed on the liquid crystal display device h5. The round icon h69 indicates the total number of rounds by the number of icons, and indicates the digested round, the current round, and the undigested round in the icon display state (off, blinking, lighting, highlighting, etc.). At the time of the second game effect, the round icon h69 indicates “4” as the total number of rounds (four icons are displayed), but when the promotion effect described later is performed, It is changed to indicate “16” (see FIG. 8-15).

  When the second game effect is started, first, as an effect indicating the start of the game, for example, a countdown display until the game start or a display indicating the operation content such as “continuous hit!” Is performed. At the same time, production sound (sound effects) is output. Subsequently, the second game production is started. As shown in FIG. 8-14, in the second game effect, the moving button image h63 does not appear, but only the repeated hit button image h67 appears. In other words, the second game in the jackpot game is a game in which, in accordance with the effect indicating the start of the game, an operation of repeatedly striking the effect button h26 while the repeated hit button image h67 passes over the reference button image h62. As in the case of the first game presentation, the number of operations (number of consecutive hits) performed while the hit button image h67 passes over the reference button image h62 is displayed in the vicinity of the reference button image h62. As described above, in the present embodiment, during the jackpot game, a game effect is output (second time) instructing to perform an operation at a timing related to the output effect sound while outputting the effect sound. . It should be noted that the operation in the second game effect (continuous hit operation) is different from the operation in the first game effect (pressing operation and continuous hit operation in accordance with the rhythm). However, in other embodiments, the operation in the second game effect may be the same as the operation in the first game effect.

  After the continuous hit button image h67 is displayed, the second game effect is ended, and the game result (success / failure) is notified. The second game effect is an effect for notifying whether or not the number of rounds is 16 times. For this reason, when the type of jackpot is 4R probability variation hit (RUB), the gauge amount does not increase to the upper limit, the game fails, and the round icon h69 does not change. On the other hand, when the type of jackpot is 16R probability variation (RUB), the gauge amount of the gauge h64 reaches the upper limit, the game is successful, and the round icon h69 changes (FIGS. 8-11 (SJ) ), And FIG. 8-15). In the former case, the jackpot game ends in four rounds (after four long open round games have been played) (see FIG. 8-7 (C)). In this case, the promotion effect is not performed.

  On the other hand, in the latter case, after the end of the second game effect, a promotion effect that notifies that the number of rounds is 16 is performed (see FIGS. 8-11 (S-J)). Here, the second game effect is performed in the second round, and the promotion effect is performed in the third round. In the promotion effect, characters such as “Super XXRUSH!” Are displayed on the liquid crystal display device h5, although “XXRUSH!” Was displayed at the start of the jackpot game. When the promotion effect is performed, the jackpot game is continued after 16 rounds (see FIG. 8-7 (B)).

  FIG. 8-15 is a diagram illustrating an example of an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device h5 after the promotion effect is performed. As shown in FIG. 8-15, after the promotion effect is performed, the round icon h69 is changed to indicate “16” as the total number of rounds (16 icons are displayed). In addition, even after the end of the second game effect, the background video h65 and the effect sound are continuously reproduced from the time of the first game effect. Note that, after the promotion effect, since the game effect is not performed, the game area h61 is reduced (may be deleted), and the various button images h62, h63, and h67 are not displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 8-7 (B) and (C), the background effect (background video h65 and music C) for the game effect in which the jackpot game ends is played until the jackpot game ends, and then the jackpot game In the ending, an ending effect is performed. In the ending, an ending effect is provided in which a player is notified of an effect mode that suggests a game state (in this case, either a high probability state or a medium probability state) after the jackpot game ends. This ending effect may be the same effect as the jackpot other than RUB. Also, in the ending, the background effect for the game effect is taken over. That is, the background moving image h65 and the effect sound (song C) for the game effect are played together with the ending effect (see FIGS. 8-7 (B) and (C)).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the first game effect is executed during the variable display of the symbols, and the second game effect is executed during the jackpot game that is subsequently executed (FIG. 8- 7 (B), (C)). Here, the second game effect is the same kind of effect as the first game effect in that it is an effect instructing to perform an operation at a timing related to the output effect sound (song C). . In addition, the background effect is continuously performed from the change display before the jackpot game to the jackpot game (see FIGS. 8-7 (B) and (C)). In this way, by performing the same kind of effect during the symbol variation display and during the jackpot game, the effect can be made continuous before and after the start of the jackpot game. According to this, when the symbol is stopped and displayed, the excitement of the effect due to the notification of the jackpot is not interrupted, and the effect of the jackpot game is continued. It is possible to improve interest with the production.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the second game effect, an operation different from the first game effect is instructed. Here, if the operation in the second game presentation is the same as the first game presentation, the game becomes monotonous and the background presentation before the jackpot game is started after the jackpot game is started. This may give the player the impression that the same game production is simply repeated twice (in the sense that the background and the game content are the same), which in turn may reduce interest. On the other hand, in this embodiment, by making at least a part of the operations in the two game effects different from each other, the jackpot game has continuity in the background effect before and after the start of the jackpot game. The inside production (second game production) has a fresh taste. As a result, the production during the jackpot game can be more interesting.

  In the present embodiment, the first game effect informs whether or not it is a big hit, and the second game effect informs whether or not the number of rounds is promoted (the number of rounds is 16). . Therefore, in this embodiment, since it is possible to provide continuity between the game effect that informs whether or not it is a big hit and the game effect that informs whether or not the number of rounds is promoted, the notice of the promotion of the number of rounds (Promotion promotion) can be raised more.

[First Game Effect Processing by Effect Control Board h130]
FIG. 8-32 is a detailed flowchart of the first game effect process. The first game effect process is an image and sound control process that is output in relation to the first game effect, and includes, for example, a process that changes the display in accordance with an operation by the player. As described above, the first game effect process is executed during the game effect in the variable effect.
In the first game effect, the sub CPUh 131 (corresponding to the CPUa 301 in FIG. 1C) determines whether or not to perform the first game effect in the variation. If the result is affirmative, the first game effect is determined by the arrival of the start timing. The first game effect start command for instructing the start of the game effect is set in the sub-RAMh 133 (corresponding to the RAMa 303 in FIG. 1C).

  As illustrated in FIG. 8-32, in the first game effect process, first, the sub CPU h131 determines whether or not a rhythm game operation has been performed based on whether or not the effect button h26 is pressed ( Step Sh1120). During the first game presentation, an effective period for accepting operations is set, and it is determined that no rhythm game operation is performed during a period outside the effective period.

  When it is determined that a rhythm game operation has been performed (step Sh1120: YES), the sub CPU h131 performs a rhythm input operation (operation performed at a timing when the moving button image h63 passes over the reference button image h62) in the first game effect. It is determined whether or not it is a period for performing (Step Sh1121). In the present embodiment, a period from the start of the first game effect to a predetermined time is a period during which the movement button image h63 is displayed and a rhythm input operation is instructed to the player. The period until the end of the first game effect is a period in which the continuous hit button image h67 is displayed and the player is instructed to perform the continuous hit input operation. Therefore, the sub CPUh 131 measures the elapsed time from the start time of the first game effect, and performs the determination in step Sh1121 depending on whether or not the elapsed time reaches the predetermined time point.

  When it is determined that it is the period for performing the rhythm input operation (step Sh1121: YES), the sub CPUh 131 evaluates the operation timing for the performed operation (step Sh1122). That is, the sub CPU h131 calculates a time difference between the timing when the operation is performed and the timing when the moving button image h63 passes over the reference button image h62, and determines an evaluation result corresponding to the time difference. Here, the evaluation results are determined in four stages of “exquisite”, “best”, “good”, and “good” in order from the case where the time difference is small.

  Subsequent to the processing at step Sh1122, the sub CPU h131 sets an evaluation result command indicating the evaluation result obtained at step Sh1122 in the sub RAM h133 (step Sh1123). The evaluation result command is transmitted to the image sound control board h140 by the transmission process. The image sound control board h140 that has received the evaluation result command displays one of the characters “exquisite”, “best”, “good”, and “good” in accordance with the evaluation result indicated by the evaluation result command. Display on device h5.

  Subsequent to the processing of step Sh1123, the sub CPU h131 calculates an amount to increase the gauge amount of the gauge h64 (gauge increase amount) based on the determination result (step Sh1124). In the present embodiment, the gauge increase amount is determined according to the evaluation result (the time difference), and specifically, the gauge increase amount is determined so that the better evaluation (the smaller the time difference), the greater the gauge increase amount.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the period is not a period for performing the rhythm input operation (a period for performing the continuous hit input operation) (step Sh1121: NO), the sub CPU h131 indicates the number of times the effect button h26 has been pressed during the period for the continuous hit input operation. Measurement is performed, and a continuous hitting number command indicating the measured number of times is set in the sub-RAMh 133 (step Sh1125). The continuous hitting number command is transmitted to the image sound control board h140 by the transmission process. The image sound control board h140 that has received the continuous hit number command displays on the liquid crystal display device h5 the display showing the continuous hit number indicated by the continuous hit number command (for example, “10 consecutive hits”).

  Subsequent to the processing of step Sh1125, the sub CPUh 131 sets the gauge increase amount to a predetermined unit amount (step Sh1126). That is, during the periodical input operation period, the gauge amount increases by a unit amount (provided that it is less than the limit value described later) per operation of pressing the effect button h26 once.

  When the process of step Sh1124 is executed, or when the process of step Sh1126 is executed, the sub CPU h131 has a gauge amount obtained by adding the gauge increase amount to the current gauge amount becomes a predetermined limit value or more. Whether or not (step Sh1127). Here, the current gauge amount is set to 0 at the start of the first game effect, and the value updated in step Sh1129 described later is stored in the sub RAM h133. Therefore, the sub CPU h131 performs the determination in step Sh1127 using the gauge amount stored in the sub RAM h133 and the gauge increase amount calculated in step Sh1124 (or the gauge increase amount set in step Sh1126). .

  When it is determined that the gauge amount does not exceed the predetermined limit value (step Sh1127: NO), the sub CPU h131 sets a gauge increase command for increasing the gauge amount of the displayed gauge h64 in the sub RAM h133 (step Sh1128). ). The gauge increase command includes information indicating the gauge increase amount calculated in step Sh1124 (or the unit amount set in step Sh1126) or the gauge amount obtained by adding the gauge increase amount to the current gauge amount, The image is transmitted to the image / acoustic control board h140 (corresponding to the image / acoustic control unit a310 in FIG. 1-3) by the transmission process. The image acoustic control board h140 that has received the gauge increase command updates the display of the gauge h64 displayed on the liquid crystal display device h5 so that the gauge amount specified by the gauge increase command is obtained.

  Through the above processing, when an operation is performed by the player during the first game production, the operation evaluation result (such as “highest”) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device h5 and the gauge amount increases. . However, the gauge amount does not exceed the predetermined upper limit until the success of the game is finally notified.

  Subsequent to the processing of step Sh1128, the sub RAM h133 updates the gauge amount stored in the sub RAM h133 so that the gauge amount is obtained by adding the gauge increase amount to the current gauge amount (step Sh1129).

  When it is determined that the rhythm game operation is not performed (step Sh1120: NO), when it is determined that the gauge amount is equal to or greater than a predetermined limit value (step Sh1127: YES), or the processing of step Sh1129 is executed. In this case, the sub CPUh 131 ends the first game effect process.

[Second Game Effect Processing by Effect Control Board h130]
FIG. 8-33 is a detailed flowchart of the second game effect process. The second game effect process is a control process for images and sounds that are output in relation to the second game effect, such as a process that changes the display according to an operation by the player. As described above, the second game effect process is executed during the jackpot game following the symbol variation.

  As illustrated in FIG. 8-33, in the second game effect process, first, the sub CPU h131 determines whether or not an operation of the rhythm game has been performed based on whether or not the effect button h26 is pressed ( Step Sh1360). It should be noted that during the second game effect, a valid period during which an operation is accepted is set, and it is determined that no rhythm game operation is performed during a period outside the valid period.

  When it is determined that the rhythm game operation has been performed (step Sh1360: YES), the sub CPU h131 measures the number of times that the effect button h26 has been pressed during the period in which the repeated stroke input operation is performed, and issues a repeated stroke number command indicating the measured number of times. The sub RAM h133 is set (step Sh1361). The continuous hitting number command is transmitted to the image sound control board h140 by the transmission process. The image sound control board h140 that has received the continuous hit number command displays on the liquid crystal display device h5 the display showing the continuous hit number indicated by the continuous hit number command (for example, “10 consecutive hits”).

  Subsequent to the processing in step Sh1361, the sub CPU h131 sets the gauge increase amount to a predetermined unit amount (step Sh1362). That is, in the second game production, as in the first game production, during the continuous input operation, only the unit amount per operation of depressing the production button h26 (on condition that it is less than the limit value described later). As) Gauge amount increases.

  Subsequent to the processing in step Sh1362, the sub CPU h131 determines whether or not the gauge amount obtained by adding the gauge increase amount to the current gauge amount is equal to or greater than a predetermined limit value in the same manner as in step Sh1127. (Step Sh 1363).

  When it is determined that the gauge amount does not exceed the predetermined limit value (step Sh1363: NO), the sub CPU h131 sets a gauge increase command for increasing the gauge amount of the displayed gauge h64 in the sub RAM h133 (step Sh1364). ). This gauge increase command is the same as that used in the first game presentation, and is transmitted to the image sound control board h140 by the transmission process. Accordingly, the image sound control board h140 that has received the gauge increase command updates the display of the gauge h64 displayed on the liquid crystal display device h5 so that the gauge amount specified by the gauge increase command is obtained.

  With the above processing, the gauge amount increases in accordance with the operation performed by the player even during the second game presentation, as in the first game presentation. However, the gauge amount does not exceed the predetermined upper limit until the success of the game is finally notified.

  Subsequent to the processing in step Sh1364, the sub RAM h133 updates the gauge amount stored in the sub RAM h133 so that the gauge amount is obtained by adding the gauge increase amount to the current gauge amount (step Sh1365).

  When it is determined that the rhythm game is not operated (step Sh1360: NO), when it is determined that the gauge amount is equal to or greater than the predetermined limit value (step Sh1363: YES), or the processing of step Sh1365 is executed. In this case, the sub CPUh 131 ends the second game effect process.

[Effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the present embodiment, the effect (game effect) for performing the operation at the timing related to the output effect sound is during the change display of the symbol, and during the jackpot game executed subsequently. (See FIGS. 8-7 (B) and (C)). As a result, it is possible to execute an effective presentation that is related to the fact that the symbol is changing and the jackpot game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the same effect sound as the effect sound at the first game effect is output at the second game effect. Thereby, the continuity of performance before and after the start of the jackpot game can be further improved. Here, in this embodiment, since the operation in the first game effect is different from the operation in the second game effect, the effect sound in the two game effects is made the same as described above. Even in this case, the effect during the jackpot game (second game effect) can be made more interesting without impairing the freshness.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the first game effect is performed, the decorative symbols are displayed in a display mode with reduced visibility as compared to the case where the game effect is not performed (FIG. 8-). 11 (S-G), (S-H)). As a result, the continuity of the performance before and after the start of the jackpot game can be prevented from being impaired by the decorative symbols, so that the performance with continuity during the symbol variation and the jackpot game can be performed more effectively. .

[Modification]
In the embodiment described above, the second game effect is an effect for suggesting the number of long open round games that are performed during the jackpot game. Here, the second game effect may be anything that suggests that the game is advantageous to the player during the jackpot game or in the game after the jackpot game ends. For example, in another embodiment, the second game effect may indicate the presence or absence of a so-called on-hold continuous chain. In other words, when a jackpot game is being played in a state where the right of special symbol determination that will be determined to be a big win is held, so-called hold is performed by performing an effect in which the second game presentation is successful. You can suggest the inner chain to the player.

  Specifically, for example, with respect to the special symbol determination that is put on hold at the start of the jackpot game, the same as the jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 1-9 for explaining the first embodiment) that is executed at the start of the variation of the special symbol By performing the process, it is determined whether or not the special symbol determination that is put on hold includes a jackpot. When it is determined that the winning game is included, the second successful game effect is performed, and when it is determined that the winning game is not included, the second game is failed. Produce.

  Further, for example, in another embodiment, the second game effect may suggest a game state after the end of the jackpot game. Specifically, in a gaming machine in which the game is controlled in the probability variation gaming state (high probability state with electric support) or short-time gaming state (low probability state with electric support) after the jackpot game ends, the sub CPUh 131 At the start of the jackpot game, the second game effect is started without notifying the game state after the jackpot game ends. Further, the sub CPU h131 is set at the end of the jackpot game based on the information indicating the jackpot type included in the opening command received from the game control board h100 (corresponding to the game control unit a200 in FIG. 1-3). Specify the game state after the big hit game ends. Then, when the promiscuous gaming state is set at the end of the jackpot game, the second game production that is successful during the jackpot game is performed, and when the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to the short-time gaming state Then, the second game production that fails during the jackpot game is performed.

  Furthermore, in the second game production, a plurality of stages such as a first round and a second round are provided. And, for example, by breaking through the stage of the first round, it is suggested that after the jackpot game, it shifts to the medium probability state or higher (including the high probability gaming state), and after the jackpot game by breaking through the stage of the second round It may be suggested to shift to a high probability state.

  Further, in another embodiment, the first game effect may be performed during the display of the variation of the symbol in which the so-called sudden probability change, small hit, or loss is notified. Specifically, when the probability change or the small hit is to be notified suddenly, the first game effect that makes the game successful is performed during the symbol change, and when the loss is to be notified, The first game effect that fails is performed while the symbols are changing. Then, when the first game production that is successful during the symbol change is performed, the jackpot game in the jackpot game including a plurality of short-open round games in which the big winning opening (for example, the second big winning opening h19) is opened shortly. If the chance is a sudden chance, the second game effect is a success, and if the big game is a small win, the second game effect is a failure.

  In the present embodiment, a game (more specifically, a rhythm game) is performed as an effect (referred to as an operation instruction effect) for instructing the player to perform an operation that is performed during a symbol variation and a jackpot game. ) Was described as an example. Here, the format of the operation instruction effect is arbitrary, and is not limited to the game format effect. For example, in another embodiment, as an operation instruction effect, an effect may be performed in which an image of a button is simply displayed and button operation is performed at a timing according to the effect sound.

  Further, the operation in the operation instruction effect is not limited to the operation of pressing the button, and may be any input by the player. For example, in another embodiment, the operation in the operation instruction effect may be an operation on an operation lever (stick), or has a sensor that can detect an operation in which the pachinko gaming machine h1 holds a player's hand. In this case, an operation of holding the hand may be used as an operation in the operation instruction effect. That is, the pachinko gaming machine h1 may include input means (buttons, the operation lever, the sensor, etc.) and use the input operation on the input means as an operation in the operation instruction effect.

  In addition, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine h1 and the operation mode of each member described in the above embodiment are merely examples, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be realized with other configurations and operation modes. Further, the order of processing, the set value, the threshold value used for determination, etc. in the flowcharts described above are merely examples, and the present invention can be realized with other orders and values without departing from the scope of the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the screens and the like exemplified in the above embodiment are merely examples, and may be screens of other display modes. Further, for example, it is possible to perform a game effect using a screen with a different display mode depending on the gaming state (high probability state, medium probability state, and low probability state).

[Ninth Embodiment]
A ninth embodiment will be described.
Here, in the conventional hold pre-reading effect, even if the hold image is displayed in a special display mode, the player grasps in advance what kind of effect may be performed according to the hold-up. There is a problem that it is difficult for players to have a sense of expectation for jackpots. In order to solve such a problem, for example, a method of directly suggesting an effect performed in accordance with the on-hold digestion by an on-hold pre-reading effect can be considered, but if such a method is easily adopted, Since the player will be able to grasp in advance the effects to be performed according to the digestion, the game is expected while the player expects a specific effect (pseudo continuous effect or reach effect) to be performed according to the reservation digestion. Another problem may arise that you will not be able to enjoy.
Therefore, in the ninth embodiment, the player can grasp in advance the performance that may be performed in accordance with the on-hold digestion, and the player enjoys the game while expecting the performance to be performed. In order to provide a gaming machine that can be used, the following configuration is adopted.

That is, the gaming machine (i1) according to the ninth embodiment is based on the acquisition unit (i101, Si21, Si22) that acquires the acquisition information according to the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the acquisition information acquired by the acquisition unit. Thus, when the special game determination means (i101, Si309) for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player and the determination by the special game determination means, the symbol display means (i41, i42) Obtained by the symbol display control means (i101, Si312, Si317) for stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the result of the determination after the symbol is variably displayed, and the acquisition means when the symbol is variably displayed on the symbol display means. When information is acquired, acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired information as information for deferring determination by the special game determination means i1031 to i1038), image display control means (i131, i140) for displaying a reserved image corresponding to the acquired information stored in the acquired information storage means on the display screen (i5), and acquired information corresponding to the reserved image When the determination by the special game determination unit based on the determination is made, a predetermined effect execution unit (i131, i140, i5) that executes a predetermined effect according to the determination, and a suggestion effect that executes the suggested effect related to the predetermined effect Execution means (i131, i140, i5), wherein the suggestion effect execution means is based on the acquired information corresponding to the first reserved image (for example, a bag icon) displayed on the display screen, the special game determination means. When the determination is made, the first effect (for example, pseudo-continuous) that may be executed by the predetermined effect executing means according to the determination. A second reserved image (for example, a ninja icon) that is different from the first reserved image displayed on the display screen, while executing a first suggestive effect (for example, FIGS. 9-8 and 9-9) When the determination by the special game determination unit is performed based on the acquired information corresponding to the second effect (for example, different from the first effect that may be executed by the predetermined effect execution unit according to the determination) The second suggestion effect (for example, FIGS. 9-11 and 9-12) regarding the reach effect is executed.
Hereinafter, a specific description will be given with reference to the drawings having the drawing numbers including “FIG. 9-” (hereinafter also referred to as FIG. 9). In addition, about the 9th form example, drawing (FIG. 1) of a 1st form example and another form example may be referred.

  FIG. 9-4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the effect image and the effect actors i6, i7 displayed on the liquid crystal display device i5 (corresponding to the image display unit a114 in FIG. 1-1) in the ninth embodiment. FIG.

  The first hold icon display area i51 (see FIG. 9-4 (A)) is an area for displaying a hold icon that suggests that the first special symbol determination is put on hold. In this first hold icon display area i51, the same number of holds as the number of holds in the first special symbol determination indicated by the first special symbol hold indicator i43 (corresponding to the first special symbol hold indicator a218 in FIG. 1-2). An icon is displayed.

  The second hold icon display area i52 (see FIG. 9-4 (A)) is an area for displaying a hold icon that suggests that the second special symbol determination is put on hold. In this second reserved icon display area i52, the same number of reserved as the number of reserved for the second special symbol determination shown by the second special symbol hold indicator i44 (corresponding to the second special symbol hold indicator a219 in FIG. 1-2). An icon is displayed.

  In FIG. 9-4 (A), four hold icons are displayed in the first hold icon display area i51 in order to suggest that the hold number of the first special symbol determination is “4”. 2 A state in which one hold icon is displayed in the second hold icon display area i52 is illustrated in order to suggest that the number of hold in the special symbol determination is “1”.

  The liquid crystal screen has a first special symbol display i41 (corresponding to the first special symbol display a221 in FIG. 1-2) (or a second special symbol display i42 (second special symbol display in FIG. 1-2). The region i53 is provided as a display region for displaying a variation suggestion image that suggests that the symbol is variably displayed in the device a222) (see FIG. 9-4 (A)). In the present embodiment, a region immediately above the effect image simulating a fireworks cylinder is set as the region i53.

  In the pachinko gaming machine i1, when the change of the first special symbol determination is started and the change display of the symbol is started, the first among the hold icons displayed in the first hold icon display area i51. The displayed hold icon (the hold icon closest to the area i53) is moved from the first hold icon display area i51 to the area i53. When another hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area i51, the display position of the other hold icon is shifted to the area i53 side in the first hold icon display area i51. . For example, when the first special symbol determination is digested in a state where four hold icons are displayed in the first hold icon display area i51 as illustrated in FIG. Of the first hold icon is moved from the first hold icon display area i51 to the area i53, and the remaining three hold icons are shifted to the right in the first hold icon display area i51. Is done. As a result, the number of hold icons displayed in the first hold icon display area i51 is three, and the player is notified that the number of held first special symbol determination rights is three. Become.

  Note that such shift processing is similarly performed for the hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area i52. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine i1 in the present embodiment, when both the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination are held, the second special symbol determination is prioritized over the first special symbol determination. The For this reason, the shift process for the hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area i52 is prioritized over the shift process for the hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area i51. In other words, the shift process for the hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area i51 is performed after the hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area i52 disappears.

  In this way, the game ball wins the first starting port i11 (corresponding to the first starting port a121 in FIG. 1-1) (or the second starting port i12 (corresponding to the second starting port a122 in FIG. 1-1)). Before the special symbol determination based on the acquired information such as the jackpot random number acquired in response to the event, the hold icon (hold image) corresponding to the acquired information is displayed in the first hold icon display area i51 (or the second hold). It is displayed in the icon display area i52). Then, when the special symbol determination and the variation display of the special symbol are performed based on the acquired information corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area i51 (or the second hold icon display area i52), the hold is performed. The icon is moved to the region i53, and is displayed in the region i53 as a variation suggestion image that suggests that the special symbol is variably displayed.

  In the first hold icon display area i51, a white fireworks icon simulating a white firework ball is basically displayed. However, a ninja icon or a candy that is a hold icon simulating a ninja is displayed. A 場合 icon that is a hold icon may be displayed. The white fireworks icon is a default hold icon. The ninja icon is finally used when there is a possibility that the reach effect is performed during the symbol change when the first special symbol determination corresponding to the ninja icon is digested, or after the ninja icon moves to the region i53. This is displayed when the icon changes to a colored fireworks icon simulating colored fireworks. The 侍 icon is displayed when there is a possibility that a pseudo continuous effect may be performed during the symbol change when the first special symbol determination corresponding to the 侍 icon is digested.

[Schematic configuration and operation of the fireworks i6]
Fig. 9-4 (A) shows a state where the firework accessory i6 is not activated, and Fig. 9-4 (B) shows a state where the firework accessory i6 is activated. The firework accessory i6 includes a plurality of (six in this embodiment) rotating members i61 that are configured to be rotatable with the depth direction of the pachinko gaming machine i1 as an axial direction. Each rotating member i61 includes a light emitting element (for example, LED) and has a translucent member that transmits light from the light emitting element (a black portion of the rotating member i61).

  In a state where the firework accessory i6 is not in operation, the posture is such that the six rotating members i61 appear to overlap in front view. On the other hand, when the firework accessory i6 is activated, the six rotating members i61 are rotated at different rotation angles like a fan (see FIG. 9-4 (B)). The light emitting element emits light with a predetermined light emission pattern. For this reason, when the firework accessory i6 is activated, the state where the firework balls launched into the night sky burst and the sparks are diffused is expressed.

  As will be described in detail later, in this embodiment, the firework accessory i6 performs the above-described operation after the decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped for a pseudo-continuous effect and before these decorative symbols are restarted ( (See FIGS. 9-9 (E) and (F)).

[Schematic configuration and operation of the seriously serious object i7]
FIG. 9-4 (A) shows a state where the serious object i7 is not activated, and FIG. 9-4 (C) shows a state where the serious object i7 is activated. The serious sword object i7 includes a sheath member i71 that imitates a part of a serious scabbard, a handle member i72 that imitates a serious sword and a handle, and a blade member i73 that imitates a part of a serious sword. It is configured.

  In a state in which the serious sword object i7 is not in operation, the sheath member i71 and the handle member i72 are in contact with each other, and the blade member i73 is not visible (see FIG. 9-4 (A)). In other words, the blade is in a state of being housed in the sheath. On the other hand, when the serious object i7 is operated, the sheath member i71 slides to the left and the handle member i72 slides to the right, and as a result, the blade member i73 is exposed so as to be visible ( (See FIG. 9-4 (C)). Although not shown in the drawing, the blade member i73 includes a light emitting element (for example, LED) and is formed of a light transmitting member that transmits light from the light emitting element. When the sheath member i71 and the handle member i72 slide, the light emitting element of the blade member i73 emits light with a predetermined light emission pattern. As a result, a state where a part of the blade coming out of the sheath shines and shines when the serious sword is extracted is expressed.

  As will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, this seriously acting object i7 operates before reach establishment in order to suggest that reach is established during symbol variation (FIGS. 9-12 (E)). And (F)).

[Flow of effects performed when the white fireworks icon moves to the area i53]
FIG. 9-5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of effects performed when the white fireworks icon is moved to the region i53.

  When the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) in a state where the white fireworks icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area i51, along with the start of variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the white fireworks icon. The white fireworks icon is moved to the region i53 (see FIG. 9-5 (A)).

  Here, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the white fireworks icon is lost and the variation time of the special symbol is set to a relatively short time (for example, 8 seconds), the region i53 concerned. The white fireworks icon moved to is maintained as it is to indicate that the reliability for the jackpot is relatively low (see FIG. 9-5 (B)). Then, the decorative symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed, for example, with a break, and it is notified that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is lost (see FIG. 9-5 (C)).

  On the other hand, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the white fireworks icon is lost, but the variation time of the special symbol is set to a longer time (for example, 30 seconds), the region i53 In a display mode showing the determination result of the first special symbol determination after the reach is established with the moved white fireworks icon maintaining the display mode (see FIG. 9-5 (D)) and the reach effect is performed. In some cases, decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (see FIGS. 9-5 (E) and (C)).

  On the other hand, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the white fireworks icon is a big hit, or the special symbol variation time of the loss is set to a relatively long time (for example, 90 seconds). In such a case, after the white fireworks icon moves to the area i53, it changes to a colored fireworks icon to indicate that there is a possibility of a big hit (see FIG. 9-5 (F)). As this colored fireworks icon, if you arrange them in order from those that show relatively low confidence in the jackpot to those that show high, for example, blue fireworks icon, yellow fireworks icon, green Examples include a fireworks icon, a red firework icon, and a rainbow firework icon. When the white fireworks icon changes to a colored fireworks icon, in most cases, reach is established (see FIG. 9-5 (D)), and the first corresponding to the colored fireworks icon after the reach effect is performed. The decoration symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination (see FIGS. 9-5 (E) and (C)).

[Specific example of production using white fireworks icon]
FIG. 9-6 is an explanatory diagram for describing a specific example of the effect in which the white fireworks icon moves to the region i53 and changes to a colored firework icon. As illustrated in FIG. 9-6 (A), when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time with two white fireball icons displayed in the first hold icon display area i51, the variation of the decorative symbol is changed. As the display starts, an icon shift process is performed. Specifically, of the two white fireworks icons displayed in the first hold icon display area i51, the white fireworks icon closer to the area i53 is moved to the area i53, and the remaining white fireworks icons are displayed. The icon is shifted in a direction approaching the area i53 in the first hold icon display area i51 (see FIGS. 9-6 (A) and (B)).

  Then, when it is determined to change the white fireball icon to suggest that there is a possibility of a big hit, for example, a predetermined character changes the white fireball icon displayed in the area i53 After the effect display for performing the operation is performed, the white fireworks icon changes to the colored fireworks icon as described above (see FIG. 9-6 (C)). Then, after such a color change of the icon occurs, reach is established and a reach effect is performed (see FIG. 9-6 (D)).

  FIG. 9-6 illustrates the state where the white fireworks icon changes to a colored fireworks icon before the reach is established. For example, the white fireworks icon is changed in color when the reach is established or after the reach is established. May be.

[Flow of effects performed when the bag icon moves to the area i53]
FIG. 9-7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of effects performed when the bag icon is moved to the region i53. FIG. 9-8 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the effect of the failure pattern performed when the bag icon is moved to the region i53. FIGS. 9-9 is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation of the success pattern performed when a haze icon is moved to the said area | region i53. In FIG. 9-8 and FIG. 9-9, the illustration of the serious object i7 is omitted for convenience of explanation.

  When the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time with the 侍 icon displayed at the right end of the first hold icon display area i51 (see FIG. 9-8 (A)), the decorative symbol corresponding to the 侍 icon is displayed in a variable manner. With the start, this hail icon is moved to the area i53 (see FIGS. 9-7 (A), 9-8 (A), and (B)). And the effect image which shows the continuous area | region i56 which is the destination of a haze icon is displayed (refer FIG. 9-8 (B)).

[When pseudo continuous production is not performed]
When the above-described pseudo-continuous effect is not performed during the display of the variation of the symbol corresponding to the icon, the following failure pattern suggestion effect regarding the pseudo-continuous effect is performed using the icon.

  Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses after the hail icon moves to the area i53, an effect display showing a state in which the hail icon is launched from the fireworks displayed immediately below the area i53. (See FIGS. 9-7 (B) and 9-8 (C)), and then the effect display showing the state that the launched kite icon swims in the air and moves toward the continuous area i56 (See FIGS. 9-7 (C), 9-8 (C) and (D)). More specifically, the firework ball i6 fireworks ball (rotation center of the rotating member i61) is located on the extended line of the line connecting the launched hail icon and the continuous area i56. Move towards the fireworks ball of the fireworks material i6. That is, the movement direction of the cocoon icon is a direction in which the cocoon icon approaches the firework ball of the firework accessory i6.

  Then, since the pseudo-continuous effect is not performed in this variation, an effect display indicating that the bag icon cannot reach the continuous area i56 and falls to a place different from the area i53 is performed (FIG. 9-). 7 (D), FIGS. 9-8 (D) and (E)), the hail icon and the effect image of the continuous area i56 are erased from the liquid crystal screen. And when the determination result of the 1st special symbol determination corresponding to a haze icon is a loss, a decoration symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode which shows that (FIGS. 9-7 (E) and FIGS. 9-8 (F) )reference).

  It should be noted that after the hail icon is dropped and erased from the liquid crystal screen, the firework ball icon is displayed in the area i53 instead of the hail icon until the fancy decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 9-8 (F)). Therefore, the player can recognize that the symbol variation has not ended by seeing the white fireball icon displayed in the area i53.

  In this embodiment, a case where a white fireball icon is displayed in the area i53 instead of the character icon (侍 icon or ninja icon) erased from the liquid crystal screen will be described. However, after the character icon is erased, the pattern is displayed. When there is not enough time until the stop display is made, a configuration may be adopted in which an alternative white fireworks icon is not displayed.

[When pseudo-continuous production is performed]
When the above-described pseudo-continuous effect is performed during the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the 侍 icon, the following suggestion effect of the success pattern regarding the quasi-continuous effect is performed using the 侍 icon.

  Specifically, after the heel icon is moved to the area i53, when a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses from the movement, the heel icon is displayed in the area i53, similarly to the case where the failure pattern suggesting effect is performed. An effect display showing a state of moving toward the continuous area i56 after being launched is performed (see FIGS. 9-7 (A) to (C) and FIGS. 9-9 (A) to (C)). That is, the preceding stage part is common to the suggestion effect of the failure pattern and the suggestion effect of the success pattern using the hail icon.

  Then, since the pseudo-continuous effect is performed in this variation, the hail icon reaches the continuous area i56 at the timing immediately after the reach is established, for example (see FIGS. 9-7 (F) and 9-9 (D)). . Next, along with the disappearance of the continuous area i56 and the haze icon that has reached the continuous area i56 from the liquid crystal screen, an effect display indicating that the pseudo continuous effect has been confirmed is performed, and the haze icon An alternative firework ball icon is displayed in the area i53 (see FIG. 9-9 (E)). This is to suggest that the symbol variation continues even after the bag icon is deleted. In the example shown in FIG. 9-9 (E), a state where a colored fireworks icon is displayed in the region i53 is illustrated in order to indicate that there is a possibility of a big hit.

  In this way, when the predetermined time has elapsed after the heel icon reaches the continuous area i56, the left design, the middle design, and the middle design suggesting that the second continuous production of the pseudo-continuous production is entered. And the right symbol is displayed in a pseudo stop (see FIGS. 9-7 (G) and 9-9 (E)).

  Then, in order to suggest that the pseudo second-stage effect is started (the decorative symbol is restarted) before each decorative symbol displayed in a pseudo-stop state is restarted, Operates (see FIGS. 9-7 (H) and 9-9 (F)). Specifically, each rotation member i61 of the firework accessory i6 rotates at a different rotation angle, and a light emitting element built in each rotation member i61 emits light with a predetermined light emission pattern. Along with this, a part of the liquid crystal screen is covered with the firework accessory i6, so that it is not shown in the figure, but an effect image for enhancing the effect by the operation of the firework accessory i6 is displayed on the liquid crystal screen. Is done. On the LCD screen, the word “Another Itcho” is displayed at the same time as the firework material i6 is activated, and this wording is erased as the firework material i6 returns to its original position. Then, each decorative symbol restarts and enters the pseudo second-stage production (see FIG. 9-7 (I)).

  Thereafter, reach is established and reach production is performed (see FIGS. 9-7 (J) and (K)), and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination (FIG. 9). 9-7 (E)).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the bag icon is moved to the region i53 and the variation display of the symbol is started, the failure pattern suggesting that the pseudo continuous effect is not performed during the variation display of the symbol. The suggestion effect (see FIG. 9-8) or the success pattern suggestion effect (see FIG. 9-9) suggesting that the pseudo-continuous effect is performed is performed using the 侍 icon.

  For this reason, the player grasps in advance that the pseudo continuous effect may be performed during the symbol variation corresponding to the heel icon based on the heel icon displayed in the first hold icon display area i51. be able to. In addition, since it is not necessarily determined that the pseudo continuous effect is performed only by displaying the 侍 icon, the player performs the pseudo continuous effect by performing the suggestion effect of the success pattern by the 侍 icon moved to the area i53. You can enjoy the game while expecting to develop.

[Flow of effects performed when the ninja icon moves to the area i53]
FIGS. 9-10 is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the flow of the effect performed when a ninja icon is moved to the said area | region i53. FIGS. 9-11 is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production | presentation of the failure pattern performed when a ninja icon is moved to the said area | region i53. FIGS. 9-12 is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production | presentation of the 1st successful pattern performed when a ninja icon is moved to the said area | region i53. FIGS. 9-13 is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production | presentation of the 2nd successful pattern performed when a ninja icon is moved to the said area | region i53. In addition, in FIG. 9-11 to FIGS. 9-13, illustration of the firework accessory i6 is omitted for convenience of explanation.

  When the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time with the ninja icon displayed at the right end of the first hold icon display area i51 (see FIGS. 9-11 (A)), the decorative symbol corresponding to the ninja icon is displayed in a variable manner. With the start, this ninja icon is moved to the region i53 (see FIGS. 9-10 (A), FIGS. 9-11 (A) and (B)).

[When reach production is not performed]
When the reach effect described above is not performed during the change display of the symbol corresponding to the ninja icon, the following suggestion effect of the failure pattern related to the reach effect is performed using the ninja icon.

  Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses after the ninja icon moves to the area i53, an effect display showing a state in which the ninja icon is launched from the fireworks displayed immediately below the area i53. (See Fig. 9-10 (B), Fig. 9-11 (C)), followed by an effect display showing the launched ninja icon swimming in the air and moving toward the serious area i57 (See FIGS. 9-10 (C) and 9-11 (C)). More specifically, the spear of the serious object i7 is located on the extended line of the line connecting the launched ninja icon and the serious area i57, and the ninja icon moves toward the spear of the serious object i7. To go. That is, the moving direction of the ninja icon is a direction in which the ninja icon approaches the heel of the serious object i7. In addition, in the area corresponding to the serious area i57, the effect image suggesting the serious area i57 is not displayed. Therefore, in FIGS. 9-11 to 9-13, the boundary of the serious area i57 is indicated by a broken line.

  In this variation, the reach effect is not performed, and when the variation time of the special symbol is set to a relatively short time (for example, 12 seconds), the ninja icon cannot reach the serious region i57 and the region i53. An effect display representing a state of falling to a different location is performed (see FIGS. 9-10 (D), FIGS. 9-11 (D) and (E)), and the ninja icon is erased from the liquid crystal screen. . Accordingly, a white fireworks icon is displayed in the area i53 as an icon that replaces the ninja icon (see FIG. 9-11 (F)). Since the reach effect is not performed here, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is lost (FIGS. 9-10 (E) and FIGS. 9-11). (See (F)).

[When reach production is performed]
When the reach effect is performed during the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the ninja icon, the following suggestion effect of the first success pattern is performed using the ninja icon.

  Specifically, after the ninja icon is moved to the area i53, when a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has passed since the movement, the ninja icon is moved to the area i53 in the same manner as in the case where a failure pattern suggesting effect is performed. After being launched from the stage, an effect display showing a state of moving toward the heel of the serious area i57 is performed (see FIGS. 9-10 (A) to (C) and FIGS. 9-12 (A) to (C)). ). In other words, the suggestion effect using the ninja icon is also common to the preceding stage of the failure pattern suggestion effect and the success pattern suggestion effect.

  In this variation, since the reach effect is performed, the ninja icon reaches the serious area i57 (see FIGS. 9-10 (F) and 9-12 (D)), and the serious object i7 operates immediately after that. (See FIGS. 9-10 (G) and 9-12 (E)). Specifically, the sheath member i71 slides to the left and the handle member i72 slides to the right, and in this state, the light emitting element built in the blade member i73 emits light with a predetermined light emission pattern. Along with this, a predetermined effect image for enhancing the production effect by the operation of the serious object i7 is displayed in the upper center (area including the serious area i57) on the liquid crystal screen (FIG. 9-12 (E )reference).

  When the serious object i7 operates and a predetermined time elapses, the same type of left symbol and right symbol are pseudo-stopped on the active line, and reach is established (FIGS. 9-10 (H), FIGS. 9-12 (F) )reference).

  When the reach is established in this way, a predetermined reach effect is performed (see FIG. 9-10 (I)), and the decorative symbol is stopped in a display mode indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the ninja icon. Is displayed (see FIG. 9-10 (J)).

  In addition, since the ninja icon that has reached the serious area i57 is erased from the liquid crystal screen in accordance with the operation of the serious object i7, a fireworks icon instead of the ninja icon is displayed in the area i53 (FIG. 9-). 12 (E)). For this reason, for example, after the reach is established, it is possible to perform an effect of changing the firework ball icon displayed in the area i53.

[When icon change effects are performed]
If the result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the ninja icon is relatively high in reliability for the jackpot, the following second success as an effect suggesting that there is a possibility of winning the jackpot A pattern suggestion may be performed.

  Specifically, after the ninja icon is moved to the area i53, when a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has passed since the movement, the same as the case where the suggestion effect of the failure pattern or the suggestion effect of the first success pattern is performed In addition, an effect display showing a state in which the ninja icon is launched from the area i53 and moves toward the serious area i57 is performed (FIGS. 9-10 (A) to (C) and FIGS. 9-13 (A) ) To (C)).

  And since there is a possibility that the jackpot will be announced as a result of this change, it is assumed that the ninja icon falls seriously without reaching the serious area i57, and the ninja icon uses the furoshiki instead of the parachute. An effect display returning to the area i53 is performed (see FIGS. 9-10 (K) and 9-13 (D)).

  At that time, the ninja icon changes to a firework ball icon wrapped in a furoshiki (hereinafter referred to as a “furoshiki ball icon”) almost simultaneously with reaching the region i53. Accordingly, a button image that prompts the player to press the effect button i26 (corresponding to the effect button a161 in FIG. 1-1) is displayed in the area i53 together with the furoshiki ball icon (FIG. 9-10 (L ), See FIG. 9-13 (E)).

  On the other hand, when the player presses the effect button i26 while the button image is displayed (see FIG. 9-10 (M)), the furoshiki ball icon displayed in the area i53 is a colored firework ball icon. (Refer to FIGS. 9-10 (N), FIGS. 9-13 (E) and (F)). Then, after the reach is established and the reach effect is performed, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the colored firework ball icon (FIG. 9-10 (H ) To (J)).

  As is apparent from the above description, when the white fireworks icon is moved to the area i53, only the color change effect for changing the white fireworks icon to a colored firework icon is performed. When the suggestion effect of the second success pattern using the ninja icon is performed, the similar color change effect is performed after the suggestion effect of the second success pattern is performed.

  Therefore, it is possible to effectively give the player a sense of expectation for the jackpot because the player has lost his expectation for the jackpot due to the fact that the ninja icon could not reach the serious area i57.

  Thus, in this embodiment, when the ninja icon is moved to the region i53 and the symbol variation display is started, the failure pattern suggesting that the reach effect is not performed during the symbol variation display. The suggestion effect (see FIG. 9-11), the suggestion effect of the first success pattern (see FIG. 9-12) that suggests that the reach effect is performed, and the color change effect is performed with relatively high reliability for the jackpot. One of the suggestion effects (see FIGS. 9 to 13) of the second success pattern is suggested.

  For this reason, the player grasps in advance that the reach effect may be performed during the symbol change corresponding to the ninja icon based on the ninja icon displayed in the first hold icon display area i51. The game can be enjoyed while expecting that the suggestion effect of the first success pattern or the suggestion effect of the second success pattern is performed.

  Moreover, when the suggestion effect regarding the pseudo-continuous effect and the suggestion effect regarding the reach effect are compared, the characters used for the suggestion effect are different. For this reason, the player can easily and in advance know the type of the suggestive effect performed at the time of the on-hold digestion based on the type of the character icon (the samurai icon or the ninja icon) displayed in the first hold icon display area i51. Can do.

  In addition, in the suggestion effect related to the pseudo-continuous effect, a display effect is performed in which the spider icon moves toward the fireworks accessory i6 that operates at the timing when the pseudo-continuous effect develops to the next stage, and the suggestion related to the reach effect In the production, a display production is performed in which the ninja icon moves toward the samurai of the serious object i7 that plays a role in suggesting the establishment of reach. For this reason, even if the player cannot recognize what the character icon is displayed means, if the character icon reaches a specific area, the rendering agent corresponding to that area is activated. Thus, it can be sensibly recognized that a pseudo continuous effect and a reach effect are performed.

[Notification effect pattern setting process by effect control board i130]
FIG. 9-27 and FIG. 9-28 are detailed flowcharts of a notice effect pattern setting process for setting various kinds of notice effects performed while the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the set change effect pattern. The sub CPU i 131 (corresponding to the CPU a 301 in FIG. 1C) performs setting processing related to various notice effects as illustrated in FIG. 9-27 (step Si1291). Specifically, for example, the effect pattern of the notice effect is determined by reading the effect pattern corresponding to the acquired effect random number from the table in which the effect random number and the effect pattern of the notice effect are associated with each other. Although detailed description is omitted, for example, a table used when the determination result of the special symbol determination is “big hit”, and a determination result of the special symbol determination is “lost”, and the variation time is predetermined. A table that is used when the time (for example, 60 seconds) or more is used and an effect table that is used when the determination result of the special symbol determination is “losing” and the variation time is less than the predetermined time are provided separately. Referring to any table selected based on various setting information included in the change start command received from the game control board i100 (corresponding to the game control unit a200 in FIG. A pattern is determined. By performing the setting process of step Si1291, for example, it is determined whether or not a step-up notice effect is to be performed, and to what stage the step-up notice effect is to be developed. In addition, for example, whether or not to conduct a serif notice for displaying the character serif on the liquid crystal screen, and in the case of performing the serif notice, the contents of the serif and the type of the serif frame are determined.

  Subsequent to the processing of step Si1291, the sub CPUi 131 determines whether or not the current variation effect is to be performed with the suspension of the first special symbol determination (step Si1292). Specifically, the change start command received from the game control board i100 by the sub CPU i 131 includes, together with the symbol setting information, the symbol setting information relates to the first special symbol determination or the second special symbol determination. Therefore, based on this information, it is determined whether or not the current variation effect is to be performed with the suspension of the first special symbol determination. By the process of step Si1292, it is determined whether or not the icon is moved from the first hold icon display area i51 to the area i53. Here, when it is determined that the current variation effect is not performed with the suspension of the first special symbol determination (step Si1292: NO), the process proceeds. In addition, when the change start command is received in a state in which the number of reservations related to the first special symbol determination stored in the sub-RAMi 133 is “0”, even if it is a variation effect related to the first special symbol determination, Since it is not accompanied, it is determined as “NO” in step Si1292.

  When the sub CPUi 131 determines that the current variation effect is to be performed with the suspension of the first special symbol determination (step Si1292: YES), the suspension of the first special symbol determination to be digested is the white fireball. It is determined whether or not the hold is corresponding to the icon (step Si1293). In other words, it is determined whether or not the icon that is moved from the first hold icon display area i51 to the area i53 with the start of the current variation effect is a white fireworks icon. Specifically, every time a hold command is received, either a spear icon display command, a ninja icon display command, or a white fireworks icon display command is transmitted to display an icon in the first hold icon display area i51, Since the execution of the shift process for each icon is instructed by transmitting a variation effect start command, information indicating the processing results is stored in the sub-RAMi 133, and based on this information, the start of the present variation effect is started. Accordingly, it is determined whether or not the icon moved to the area i53 is a white fireball icon. Here, when it is determined that the hold of the first special symbol determination to be digested is not the hold corresponding to the white fireworks icon (step Si1293: NO), the process proceeds to step Si1300 described later.

  When the sub CPU i 131 determines that the icon moved to the area i 53 is a white fireball icon (step Si1293: YES), the sub CPUi 131 determines whether or not to execute an icon change effect lottery (step Si1294). Specifically, in order to determine whether or not to perform an icon change effect for changing the white firework ball icon moved to the area i53 to the colored firework icon in the area i53 with the start of the current variation effect. It is determined whether or not to make a lottery target. As a determination criterion for this determination, if the variation time of the special symbol in the current variation effect is a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or more, it is determined to be a lottery object, and if it is less than the predetermined time, it is determined to be a lottery object. Although the method of determining not to be performed is given as an example, other determination criteria may be used.

  When the sub CPUi 131 determines to execute the icon change effect lottery (step Si1294: YES), the sub CPUi 131 executes the icon change effect lottery (step Si1295). Specifically, the icon change effect random number used for the icon change effect lottery is updated to a value added by “1” every time the random number update process described above is performed. The count value is acquired as a random number for icon change effect. Then, based on whether or not the acquired icon change effect random number matches a predetermined random number value stored in the sub ROMi 132, it is determined whether or not to perform an icon change effect.

  The sub CPUi 131 determines whether or not to execute an icon change effect based on the determination result in the process of step Si1295 (step Si1296). If it is determined that the icon change effect is to be executed (step Si1296: YES), the display color of the firework ball icon after the icon change effect is determined based on, for example, the change time of the symbol related to the current change effect (step). Si1297). Next, based on the setting information of the variation effect pattern, a change timing that is a timing for changing the white fireworks icon to a colored firework icon is determined (step Si1298). Then, the display color determined in the process of step Si1297 and the change timing determined in the process of step Si1298 are set in the sub-RAM i 133 as setting information for icon change effects (step Si1299).

  If the sub CPUi 131 executes the process of step Si1299, and determines that the first special symbol determination suspension corresponding to the white fireworks icon is not digested (step Si1293: NO), the sub CPUi 131 determines not to execute the icon change effect lottery. (Step Si1294: NO), or when it is determined not to execute the icon change effect (step Si1296: NO), the suspension of the first special symbol determination to be digested corresponds to the strawberry icon as in the process of step Si1293. It is determined whether or not the hold is to be made (step Si1300). In other words, it is determined whether or not the icon that is moved to the region i53 with the start of the current variation effect is a bag icon. Here, when it is determined that the hold of the first special symbol determination to be digested is not the hold corresponding to the bag icon (step Si1300: NO), the process proceeds to step Si1306 (see FIG. 9-28) described later. .

  By the way, when the bag icon is moved to the area i53 with the start of the current variation effect, the suggestion effect of the success pattern using the bag icon as the suggestion effect related to the pseudo continuous effect during the current variation effect. (Refer to FIG. 9-9) Or, it is necessary to perform a suggestion effect (see FIG. 9-8) of a failure pattern using a hail icon.

  Therefore, when the sub CPUi 131 determines that the hold of the first special symbol determination to be digested is a hold corresponding to the bag icon (step Si1300: YES), whether or not a pseudo continuous effect is performed during the current variable effect. Is determined (step Si1301). Specifically, since the setting information of the variation effect pattern is set in the sub-RAMi 133, based on the setting information of the set variation effect pattern, whether or not the pseudo continuous effect is performed during the current variation effect is determined. to decide.

  When the sub CPUi 131 determines that the pseudo continuous effect is performed during the current variation effect (step Si1301: YES), the pseudo continuous effect in which the cocoon icon reaches the continuous region i56 as a suggestion effect pattern using the cocoon icon. Is set in the sub RAMi 133 as setting information (step Si1302). Then, the pyrotechnics operation timing is set and the setting information is set in the sub-RAM i 133 so that the pyrotechnics i6 is activated at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed after the spider icon reaches the continuous area i56 (step S1). Si1303).

  On the other hand, if the sub CPUi 131 determines that the pseudo continuous effect is not performed during the current variation effect (step Si1301: NO), the failure effect pattern in which the hail icon falls without reaching the continuous region i56 (FIG. 9-). 8 (C) to (E)) is set as setting information in the sub-RAM i 133 (step Si1304).

  The sub CPU i 131 executes the process of step Si1303, executes the process of step Si1304, or determines that the hold of the first special symbol determination to be digested is not the hold corresponding to the bag icon (step Si1300: NO), as illustrated in FIG. 9-28, it is determined whether the hold of the first special symbol determination to be digested is a hold corresponding to the ninja icon, similarly to the process of step Si1293 (step Si1306). ). In other words, it is determined whether or not the icon that is moved to the region i53 with the start of the current variation effect is a ninja icon. If it is determined that the first special symbol determination hold to be digested is not a hold corresponding to the ninja icon (step Si1306: NO), the process proceeds.

  By the way, when the ninja icon is moved to the area i53 along with the start of the current variation effect, during the present variation effect, the failure pattern suggestion effect using the ninja icon (see FIGS. 9-11), It is necessary to perform the suggestion effect of the first success pattern using the ninja icon (see FIG. 9-12) or the suggestion effect of the second success pattern using the ninja icon (see FIG. 9-13).

  Therefore, when the sub CPUi 131 determines that the hold of the first special symbol determination to be digested is the hold corresponding to the ninja icon (step Si1306: YES), whether or not the reach effect is performed during the current variation effect. Is determined (step Si1307). Specifically, since the setting information of the variation effect pattern is set in the sub-RAMi 133, it is determined whether or not the reach effect is performed during the current variation effect based on the setting information of the variation effect pattern that is set. To do.

  When the sub CPUi 131 determines that the reach effect is not performed during the current variation effect (step Si1307: NO), the sub CPUi 131 sets a failure effect pattern in which the ninja icon cannot reach the serious area i57 and falls, and the setting information Is set in the sub-RAMi 133 (step Si1308).

  On the other hand, when the reach effect is performed during the current variation effect, the reliability for the big hit is higher than when the reach effect is not performed. Therefore, in addition to the suggestion effect of the first success pattern using the ninja icon It is also possible to perform the suggestion effect of the second success pattern using the ninja icon. For this reason, the sub CPU i 131 executes the following processing in order to determine which of these two types of successful pattern suggestive effects is to be performed.

  That is, if the sub CPUi 131 determines that the reach effect is performed during the current variation effect (step Si1307: YES), which of the first success pattern suggestion effect using the ninja icon and the second success pattern suggestion effect is selected? Successful pattern selection lottery for determining whether or not to perform is executed (step Si1309). Specifically, since the success pattern selection random number used in the success pattern selection lottery is updated to a value added with “1” every time the random number update process described above is performed, the count at the time when the change start command is received is counted. Get the value as a success pattern selection random number. The acquired success pattern selection random number is either a random value corresponding to the suggestion effect of the first success pattern stored in the sub-ROMi 132 or a random value corresponding to the suggestion effect of the second success pattern, Based on whether they match, it is selected whether to perform the suggestion effect of the first success pattern or the suggestion effect of the second success pattern.

  Next, based on the selection result of step Si1309, sub CPUi131 determines whether the success pattern of the suggestion effect performed using a ninja icon is a 1st success pattern (step Si1310). If it is determined that the pattern is the first success pattern (step Si1310: YES), the first success pattern in which the ninja icon reaches the serious area i57 is set in the sub RAM i 133 as suggestion effect setting information (step Si1311). In the present embodiment, since the serious object i7 is activated immediately after the ninja icon reaches the serious area i57, the operation timing of the serious object i7 is set and the setting information is stored in the sub RAM i133. Set (step Si1312).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPUi 131 determines that the success pattern of the suggestion effect performed using the ninja icon is not the first success pattern (step Si1310: NO), that is, when performing the suggestion effect of the second success pattern, The second successful pattern that returns to the area i53 is set in the sub RAM i 133 as the setting information of the suggestion effect (step Si1313). Then, instead of the ninja icon returned to the area i53, a furoshiki ball icon and a button image display period to be displayed in the area i53 are set (step Si1314), and the effect button i26 is pressed (step Si1297). Alternatively, the display color of the firework ball icon that changes the furoshiki ball icon in accordance with the arrival of the button image display period is set, and the setting information is set in the sub-RAMi 133 (step Si1315).

[Effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the present embodiment, when the hold corresponding to the samurai icon is digested, the suggestion effect regarding the pseudo-continuous effect is performed, and when the hold corresponding to the ninja icon is digested, the suggestion effect regarding the reach effect is performed. Is done. For this reason, the player can grasp in advance the effects that may be performed in accordance with the pending digestion. In addition, when there is a possibility that a pseudo-continuous effect is performed, an suggestion effect using a spear icon is performed, and when there is a possibility that a reach effect is performed, a suggestion effect using a ninja icon is performed. That is, even if the suggestion effect is performed, the corresponding effect (here, the pseudo continuous effect or the reach effect) may not be performed. For this reason, by performing the suggestion effect, the player can enjoy the game while expecting that the pseudo continuous effect and the reach effect are actually performed.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, it is suggested that the effect of the success pattern that suggests that the pseudo continuous effect is performed (see FIG. 9-9) or the pseudo continuous effect is not performed as the suggestion effect using the hail icon. An effect of failure pattern (see FIG. 9-8) is performed. Further, as the suggestion effect using the ninja icon, the success pattern effect (see FIG. 9-12) suggesting that the reach effect is performed (see FIG. 9-12) or the failure pattern effect (FIG. 9) indicating that the reach effect is not performed. -11). Therefore, the player can enjoy the suggestion effect while expecting the suggestion effect of the success pattern to be performed. Also, the suggestion effect of the success pattern using the samurai icon and the suggestion effect of the success pattern using the ninja icon differ in the effect mode (for example, the type of icon used for the effect and the moving direction of the icon). Therefore, the player can easily determine which effect is actually performed according to these suggested effects.

  In the present embodiment, the suggestion effect is performed using the icon moved from the first hold icon display area i51 to the area i53. For this reason, it is possible to obtain a higher effect than when performing an suggestion effect using another effect image, and the player can clearly recognize the correspondence between the icon and the suggestion effect. .

[Modification]
In addition, this invention is not limited to the said embodiment, For example, the following forms may be sufficient. That is, in the above-described embodiment, when the cocoon icon cannot reach the continuous area i56, the cocoon icon is erased from the liquid crystal screen, and instead the white fireworks icon is displayed in the area i53. In another embodiment, a pattern in which the samurai icon returns to the area i53 similarly to the ninja icon may be newly added, and the samurai icon may be returned to the area i53 and changed. That is, the success pattern and the failure pattern related to the suggestion effect using the heel icon are not necessarily one type each, and two or more types of patterns may be provided respectively. The same applies to the suggestion effect using the ninja icon.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, when the ninja icon returned to the said area | region i53, the case where the ninja icon was displayed on the said area | region i53 as a furoshiki ball icon, and changed to a colored fireworks ball icon was demonstrated. On the other hand, in another embodiment, the ninja icon may be directly changed to a colored firework ball icon. Further, instead of changing the ninja icon to the colored fireworks icon, the ninja icon may be changed to an icon of another character. That is, the icon change is not limited to the color change, and may be a change that changes to another icon.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, after moving the samurai icon or the ninja icon to the said area | region i53, the case where the suggestive effect using these icons was performed was demonstrated. On the other hand, in another embodiment, a suggestion effect of moving an icon from the first hold icon display area i51 may be performed without providing the area i53.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, the effect which a samurai icon moves aiming at the continuous area | region i56 is performed as a 1st suggestion effect, and the effect which a ninja icon moves aiming at the serious area | region i57 as a 2nd suggestion effect. However, the effect modes of the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect are not limited to those exemplified in the present embodiment, and may be those of other effect modes.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, the suggestion effect regarding a pseudo | simulation continuous effect is performed using the spear icon moved to the said area | region i53, and the case where the suggestion effect regarding a reach effect is performed using the ninja icon moved to the said area | region i53 is demonstrated. did. On the other hand, in another embodiment, the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect may be performed without using the icon moved to the region i53.

  Moreover, although the said 1st suggestion effect was a suggestion effect regarding a pseudo-continuous effect and the 2nd suggestion effect was a suggestion effect regarding a reach effect in the said embodiment, these suggestion effects are step-up notice effects, for example It may also be a suggestion effect related to other effects such as a dialog notice. In another embodiment, the suggestion effect of the success pattern using the spear icon is executed in order to suggest that the firework accessory i6 operates regardless of whether or not the pseudo continuous effect is performed. Also good. Moreover, you may make it perform the suggestion effect of the 1st success pattern using a ninja icon, in order to suggest that the seriously acting object i7 act | operates irrespective of whether a reach effect is performed. That is, the effect suggested by the execution of the suggestion effect of the success pattern may be an effect other than the pseudo-continuous effect or the reach effect.

  Note that the content suggested to the player by the suggestion effect may be distinguished in more detail according to the type of jackpot symbol based on the result of the prior determination as well as the hit and miss. For example, when a jackpot (for example, 1 per 16R length, 2 per 16R length, 1 per 4R length (see FIG. 1-29-2)) that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot game is determined by prior determination, A jackpot that shifts to a probability state (eg, 2 per 4R length (see FIG. 1-29-2)) is determined, and a jackpot that transitions to a low probability state (eg, 3 per 16R length (see FIG. 1-29-2)). )) May be determined, and the content of the above-described suggestive effects may be different.

  Further, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine i1 and the operation mode of each member described in the above embodiment are merely examples, and it is needless to say that the present invention can be realized with other configurations and operation modes. Further, the order of processing, the set value, the threshold value used for determination, etc. in the flowcharts described above are merely examples, and the present invention can be realized with other orders and values without departing from the scope of the present invention. Needless to say. The screens and the like exemplified in the above embodiment are merely examples, and may be other modes. Furthermore, for example, it is also possible to perform a suggestion effect using a screen with a different display mode according to the gaming state (high probability state, medium probability state, and low probability state).

[Tenth Embodiment]
A tenth embodiment will be described.
Here, in the conventional gaming machine, a hold image indicating that the determination of whether or not the big hit is put on hold is displayed on a display screen provided in the game machine. As a result, the player can know the number of pending determination of whether or not the game is a big hit at the present time. However, the on-hold image displayed on the gaming machine merely indicates the number of the determination whether or not the jackpot is on hold. Then, when a variation effect is displayed in which a special symbol is variably displayed in order to notify the determination of being held, it is confirmed that what was the hold image displayed corresponding to the hold is performing the variation effect. The variable right image shown is displayed on the display screen, but the changing right image itself has a poor effect.
Therefore, the tenth embodiment adopts the following configuration in order to provide a gaming machine capable of producing an unprecedented effect using a variable right image.

That is, the gaming machine according to the tenth embodiment has an acquisition means, a special game determination means, a special game execution means, a symbol display control means, a hold storage means, a hold display control means, and a variable right display control means. The acquisition unit acquires the acquisition information when the start condition is satisfied. The special game determination means determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquisition information acquired by the acquisition means. The special game execution means executes the special game when it is determined by the special game determination means that the special game is executed. When the determination by the special game determination unit is performed, the symbol display control unit stops the special symbol indicating the determination result of the special game determination unit after the special symbol is variably displayed on the symbol display unit. The hold storage means can hold the acquired information acquired by the acquiring means when the special symbol variation display is executed by the symbol display control means up to a predetermined upper limit number and store it as the hold information. The hold display control means displays the hold image corresponding to each hold information stored in the hold storage means in the hold image display area of the effect display means. The variable right display control means displays a variable right image indicating that the variable effect is being performed in the variable right image display area of the effect display means. The symbol display control means is configured such that when the special symbol is stopped and displayed by the symbol display means, a fixed display is performed until a predetermined fixed time elapses, and the next special symbol change or special game can be started after the fixed time has elapsed. . The variable right display control means allows the variable right image to be continuously displayed at a fixed time after the special symbol is stopped and displayed.
Hereinafter, a specific description will be given with reference to the drawings having the drawing numbers including “FIG. 10-” (hereinafter also referred to as FIG. 10). The tenth embodiment may be referred to the drawing (FIG. 1) of the first embodiment or another embodiment.

  The first image effect in which the hold icon is subjected to the shift display process and the hold is digested in the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-4 and 10-5. 10-4 is a liquid crystal display device j5 (corresponding to the image display unit a114 in FIG. 1-1) for explaining an example of the first image effect when the reach effect in the tenth embodiment is performed. ). FIG. 10-5 is a screen diagram of the liquid crystal display device j5 for explaining an example of the first image effect when the jackpot effect is performed after the reach effect is performed. Here, the first image effect is an effect performed by deleting the icon (variable right image) when the special symbol is stopped or displayed. In the following description, an example in which the icon is deleted when the special symbol is stopped and displayed is used as the first image effect. However, the icon may be deleted before the special symbol is stopped and displayed. .

  In FIG. 10-4 (A), the icon RIj1 indicating that the decorative symbol image is being displayed in a variable manner and that the variable symbol image is being displayed is displayed in the region, and one first special symbol determination is suspended. The hold icon RIj2 indicating that the hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area. In this state, when a game ball wins the first starting port j11 (corresponding to the first starting port a121 in FIG. 1-1), a pre-determination process is performed using various random numbers acquired according to the winning. . Then, the second hold icon RIj3 appears in the hold icon display area in a display mode according to the result of the prior determination process.

  When the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon RIj1 displayed in the region is “losing” and a variation pattern that does not perform reach production is selected, for example, the left decorative symbol 5 and 8 symbols are temporarily stopped as the image and the right decorative symbol image (see FIG. 10-4 (A)), and then, for example, 2 symbols are temporarily stopped as the middle decorative symbol image (see FIG. 10-4 (B)). ) Finally, the three decorative design images are finally stopped, and a series of variation effects corresponding to the icon RIj1 displayed in the area ends.

  The main stop state of the decorative symbol image described above is maintained until a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses. Next, when the fixed time has elapsed, the display of the next decorative symbol image is started, and the first special symbol determination corresponding to the hold icon RIj2 displayed in the hold icon display area before the hold icon RIj3 appears. Is done. It should be noted that the following display control processing is performed on the hold icon and the icon during the period in which the decorative image of the next decorative symbol image is displayed after the main stop of the decorative symbol image. For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol image corresponding to the icon RIj1 is stopped, the icon RIj1 displayed in the area is deleted (see FIG. 10-4 (B)). Then, in response to the start of the variation display of the next decorative symbol image, the hold icon RIj2 displayed in the hold icon display area becomes the icon RIj2 and is shifted and displayed in the area. The hold icon RIj2 The hold icon RIj3 is shifted and displayed at the display position displayed before the shift (see FIG. 10-4 (C)). When such a hold icon shift display process is performed, in a game control board j100 (corresponding to the game control unit a200 in FIGS. 1-3), which will be described later, at the start opening prize corresponding to the icon shifted to the area. The first special symbol determination is executed based on various random numbers stored in the main RAM j 103 (see RAM a 203 in FIGS. 1-3). Then, the special symbol variation display on the first special symbol display j41 (corresponding to the first special symbol display a221 in FIG. 1-2) is started, and the decorative symbol image variation display on the liquid crystal display device j5 is started. (See FIG. 10-4 (C)).

  Then, when the variation pattern for performing the reach effect is selected as the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon RIj2, for example, the seven symbols are temporarily stopped as the left decorative symbol image and the right decorative symbol image, respectively, and reach is performed. (See FIG. 10-5 (A)). When the reach is established in this manner, the temporary decoration is temporarily stopped at the decorative symbol image in which the middle decorative symbol image is hit according to the selected variation pattern (for example, three identical decorative symbol images are temporarily stopped on the active line). Reach production is performed to ask whether or not to do. At this time, the icon RIj2 in the area and the hold icon RIj3 in the hold icon display area are continuously displayed from the start of the change related to the reach effect.

  10-5 (A), as in FIG. 10-4 (D), the reach effect is performed with the icon RIj2 displayed in the area and the hold icon RIj3 displayed in the hold icon display area. ing. In this reach establishment state, when the middle decorative symbol image is permanently stopped with the same symbol as the left decorative symbol image and the right decorative symbol image, it is notified that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit”. (See FIG. 10-5 (B)). As described above, when these three decorative symbol images are finally stopped, it is notified that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit”, and the icon RIj2 displayed in the region is notified. A corresponding series of fluctuating effects will end. Then, the icon RIj2 displayed in the area is erased in response to the change display of the decorative symbol image being stopped (see FIG. 10-5 (B)).

  Then, when a decorative symbol image indicating that the jackpot has been won is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds), as an opening effect to be performed when the jackpot game is started, an effect or game for informing the type of jackpot A right-handed notification for urging the person to make a right-handed is performed (see FIGS. 10-5 (C) and 10-5 (D)). Note that, in the jackpot effect performed through the opening effect, all the hold icons (the hold icon RIj3 in the example of FIG. 10-5 (B)) displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device j5 are once erased.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 10-6 and 10-7, the second image effect in which the hold icon is subjected to the shift display process and the hold is digested will be described. FIG. 10-6 is a screen diagram of the liquid crystal display device j5 for explaining an example of the second image effect when the reach effect is performed. FIG. 10-7 is a screen diagram of the liquid crystal display device j5 for explaining an example of the second image effect when the jackpot effect is performed after the reach effect is performed. Here, in the second relevant image effect, unlike the first relevant image effect described above, the icon (variable right image) is continuously displayed in the confirmed time after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the confirmed time. An effect using the icon continuously displayed in the special game after the elapse of the next special symbol after the elapse of time or the determined time has been performed. The pachinko gaming machine j1 (corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine a100 in FIG. 1-1) in the present embodiment is configured to be able to select one of the first image effect and the second image effect based on a predetermined condition. Yes.

  In FIG. 10-6 (A), as in FIG. 10-4 (A), the icon RIj1 indicating that the decorative symbol image is being displayed in a variable manner and that the variable image is being displayed is displayed in the region. A hold icon RIj2 indicating that the first special symbol determination is held is displayed in the hold icon display area. In this state, when a game ball wins the first start opening j11, a pre-determination process is performed using various random numbers acquired according to the win. Then, the second hold icon RIj3 appears in the hold icon display area in a display mode corresponding to the result of the prior determination process.

  Here, during the symbol variation display, various notice effects are performed for the purpose of informing the player of the degree of reliability for the jackpot or for giving the player a sense of expectation for the jackpot. In the pachinko gaming machine j1 according to the present embodiment, the same-color chance eye effect is performed as an example of the notice effect.

  For example, in the pre-determination process corresponding to the hold icon RIj2 and the hold icon RIj3 illustrated in FIG. 10-6 (A), a pre-determination result that is “big hit” in the first special symbol determination is obtained. In the first special symbol determination, if a pre-determined result is obtained that will select a variation pattern that is likely to cause a highly reliable reach production although it is “losing”, In the symbol variation effect corresponding to the icon RIj1, the same color chance effect is performed. Here, the same color chance eye effect is an effect related to special symbol determination, and is an effect that three decorative symbol images of the same color are actually stopped (or pseudo-stopped) on the effective line on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device j5. is there. The same-color chance production is intended to suggest that the reliability of winning the jackpot is relatively high in the subsequent symbol variation production, or to suggest a shift to a special production mode called a zone. As done.

  For example, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon RIj1 displayed in the region is “losing”, but information for performing the same color chance eye effect is set, for example, the left decorative symbol The two blue symbols are temporarily stopped as images, and the same four blue symbols are temporarily stopped as the right decorative symbol image, so that three decorative symbol images of the same color are in a state before the actual stop on the active line (see FIG. 10-6 (A)). Then, the same blue 6 symbols as the medium decorative symbol image are temporarily stopped (see FIG. 10-6 (B)), and finally these three blue decorative symbol images are finally stopped and displayed in the area. A series of variation effects corresponding to the icon RIj1 is finished as the same color chance effect.

  Here, in the second relevant image effect, the icon RIj1 displayed in the region continues to be displayed in the region even after the decorative symbol image change display is stopped in the same color chance effect, and the hold icon RIj2 And RIj3 are also continuously displayed at the same display position without performing the shift display process (see FIG. 10-6 (B)). For example, with the temporary stop of the decorative design image, light gathers on the icon RIj1, and an effect is provided in which the effect of the same color as the color of the same color chance effect effect (blue in this embodiment) is given to the icon RIj1. Then, after the display of the icon RIj1 is changed, the decorative symbol is displayed in a real stop state.

  Then, when a predetermined fixed time elapses, the next special symbol variation display is started. At this time, the icon RIj1 related to the previous variation display is continuously displayed in the region until the fixed time and the next variation display are started. Then, when the next variable display is started, using the display screen of the liquid crystal display device j5, the past icon RIj1 to which the effect of the same color chance is given is launched from the region (the icon effect 1). Is done. In addition, a shift display process is performed on the hold icons RIj2 and RIj3 with the execution of the launch effect (see FIG. 10C).

  The icon RIj1 launched in response to the start of the next symbol variation display is produced as a firework ball, for example, and as a firework of the same color as the effect (that is, a blue firework) in the display screen of the liquid crystal display device j5. It bursts and disappears (the icon effect 2; see FIG. 10-6 (D)). The icon effect 1 shown in FIG. 10-6 (C) and the icon effect 2 shown in FIG. 10-6 (D) are performed in accordance with the next special symbol change after the fixed time has elapsed. It corresponds to an example.

  When a variation pattern that is a big hit after the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon RIj2 shifts to a so-called special effect mode called a zone is selected, the effect mode is changed from the normal effect mode to the special effect mode. Enter mode. For example, in the example of FIG. 10-6 (E), for example, a character display such as “sublimation zone” is displayed and a background image or the like is changed to the one corresponding to the special effect mode in order to suggest the transition to the special effect mode. To do. During the display of the decorative symbol image in the special effect mode, a highly reliable reach effect such as various notice effects such as a pseudo-continuous notice effect and an SPSP reach effect is performed. When the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of display is “big hit”, the decorative symbol image is stopped and displayed in a manner informing that effect (see FIG. 10-6 (F)).

  As described above, in the second image effect, after the variation of the special symbol indicating the result of the special symbol determination corresponding to the icon RIj1 is stopped (for example, the fixed time for stopping and displaying the decorative symbol image indicating the special symbol determination). The icon RIj1 remains on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device j5 and is continuously displayed until the next decorative symbol image is displayed in a variable manner. And in the effect performed when changing the next special symbol, the effect using the past icon RIj1 is performed. As a result, in the pachinko gaming machine j1, it is possible to produce an unprecedented effect using the icon (variable right image), and the icon will give a big hit to the player by performing an effect that remains after the symbol variation effect. It can also be expected.

  In addition, in the Example mentioned above, when the predetermination result with the high reliability which wins a jackpot is obtained in the 1st special symbol determination performed next, it respond | corresponds to the 1st special symbol determination performed immediately before. The example which left and displays the said icon until the production relevant to the following 1st special symbol determination was used was used. However, in the first special symbol determination performed after the next, when a prior determination result with high reliability for winning the jackpot is obtained, the icon corresponding to the first special symbol determination is used as the next first special symbol determination. You may leave the display until the production related to is started. For example, when the prior determination result corresponding to the hold icon RIj3 is highly reliable for winning the jackpot, when the symbol variation effect corresponding to the hold icon RIj2 is performed, FIG. 10-6 (C) and FIG. An effect using the icon RIj1 similar to 6 (D) is performed. Next, in the symbol variation performed in a state where the icon RIj2 that has been the holding icon RIj2 has moved to the region, an effect of performing the main stop with a decorative symbol that cannot be reached is performed. And in the symbol fluctuation | variation performed in the state which the said icon RIj3 which was the holding | maintenance icon RIj3 moved to the said area | region, the transition to the special effect mode and the production | presentation with the high reliability which wins a jackpot are performed.

  Next, an example of the second image effect when the jackpot effect is performed after the reach effect is performed will be described. In FIG. 10-7 (A), as in FIG. 10-5 (A), the reach effect is performed in a state where the icon RIj2 is displayed in the area and the hold icon RIj3 is displayed in the hold icon display area. ing. In this reach establishment state, for example, the middle decorative symbol image is stopped with the same symbol as the left decorative symbol image and the right decorative symbol image, so that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit”. (See FIG. 10-7 (B)). Also in the second image effect, the final decoration of these three decorative symbol images informs that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit” and is displayed in the region. A series of variation effects corresponding to the icon RIj2 ends.

  The main stop state of the decorative symbol image described above is maintained until a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses. And if the said fixed time passes, the jackpot production will be started. At this time, the icon RIj2 related to the immediately preceding symbol variation display is continuously displayed in the area during the fixed time and jackpot effect (for example, during the opening effect) (see FIG. 10-7 (B)). When the jackpot effect is started, an effect (the icon effect 3) in which the past icon RIj2 is launched from the region is performed using the display screen of the liquid crystal display device j5 (FIG. 10-7 (C)). reference).

  For example, in the second image effect, when the jackpot opening effect is started on the liquid crystal display device j5, the display of the liquid crystal display device j5 is used to display the previous special symbol variation display (that is, the jackpot is won). The effect of launching the icon RIj2 corresponding to the symbol variation display) as a firework ball is performed. Then, the icon RIj2 launched during the opening effect ruptures and disappears as a celebration fireworks in the display screen of the liquid crystal display device j5 (the icon effect 4; see FIG. 10-7 (D)). Thereafter, a right-handed notification or the like that prompts the player to right-hand is performed (see FIG. 10-7 (E)). Note that in the jackpot effect including the opening effect, the hold icon (the hold icon RIj3 in the example of FIG. 10-7 (C)) displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device j5 is displayed at the start of the opening effect or the above-mentioned celebration gun. All may be erased once after the fireworks production. Further, the icon effect 3 shown in FIG. 10-7 (C) and the icon effect 4 shown in FIG. 10-7 (D) correspond to an example of the second image effect performed in the special game after the fixed time has elapsed. To do.

  As described above, in the second image effect, even after the change of the special symbol indicating the result of the special symbol determination corresponding to the icon RIj2, the icon RIj2 remains on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device j5 and is displayed. . And in the jackpot effect performed after that, the effect using the said icon RIj2 displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device j5 is performed. As a result, in the pachinko gaming machine j1, it is possible to perform an unprecedented effect using the icon (variable right image), and the player can further perform a jackpot effect that remains after the symbol variation effect. It is also possible to produce an effect that improves the degree of excitement.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example in which an effect using the icon RIj2 displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device j5 until the opening effect is performed is used. However, after the jackpot round effect is started, An effect using the icon RIj2 may be performed. For example, in the so-called promotion effect that suggests during the jackpot effect that the number of jackpot rounds increases during the jackpot round effect, or that a transition to a probable gaming state (high probability game state or medium probability game state) is made after the jackpot game, etc. The second image effect using RIj2 may be performed. As an example, even if the jackpot round number is reported as four rounds, the second image effect is used for the promotion effect that switches to the notification of 16 rounds when the icon RIj2 bursts as a firework. Good. As another example, when a jackpot is displayed with a normal symbol (for example, a display that shifts to a normal gaming state (low probability gaming state) after a jackpot game), the icon RIj2 is ignited as a firework. The second image effect may be used as a promotion effect for notifying that the game changes to a probabilistic game state (high probability game state or medium probability game state) after the jackpot game.

  Further, in the second image effect described with reference to FIGS. 10-6 and 10-7, the second special symbol determination has been described with respect to the icon that was a reserved icon related to the first special symbol determination. The same effect may be performed using the icon that is a hold icon indicating that is held.

[Configuration Example of Sub-RAMj 133]
FIG. 10-19 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the sub RAM j133 (corresponding to the RAMa 303 in the drawing) of the effect control board j130 (corresponding to the effect control unit a300 in FIGS. 1-3). This figure corresponds to FIG. 1-28 in the first embodiment.
As illustrated in FIG. 10-19 (A), the sub RAM j133 includes a first reserved storage area j1331, a second reserved storage area j1332, a third reserved storage area j1333, a fourth reserved storage area j1334, and a first reserved storage area. A storage area j1335, a second reserved storage area j1336, a third reserved storage area j1337, a fourth reserved storage area j1338, a pending digest storage area j1339, and a maintenance display flag storage area j1340 are provided.

  The reserved storage areas j1331 to j1338 are related to information included in the hold command received from the game control board j100 (corresponding to the game control unit a200 in FIG. 1-3), and the hold prefetching effect generated based on this information. This information is a storage area for storing the information from the reception of the hold command until the start of variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold command. Preliminary determination information related to the first special symbol determination and the like are stored in the reserved storage areas j1331 to j1334, and preliminary determination information related to the second special symbol determination and the like are stored in the reserved storage areas j1335 to j1338.

  In the pending digest storage area j1339, various information stored in the first reserved storage area j1331 or the first reserved storage area j1335 is displayed after the variable display of the symbols corresponding to these information is started and ended. It is an area stored in between.

  Each of the reserved storage areas j1331 to j1338 includes an area for storing prior determination information, an area for storing display mode information, an area for storing maintenance display effect type information, and the like.

  The prior determination information is information included in the hold command received from the game control board j100 (corresponding to the game control unit a200 in FIG. 1-3).

  The display mode information is information indicating a hold icon and a display mode when displaying the icon.

  The maintenance display effect type information indicates whether or not to perform the second image effect (hereinafter referred to as a maintenance display effect) in which an effect is performed using the icon even after the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the icon is stopped. Or information indicating what type of effect is to be performed when the maintenance display effect is performed.

  Of the three pieces of information described based on FIG. 10-19 (B), the pre-determination information is the first hold every time a hold command indicating that the first special symbol determination has been put on hold is received from the game control board j100. Each time a hold command is received from the game control board j100, it is stored in any of the first hold storage area j1331 to the fourth hold storage area j1334 in order from the storage area j1331, and indicates that the second special symbol determination is put on hold. They are stored in any one of the first reserved storage area j1335 to the fourth reserved storage area j1338 in order from the first reserved storage area j1335.

  For example, when a hold command indicating that the first special symbol determination is held in a state where no information is stored in any of the first hold storage area j1331 to the fourth hold storage area j1334 is received, The included prior determination information is stored in the first reserved storage area j1331. For example, when a hold command indicating that the first special symbol determination is held in a state where various information is stored in each of the first hold storage area j1331 and the second hold storage area j1332, the hold command includes The included prior determination information is stored in the third reserved storage area j1333.

  When a change start command related to the first special symbol determination is received from the game control board j100 in a state where information is stored in any of the first reserved storage area j1331 to the fourth reserved storage area j1334, the first reserved storage area The information stored in j1331 is shifted to the pending storage area j1339, and the information stored in the reserved storage area after the second reserved storage area j1332 is shifted to the first reserved storage area j1331 side. For example, when information stored in the first reserved storage area j1331 in a state where information is stored in each of the first reserved storage area j1331 to the third reserved storage area j1333 is shifted to the pending digestion storage area j1339, The information stored in the second reserved storage area j1332 is shifted to the first reserved storage area j1331, and the information stored in the third reserved storage area j1333 is shifted to the second reserved storage area j1332.

  Further, when a change start command related to the second special symbol determination is received from the game control board j100 in a state where information is stored in any of the first reserved storage area j1335 to the fourth reserved storage area j1338, the reserved digest storage area A similar shift process is performed for j1339 and the first reserved storage area j1335 to the fourth reserved storage area j1338.

  The maintenance display flag storage area j1340 is an area for storing information indicating the state of the maintenance display flag. For example, the maintenance display flag is set to ON when a variation effect for performing the maintenance display effect is started, and when the variation effect performed next to the variation effect for performing the maintenance display effect is started or the maintenance display effect is performed. It is set to OFF when the opening effect that is performed after the changing effect is performed.

[Command reception processing by effect control board j130]
10-21 to 10-23 are flowcharts illustrating an example of command reception processing. 10-21, the sub CPU j131 (corresponding to the CPU a301 in FIG. 1-3) determines whether or not the hold command transmitted from the game control board j100 has been received (step j101). Then, when the sub CPU j131 receives the hold command, the sub CPUj131 advances the processing to step j102. On the other hand, if the CPU j 131 has not received a hold command, the CPU j 131 advances the processing to step j121 (see FIG. 10-22).

  In step j102, the sub CPU j131 adds “1” to the number of reserved special symbol determination stored in the sub RAM j133 (corresponding to the RAMa 303 in FIG. 1C-3) and updates it, and proceeds to the next step. For example, the sub CPU j 131 discriminates the hold command related to the first special symbol determination and the hold command related to the second special symbol determination based on the information instructed to the received hold command, and based on the determination result Then, the number of reservations related to the first special symbol determination or the number of reservations related to the second special symbol determination is updated.

  Next, the sub CPU j131 stores the advance determination information included in the received hold command in a predetermined area of the sub RAM j133 (step j103), and proceeds to the next step. For example, when the sub CPU j131 acquires pre-determination information indicating that the first special symbol determination has been put on hold, the sub CPUj 131 has a hold storage in which no information is stored in the first hold storage area j1331 to the fourth hold storage area j1334. The prior determination information is stored in a reserved storage area that is the area closest to the first reserved storage area j1331 side. On the other hand, when the sub CPU j131 has acquired the pre-determination information indicating that the second special symbol determination has been suspended, the sub CPUj 131 has a reserved storage in which no information is stored in the first reserved storage area j1335 to the fourth reserved storage area j1338. The prior determination information is stored in the reserved storage area that is the area closest to the first reserved storage area j1335.

  Next, the sub CPU j131 acquires a pre-reading effect execution random number, stores it in the sub RAM j133 (step j104), and proceeds to the next step. For example, the pre-reading effect execution random number is updated by adding “1” each time the random number update process described above is performed, and the sub CPUj 131 reads the value updated when the hold command is received. Get as an execution random number.

  Next, the sub CPU j131 determines whether or not to execute a prefetch effect lottery for determining whether or not to perform a prefetch effect (step j106). And sub CPUj131 advances a process to step j107, when performing prefetch effect lottery. On the other hand, if the sub CPU j131 does not execute the prefetch effect lottery, the sub CPU j131 advances the process to step j110. For example, based on the prior determination information stored in the sub RAM j 133 by the process of step j103, the sub CPU j131 determines whether or not to hold the special symbol determination suspension corresponding to the suspension command that includes the prior determination information. Determine whether. As an example, the sub CPUj 131 determines that a lottery is selected when the prior determination information includes information indicating a variation pattern for jackpot or a reach variation pattern, and the prior determination information does not include the information. Is determined not to be a lottery target.

  In step j107, the sub CPU j131 executes a prefetch effect lottery and determines whether or not to execute the prefetch effect based on the lottery result. Then, when executing the pre-reading effect, the sub CPU j131 advances the process to step j108. On the other hand, when the sub CPU j131 does not execute the prefetch effect, the process proceeds to step j110. For example, the sub CPU j131 matches the prefetch effect execution random number acquired in the process of step j104 with any of the winning values of the prefetch effect execution random numbers stored in the sub ROM j132 (corresponding to the ROMa 302 in FIG. 1-3). Whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect is determined by lottery.

  In step j108, the sub CPU j131 determines the display mode (for example, color, pattern, shape) of the hold icon corresponding to the hold command received this time, and displays the display mode information in the hold storage area stored in step j103. Information indicating an aspect is stored. Then, the sub CPU j131 sets a special icon display command for instructing display of the hold icon in the display mode in the sub RAM j133 (step j109), and the process proceeds to step j111. Note that the special icon display command set in the sub RAM j133 is transmitted to the image / acoustic control board j140 (corresponding to the image / acoustic control unit a310 in FIG. 1C) by transmission processing. When the CPU of the image sound control board j140 receives the special icon display command, the CPU changes the color, pattern, shape, etc. of the display mode indicated by the command (for example, the normal display mode). The held icon) is newly displayed on the liquid crystal display device j5.

  On the other hand, in step j110, the sub CPU j131 stores information indicating a normal display mode in the display mode information of the reserved storage area stored in step j103, sets a normal icon display command in the sub RAM j133, and then returns to step j111. Proceed with the process. The normal icon display command set in the sub RAM j133 is transmitted to the image sound control board j140 by the transmission process. Then, when receiving the normal hold display command, the CPU of the image sound control board j140 newly displays the hold display image in the normal display mode on the liquid crystal display device j5.

  In step j111, the sub CPU j131 determines whether or not the set of the hold corresponding to the hold command targeted in the current process and the hold digested immediately before the hold is the target of the maintenance display effect. Then, the sub CPU j131 advances the process to step j112 when the set is a target of the maintenance display effect. On the other hand, the sub CPU j131 advances the process to step j121 (see FIG. 10-22) when the set is not a target of the maintenance display effect. For example, the sub CPUj 131 indicates that the pre-determination information corresponding to the pending command that is the target of the current process indicates that the special symbol determination is “big hit” or that the special symbol determination is “lost” This indicates that a variation pattern that is likely to be performed at a certain degree of reach is selected, and the first condition is that it is a target for a preliminary announcement in the symbol variation effect that is performed first. In addition, the sub CPU j 131 is a variation pattern that can be used for the maintenance display effect (the variation pattern in which the hold that is digested immediately before the hold corresponding to the hold command that is the target of the current process is used without the reach effect). It is assumed that the second condition is that it is digested with a variation pattern indicating a short variation that can be used for the same color chance eye effect. And sub CPUj131 determines with it being the object of a maintenance display effect, when all of these conditions are satisfy | filled. As an example, if the sub CPU j131 stores pre-determining information indicating that the first special symbol determination is suspended in step j103, the sub CPU j131 stores the information in the first reserved storage area j1331 to the third reserved storage area j1333 before the storage. Short variation that can be used for the same color chance effect in the latest prior determination information (that is, prior determination information corresponding to a hold digested immediately before the hold that is the subject of this processing) Is included, it is determined that the second condition is satisfied.

  In step j112, the sub CPU j131 executes a lottery regarding the maintenance display effect, and determines whether or not to execute the maintenance display effect based on the lottery result. And sub CPUj131 advances a process to step j113, when performing a maintenance display effect. On the other hand, when the sub CPU j131 does not execute the maintenance display effect, the sub CPUj 131 advances the processing to step j121 (see FIG. 10-22). For example, the sub CPU j131 performs the maintenance display based on whether or not the pre-reading effect execution random number acquired in the process of step j104 matches one of the winning values of the maintenance display effect execution random numbers stored in the sub ROM j132. A lottery is performed to determine whether or not to produce the performance.

  In step j113, the sub CPU j131 sets information indicating that the maintenance display effect is to be performed for the hold that is digested immediately before the hold corresponding to the hold command targeted in the current process, and step j121 (FIG. 10). (See -22). For example, the sub CPU j131 indicates that the maintenance display effect is performed on the maintenance display effect type information of the reserved storage areas j1331 to j1333 in which the predetermination information determined to satisfy the second condition in the step j111 is stored. Information (for example, information indicating that the same color chance eye effect is performed) is set.

  Proceeding to FIG. 10-22, in step j121, the sub CPU j131 determines whether or not the changing effect accompanying the changing display of the special symbol is being performed. For example, the sub CPU j131 specifies the variation time of the special symbol based on the information indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol included in the variation start command transmitted from the game control board j100, and receives the variation start command. Whether or not the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol is being executed is determined based on whether or not the variation time has elapsed. And sub CPUj131 advances a process to step j122, when it is not in the change production accompanying the change display of a special symbol. On the other hand, if the sub CPU j131 is in the changing effect accompanying the changing display of the special symbol, the sub CPU j131 advances the process to step j135.

  In step j122, the sub CPU j131 determines whether or not a change start command is received from the game control board j100. When the sub CPU j131 receives the change start command, the sub CPUj131 advances the process to step j123. On the other hand, when the sub CPU j131 has not received the change start command, the sub CPUj131 advances the processing to step j151 (see FIG. 10-23).

  In step j123, the sub CPU j131 obtains the value at the time when the change start command is received from the game control board j100 for the effect random number that is appropriately updated by the random number update processing, stores it in the sub RAM j133, and processes it in the next step. To proceed. Then, the sub CPU j131 analyzes the received variation start command (step j124), and proceeds to the next step. As described above, the variation start command includes the symbol setting information indicating the determination result of the jackpot determination process, whether the symbol setting information relates to the first special symbol determination or the second special symbol determination. Information on the winning start information indicating whether or not there is, setting information on the variation pattern of the special symbol, information indicating the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine j1 (high probability gaming state, medium probability gaming state or low probability gaming state), and the like are included. . Therefore, by analyzing the change start command, the type and result of the special symbol determination can be specified. That is, it is possible to specify what kind of jackpot is the jackpot, the loss, or the jackpot. Further, by specifying whether or not the variation pattern is a variation pattern for loss based on the variation pattern setting information, it is possible to determine whether it is necessary to perform an effect with reach or an effect without reach. . Similarly, the variation time of the special symbol can be specified based on the variation pattern setting information. Further, based on the information indicating the gaming state, the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine j1 can be specified.

  Next, the sub CPU j131 executes a variation effect pattern selection process based on the analysis result of the variation start command (step j125), and proceeds to the next step. The variation effect pattern selection process performed in step j125 will be described later.

  Next, the sub CPU j131 sets a change effect start command for instructing the start of the change effect of the change effect pattern selected in the process of step j125 in the sub RAM j133 (step j126), and proceeds to the next step. The variation effect start command is transmitted to the image sound control board j140 and / or the lamp control board j150 (corresponding to the lamp control unit a320 in FIGS. 1-3) by the transmission process. As a result, the variation effect of the effect pattern determined on the effect control board j130 is realized by the image sound control board j140 and the lamp control board j150. The variation effect corresponding to the process of step j126 indicates the determination result of the special symbol determination after the variation display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display device j41 (or the second special symbol display device j42). This is performed until the judgment symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Next, the sub CPU j 131 subtracts “1” from the number of reserved special symbol determinations stored in the sub RAM j 133 and updates the number of reserved numbers using the value after subtraction (step j 127). Proceed with the process. For example, the sub CPU j131 determines whether the change start command determined to have been received in the process of step j122 is related to the first special symbol determination or the second special symbol determination, and the first special symbol is determined. When it is determined that the symbol is related to symbol determination, the number of holdings of the first special symbol determination is updated to a value obtained by subtracting “1”, and when it is determined that the symbol is related to the second special symbol determination, the second number The number of reserved symbols for special symbol determination is updated to a value obtained by subtracting “1”.

  Next, the sub CPU j131 executes a shift process for the reserved storage area (step j128), and proceeds to the next step. For example, when the variation effect related to the first special symbol determination is started, the sub CPU j131 shifts the information stored in the first reserved storage area j1331 to the pending digestion storage area j1339, and the second reserved storage. The information stored in the area j1332 to the fourth reserved storage area j1334 is shifted to the first reserved storage area j1331 side. On the other hand, when the variation effect related to the second special symbol determination is started, the sub CPU j131 shifts the information stored in the first reserved storage area j1335 to the reserved digesting storage area j1339, and stores the second reserved memory. The information stored in the area j1336 to the fourth reserved storage area j1338 is shifted to the first reserved storage area j1335 side.

  Next, the sub CPU j131 sets a hold image shift command instructing to shift and display the display position of each hold icon on the hold icon display area in the sub RAM j133 (step j129). Proceed with the step. The hold image shift command is transmitted to the image sound control board j140 by transmission processing. As a result, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is shifted and displayed on the area side, and the hold icon displayed on the area side is the icon in the hold icon display area. Thus, the shift display processing that is shifted to the area and displayed is realized by the image sound control board j140.

  Next, the sub CPU j131 determines whether or not to start the maintenance display effect (step j130). And sub CPUj131 advances a process to step j131, when starting a maintenance display effect. On the other hand, if the sub CPU j131 does not start the maintenance display effect, the process proceeds to step j132. For example, the sub CPU j131 refers to the maintenance display effect type information in the storage area j1339 during pending digestion, and determines that the maintenance display effect is started when information indicating that the maintenance display effect is performed is set.

  In step j131, the sub CPU j131 updates the maintenance display flag set in the maintenance display flag storage area j1340 to “ON”, and advances the process to step j151 (see FIG. 10-23). Therefore, when the maintenance display effect is performed in the variation effect that starts in response to the received variation start command, the maintenance display flag is set to “ON” at the start of the variation.

  On the other hand, in step j132, the sub CPU j131 determines whether or not the maintenance display flag set in the maintenance display flag storage area j1340 is “ON”. Then, when the maintenance display flag is “ON”, the sub CPU j131 advances the process to step j133. On the other hand, when the maintenance display flag is “OFF”, the sub CPU j131 advances the process to step j151 (see FIG. 10-23).

  In step j133, the sub CPU j131 updates the maintenance display flag set in the maintenance display flag storage area j1340 to “OFF”, and advances the process to step j151 (see FIG. 10-23). Therefore, when the variation effect in which the maintenance display effect is performed ends and the next variation effect is started, the maintenance display flag is returned to “OFF” at the start of the variation.

  On the other hand, if the sub CPU j131 determines in step j121 that the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol is being performed, the sub CPU j131 determines whether or not a symbol determination command is received from the game control board j100 (step j135). When the sub CPU j131 receives the symbol confirmation command, the sub CPUj131 advances the process to step j136. On the other hand, if the sub CPU j 131 has not received the symbol determination command, the sub CPU j 131 ends the command reception process and proceeds with the process.

  In step j136, the sub CPU j131 sets a change effect end command instructing the end of the change effect accompanying the change display of the special symbol in the sub RAM j133, and proceeds to the next step. The variation effect end command is transmitted to the image sound control board j140 and / or the lamp control board j150 by transmission processing. As a result, the fluctuating effect started in accordance with the process of step j126 is completed.

  Next, the sub CPU j131 determines whether or not the maintenance display flag set in the maintenance display flag storage area j1340 is “ON” (step j137). Then, when the maintenance display effect flag is “OFF”, the sub CPU j131 advances the process to step j138. On the other hand, if the maintenance display effect flag is “ON”, the sub CPUj 131 ends the command reception process and proceeds with the process.

  In step j138, the sub CPU j131 sets the icon deletion command instructing to delete the icon displayed in the area to the sub RAM j133, ends the command reception process, and proceeds with the process. The icon deletion command is transmitted to the image sound control board j140 by transmission processing. Thereby, the process of deleting the icon displayed in the area is realized by the image sound control board j140.

  As is clear from the processing in steps j135 to j138, processing for deleting the icon displayed in the area is performed in response to the change display of the special symbol being stopped (FIG. 10). -4 (B) and FIG. 10-5 (B)). However, when the maintenance display flag is set to “ON”, that is, when the change display of the special symbol in which the maintenance display effect is performed is stopped, the process of deleting the target icon is not performed (FIG. 10-6 ( B) and FIG. 10-7 (B)). Thus, when the maintenance display effect is performed using the icon displayed in the area in response to the start of the variation display of the special symbol, the area remains in the area even after the variation display of the special symbol is stopped. The icon is maintained and displayed.

  Proceeding to FIG. 10-23, in step j151, the sub CPU j131 determines whether or not an opening command relating to the jackpot game is received from the game control board j100. Then, when the sub CPU j131 receives the opening command, the sub CPUj131 advances the process to step j152. On the other hand, if the CPU j 131 has not received the opening command, the CPU j 131 advances the processing to step j160.

  In step j152, the sub CPU j131 sets an opening effect start command in the sub RAM j133, and proceeds to the next step. Here, the opening effect start command is transmitted to the image sound control board j140 and / or the lamp control board j150 by the transmission process of step j15. Thereby, a predetermined opening effect for notifying the type of jackpot is started by the image sound control board j140 and the lamp control board j150. The sub CPU j 131 has the maintenance display effect flag set to “ON”, that is, when the effect using the past icon (target icon) is performed in the opening effect performed in response to the opening command to be set, An opening effect in which an effect using the icon is performed is selected from a group of opening effects that are set in advance, and an instruction to perform the selected effect is included in the opening effect start command, and the image sound control board j140 and / or Or it transmits to the lamp control board j150. As a result, an opening effect (see FIGS. 10-7 (C) and 10-7 (D)) in which an effect using the icon is performed is started by the image sound control board j140 and the lamp control board j150.

  Next, the sub CPU j131 updates the maintenance display flag set in the maintenance display flag storage area j1340 to “OFF” (step j153), and advances the process to step j160.

  In step j160, the sub CPU j131 determines whether or not a round start command has been received from the game control board j100. Then, when the sub CPU j131 receives the round start command, the sub CPUj131 advances the processing to step j161. On the other hand, when the sub CPU j131 has not received the round start command, the sub CPUj131 advances the processing to step j162.

  In step j161, the sub CPU j131 sets an in-round effect start command in the sub RAM j133, and advances the process to step j162. Here, the in-round production start command is transmitted to the image sound control board j140 and / or the lamp control board j150 by a transmission process. As a result, an effect during a predetermined round for notifying the number of rounds of the current round game is started by the image sound control board j140 and the lamp control board j150.

  In step j162, the sub CPU j131 determines whether or not an ending command has been received from the game control board j100. When the sub CPU j131 receives the ending command, the sub CPUj131 advances the processing to step j163. On the other hand, if the sub CPU j 131 has not received an ending command, the sub CPU j 131 ends the command reception process and proceeds with the process.

  In step j163, the sub CPU j131 sets an ending effect start command in the sub RAM j133, ends the command reception process, and proceeds with the process. Here, the ending effect start command is transmitted to the image sound control board j140 and / or the lamp control board j150 by a transmission process. Thereby, a predetermined ending effect for notifying the end of the big hit game is performed by the image sound control board j140 and the lamp control board j150.

[Variation effect pattern setting (selection) processing by effect control board j130]
FIG. 10-24 is a detailed flowchart illustrating an example of the changing effect pattern setting (selection) process in step j125 of FIG. 10-22. In FIG. 10-24, the sub CPU j131 performs an effect with reach in accordance with the variation display of the special symbol this time based on the variation pattern setting information included in the variation start command received from the game control board j100. It is determined whether or not (step j1051). Then, the sub CPU j131 advances the process to step j1052 when the reachable effect is not performed. On the other hand, the sub CPU j131 advances the process to step j1054 when performing the effect with reach.

  In step j1052, the sub CPU j131 sets a variation effect pattern of a non-reach effect from the start to the end of the decorative symbol variation display, and the process proceeds to step j1053.

  Here, the sub ROM j 132 stores a lossless reach effect table with respect to the change effect without the reach effect. There are a plurality of effect tables corresponding to the variation pattern (variation time) determined in the game control board j100, such as for 3 seconds, for 8 seconds, for 18 seconds, and for 36 seconds. Is provided. In step j1052, the sub CPU j131 selects one effect table from the plurality of effect tables based on the setting information included in the change start command. For example, when the setting information includes the setting information of the variation pattern indicating that the variation time of the special symbol is 3 seconds, the effect table for 3 seconds is selected.

  In each effect table, an effect random number and an effect pattern are associated with each other. The sub CPU j131 selects one effect pattern by reading out the effect pattern corresponding to the effect random number acquired in the process of step j123 described above from a number of effect patterns stored in the selected effect table. Thereby, the variation effect pattern of the variation effect not including the reach effect is set.

  In the present embodiment, an effect table for a maintenance display effect (for example, the same color chance effect) that is one of the notice effects is included in the plurality of effect tables. When the sub CPU j 131 performs the maintenance display effect using the icon for which the variable effect pattern is set, that is, the sub CPU j 131 digests the reserved storage area corresponding to the icon (typically, the first special symbol determination). If the information for performing the maintenance display effect is set in the maintenance display effect identification information stored in the first reservation storage area j1331 when the second special symbol determination is digested. Then, an effect table for the maintenance display effect is selected. Then, the sub CPU j131 reads one effect pattern by reading the effect pattern corresponding to the effect random number acquired in the process of step j123 from among a number of effect patterns stored in the effect table for the maintenance display effect. Select. As a result, when performing a maintenance display effect in which the reliability in the next symbol variation is notified by the same color chance effect, the color and type of the decorative symbol to be stopped, and the icon to be displayed in the area after the stop display ( The color of the effect image attached to the target icon) is determined.

  In step j1053, the sub CPU j131 displays the determination symbol on the first special symbol display j41 or the second special symbol display j42 based on the determination symbol setting information included in the change start command. At the same time, a decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device j5 is set, the variation effect pattern setting process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step j126. In addition, when the sub CPU j131 has selected the variation effect pattern for performing the same color chance effect in step j1052, the decoration design to be stopped and displayed according to the color and type of the decoration symbol indicated by the selected variation effect pattern. Set.

  On the other hand, in step j1054, the sub CPU j131 sets a variation effect pattern until reach establishment using the effect table for reach or jackpot effect similarly to the process in step j1052, and proceeds to the next step. . By performing the process of step j1054 above, whether or not to perform an effect of quasi-stopping the decorative symbol before reach is established, and in the case of quasi-stopping, three types of decorative symbols that are quasi-stopped on the active line, reach Whether or not to shift to the special effect mode before the establishment, or the type of mode (zone) to be transferred is determined in the case of shifting to the special effect mode.

  When the sub CPU j 131 receives the change start command in a state where the maintenance display effect flag is set to “ON”, the sub CPU j 131 uses the effect table for the maintenance display effect among the effect tables for the effect with reach. Set the variation production pattern until establishment. Here, the effect display table for the maintenance display effect displays the icon (target icon) in the area until the next symbol variation is started even after the symbol variation is stopped, and the next symbol variation is started. In response to this, a number of effect patterns for performing effects up to reach establishment using the icon maintained and displayed in the area are set. Then, the sub CPU j131 selects one effect pattern by reading the effect pattern corresponding to the effect random number acquired in the process of step j123 from among these effect patterns. Thereby, even after the last symbol variation effect (same color chance effect) is finished, the type of effect (FIGS. 10-6 (C) and 10-6) performed using the icon displayed remaining in the area. (See (D)) is determined.

  Next, the sub CPU j131 sets reach symbols to be stopped on the left and right columns on the effective line when reach is established based on various setting information included in the change start command received from the game control board j100. (Step j1055), the process proceeds to the next step. The reach symbol may be determined randomly by performing a lottery process using a production random number regardless of the setting information.

  Next, the sub CPU j131 sets a variation effect pattern after the reach is established (step j1056), and proceeds to the next step. For example, the sub CPU j 131 determines whether or not to perform the long reach effect or the SP reach effect based on various setting information included in the change start command. When performing the long reach effect, the sub CPU j 131 performs the SP reach effect at the end of the long reach. Set whether or not to develop.

  When the setting information included in the change start command indicates that the jackpot is won, the sub CPUj 131 executes a lottery regarding the maintenance display effect, and the icon is displayed until the jackpot game is performed based on the lottery result. It is determined whether or not a maintenance display effect is displayed. For example, the sub CPU j131 waits for the big hit game based on whether or not the effect random number acquired in the process of step j123 matches the winning value of the maintenance display effect execution random number stored in the sub ROM j132. Whether or not to execute the maintenance display effect for displaying the icon is drawn. Then, when executing the maintenance display effect, the sub CPUj 131 sets a variation effect pattern up to the jackpot winning using the effect table for the maintenance display effect among the effect tables for the jackpot. Here, the effect display table for the maintenance display effect is continuously displayed in the area after the symbol variation stop indicating that the jackpot is won during the jackpot effect (for example, during the opening effect). A number of performance patterns in which an effect using the icon (target icon) is performed are set. Then, the sub CPU j131 selects one effect pattern by reading the effect pattern corresponding to the effect random number acquired in the process of step j123 from among these effect patterns. As a result, even after the symbol variation stop indicating that the jackpot is won, the icon (target icon) is continuously displayed in the area (maintenance display effect (see FIG. 10-7 (B))). Is determined to be performed.

  Next, the sub CPUj 131 determines whether or not the maintenance display effect for displaying the icon is performed until the jackpot opening effect that is performed immediately after the changing effect set at the present time. Then, when the maintenance display effect is performed in the opening effect, the sub CPU j131 advances the process to step j1060. On the other hand, when the opening effect is not performed immediately after the changing effect set at the present time, or when the maintenance display effect is not performed in the opening effect, the sub CPU j131 advances the process to step j1053.

  In step j1060, the sub CPU j131 updates the maintenance display flag set in the maintenance display flag storage area j1340 to “ON”, and advances the process to step j1053.

[Effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the present embodiment, after the change of the special symbol indicating the result of the special game determination is stopped, the icon (variable right image) related to the special game determination is displayed on the display screen. It is possible to perform an unprecedented presentation using the icon.

  As an example, when a jackpot game is played as a special game after the change of the special symbol is stopped, the icon related to the change of the special symbol is displayed not only during the fixed time when the decorative symbol image is stopped but also the jackpot game. It can be used for an effect related to a game, and an effect using the icon can be performed in a jackpot effect (for example, an opening effect performed when a jackpot game is started).

  As another example, when the change of the next special symbol is started after the change of the special symbol is stopped, the icon related to the change of the special symbol immediately before is displayed as the decorative symbol image in the special symbol change related to the icon. This icon can be used not only during the fixed stoppage time but also for the effects related to the next special symbol variation, and the icon used for the previous symbol variation effect (for example, the notice effect) in the symbol variation effect. It becomes possible to perform a new production by using.

[Modification]
In addition, although the said embodiment has already demonstrated various modifications, this invention is not limited to the said embodiment, Furthermore, the following forms may be sufficient. That is, in the above embodiment, as an example of the maintenance display effect, the icon related to the variation of the special symbol is used immediately after the icon related to the variation of the special symbol when the icon related to the variation of the special symbol is used (see FIG. 10-6). In the case of using for the jackpot effect performed in (see FIG. 10-7), both are performed, but only one of them may be performed.

  In the maintenance display effect, when the next special symbol change starts after the decorative symbol image is fixedly displayed, or when the jackpot game is started after the decorative symbol image is fixedly displayed, the fixed display is performed. The icon may be moved out of the area or deleted from the display screen of the liquid crystal display device j5, or the icon may be deleted from the display screen of the liquid crystal display device j5 immediately after the finalized display is completed. . Even in such a case, during the period in which the decorative symbol image is confirmed and displayed, it is possible to perform an effect using the icon displayed before the confirmed display. A new production can be performed.

  In the above embodiment, as an example in which the maintenance display effect is performed during the jackpot game, the example in which the icon is used during the opening effect to notify the start of the jackpot is used. An icon may be displayed and an effect using the icon may be performed. For example, the icon is used in a so-called promotion effect in which a right-handed notification effect, an increase in the number of jackpot rounds, or a transition to a probable gaming state (high probability gaming state or medium probability gaming state) is suggested during the jackpot rendering. It doesn't matter if the production was performed. As an example, the maintenance display effect performed during the promotion effect may be an effect in which the promotion is confirmed when the icon bursts as fireworks on the display screen.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, as an example of the maintenance display effect using the said icon relevant to the fluctuation | variation of the previous special symbol in the next symbol variation | rendering effect, the said icon changes to the symbol variation | rendering effect immediately after the change of a special symbol stops. Although the example used is used, the icon may be displayed until another time point and an effect using the icon may be performed. For example, when a notice effect is provided to notify the reliability of a special symbol lottery performed after the next special symbol lottery (for example, the special symbol lottery performed for the second time or the third time), the symbol variation effect in the notice effect The icon (target icon) displayed in the area is displayed in a hold icon display area or a display area other than the area until the change of the special symbol for which the reliability is notified starts. An effect using the target icon may be performed in the symbol variation effect performed according to the variation of the special symbol.

  Further, in the above embodiment, as an example of the maintenance display effect using the icon related to the change of the previous special symbol in the next symbol variation effect, a pre-determination result that is a “big hit” in the special symbol determination is obtained. Or when a pre-determined result is obtained that will select a variation pattern that is likely to cause a high-reliability reach effect, although it is “lost” in the special symbol determination. In addition, although the example used as the notice effect of the prior determination result has been used, the maintenance display effect may be used as the notice effect that becomes a so-called gusset. In this case, using the icon (target icon) displayed in the area, an effect with high expectation is performed in the next symbol variation effect (for example, an effect that bursts as fireworks in the next symbol variation effect). Even in such a case, the symbol change effect in which the effect is performed stops at a decorative symbol that cannot be reached.

  Further, in the maintenance display effect, the content of the notice effect may be varied depending on the type of the jackpot symbol among the pre-determined results that are “big hit” in the special symbol determination. For example, when a jackpot (for example, 1 per 16R length, 2 per 16R length, 1 per 4R length (see FIG. 1-29-2)) that shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot game is determined by prior determination, A jackpot that shifts to a probability state (eg, 2 per 4R length (see FIG. 1-29-2)) is determined, and a jackpot that transitions to a low probability state (eg, 3 per 16R length (see FIG. 1-29-2)). )) May be determined, and the content of the above-described maintenance display effect may be different.

  In addition, the configuration, type, operation mode of each member, etc. of the pachinko gaming machine j1 described in the above embodiment is merely an example, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be realized with other configurations, types, and operation modes. . Further, the order of processing, the set value, the threshold value used for determination, etc. in the flowcharts described above are merely examples, and the present invention can be realized with other orders and values without departing from the scope of the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the screen diagrams and the like exemplified in the above embodiment are merely examples, and may be screens of other display modes. Further, for example, it is possible to perform a maintenance display effect using a screen with a different display mode according to the gaming state (high probability state, medium probability state, and low probability state).

  In another embodiment, at least a part of the processing executed on the game control board j100, the effect control board j130, the image sound control board j140, and the lamp control board j150 is performed on another control board (another control unit). You can do it with For example, at least a part of the processing executed on the game control board j100 may be executed on the effect control board j130, the image sound control board j140, and the lamp control board j150, or other control boards that do not appear in the above description. You may perform in (other control parts). Further, at least a part of the processing executed in the effect control board j130 may be executed in the game control board j100, the image sound control board j140, and the lamp control board j150, and other control boards that do not appear in the above description. You may perform in (other control parts). Further, at least a part of the processing executed in the image sound control board j140 may be executed in the game control board j100, the effect control board j130, and the lamp control board j150, and other control boards that do not appear in the above description. You may perform in (other control parts). Further, a part or all of the game control board j100, the effect control board j130, the image sound control board j140, and the lamp control board j150 are integrally configured to perform processing executed on a plurality of control boards (control units). Two control boards (control units) may be executed.

  Although the present invention has been described in detail above, the above description is merely illustrative of the present invention in all respects and is not intended to limit the scope thereof. It goes without saying that various improvements and modifications can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. It is understood that the scope of the present invention should be construed only by the claims. Moreover, it is understood that those skilled in the art can implement an equivalent range from the description of the specific embodiments of the present invention based on the description of the present invention and the common general technical knowledge. In addition, it is to be understood that the terms used in the present specification are used in the meaning normally used in the art unless otherwise specified. Thus, unless defined otherwise, all technical and technical terms used herein have the same meaning as commonly understood by one of ordinary skill in the art to which this invention belongs. In case of conflict, the present specification, including definitions, will control.

a100 ... Pachinko machine a121 ... First start port (start port)
a122 ... 2nd starting port (starting port)
a200: Game control unit (game control means)
a234 ... Special symbol determination unit (first determination means, second determination means)

Claims (2)

A gaming machine that has a normal state and a probability variation state in which the jackpot winning probability is higher than the normal state, and makes a jackpot determination with a predetermined jackpot winning probability when a game ball entering the starting port is detected. ,
First determination means for performing the jackpot determination with the predetermined jackpot winning probability and determining whether or not a jackpot;
As a state after the jackpot game performed when the determination by the first determination means is a jackpot, the probability variation state is a high probability state where the jackpot winning probability is higher than the normal state and the jackpot winning probability is the high probability state. A second medium for determining whether to move to a lower medium probability state;
When the jackpot winning probability is the high probability state, after the jackpot determination is performed a predetermined number of times, the jackpot winning probability is shifted from the high probability state to the medium probability state with a predetermined probability, and the jackpot winning probability is the medium probability Game control means for making a transition from the medium probability state to the normal state after the jackpot determination has been made a predetermined number of times when in a state;
A gaming machine comprising:   The game control means, when the jackpot winning probability is the high probability state, after the jackpot determination is performed a predetermined number of times, to shift from the high probability state to the normal state with a predetermined probability, The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein

Images